JP2020022827A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suppress such a situation in which a player gets tired of a game in an early stage.SOLUTION: When a specific display mode is displayed up to an upper limit number determined by specific display number determination means, out of a number in which a transition number in which a specific dynamic display mode is selected is determined by transition number determination means, on the basis of winning of a first winning, on the basis of a fact that a residual time of variation executed by the transition number is equal to or more than a prescribed time, an alternative dynamic display mode is selected by alternative dynamic display mode selection means. Therefore, a dynamic display mode after the specific display mode up to the upper limit number is displayed is made a display mode according to the residual time. Therefore, it is possible to apply a different dynamic display mode to a player according to difference of a timing when the specific display up to the upper limit number is performed, and it is possible to make a dynamic display mode applied to the player various modes. Therefore, a game amusement is improved, for preventing such a situation in which a player gets tired of a game in an early stage.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. .

  In such a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that performs a continuous notice display over a plurality of fluctuations and notifies in advance that a specific effect such as a reach fluctuation effect is to be performed in a subsequent fluctuation effect. .

JP 2010-279560 A

  In this type of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine having a further increased interest in gaming.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine that can enhance interest in a game and suppress a player from getting tired of the game early. Aim.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a main control unit that executes a game control, a slave control unit that executes a game control based on a control signal from the main control unit, The main control means includes: an acquiring means for acquiring first information based on establishment of a starting condition; and a player based on establishment of a lottery condition based on the first information acquired by the acquiring means. A right / left determination unit for determining at least a first win at which a first advantageous bonus game is provided and a second win at which a second bonus game which is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game; A hit / fail judgment information generating means for generating hit / fail judgment information for notifying the slave control means of the hit / fail judgment result of the hit / fail judgment means so that the type can be identified, and storing the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied. Judgment information memorizing hand Prior information generation means for generating prior information based on the first information before the lottery condition is satisfied, and informing the slave control means; and dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. Dynamic display information storage means for storing a plurality of different dynamic display information groups formed by the dynamic display information to be made, and the dynamic display information storage means for storing the plurality of dynamic display information groups based on the satisfaction of the lottery condition. One dynamic display information group is determined from the dynamic display information groups, and one dynamic display information is determined from the determined dynamic display information group according to the result of the pass / fail determination and the first information. Dynamic display information determining means, and dynamic display notification information for generating dynamic display notification information for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means. Generating means; Control means, based on the validity information output from the main control means, display means for displaying identification information indicating the validity determination result, display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, A dynamic display mode storage unit that stores a dynamic display mode of the identification information corresponding to the dynamic display information of the main control unit, based on the dynamic display notification information output from the main control unit. A dynamic display mode selection unit for selecting a dynamic display mode of the identification information from the dynamic display mode storage unit; and, based on the prior information received from the main control unit, advance information each time the start condition is satisfied. And a preliminary information storage means for storing a lottery game based on the establishment of the lottery condition, wherein the plurality of dynamic display information groups are won in the first hit by the hit / fail judgment means. did The specific dynamic display information group constituted by the specific dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means upon the determination that The display mode storage unit stores a specific dynamic display mode corresponding to the specific dynamic display information and capable of displaying the specific display mode on the display unit based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition. The main control means sets the dynamic display mode of the lottery game to be continuously executed after the lottery game on the basis of the determination of the first hit by the hit / fail judgment means from the specific dynamic display information group. Shift number setting means for setting the number of lottery games to be determined, wherein the slave control means determines whether the first hit has been determined by the hit / fail determination means of the main control means. Method of setting the number of transitions of means Is determined from the specific dynamic display information group according to the advance information stored in the advance information storage means corresponding to the number of times determined by the number of shifts determined by the number of shifts determined by the number of shifts determined by the predetermined number of times. The specific dynamic display information to be determined is determined before the lottery condition is satisfied, and the specific dynamic display mode selected by the dynamic display mode selection unit according to the determined specific dynamic display information. A predetermined dynamic display mode determining unit for determining the number of times the remaining number of times determined by the number-of-transitions determining unit remains until the specific dynamic display mode selected in the final lottery game is completed. The specific display through all the specific dynamic display modes selected corresponding to the number of times of the lottery game determined by the remaining time determination means for determining the time, and the number of lottery games determined by the number-of-transitions determination means Specific dynamic display mode determining means for determining the maximum number of times of displaying the same, alternative dynamic display mode storing means for storing an alternative dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information in place of the specific dynamic display mode, When the specific display mode is displayed up to the upper limit number determined by the specific display number determining means, the alternative operation is performed based on the fact that the remaining time determined by the remaining time determining means is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. Alternative dynamic display mode selection means for selecting a dynamic display mode.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, in the main control means for executing the control of the game, the first information is obtained by the obtaining means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition based on the first information obtained by the obtaining means, a first win in which a first privilege game which is advantageous to the player is provided and a second win which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The second hit to which the bonus game is awarded is determined at least by the hit determination unit. Based on the control signal from the main control unit, the result of the determination by the determination unit is determined based on a control signal from the main control unit. Generated. Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the first information is stored by the determination information storage means. Prior to the lottery condition being established, prior information based on the first information is generated by the prior information generating means and notified to the slave control means.

  A plurality of different dynamic display information groups each including dynamic display information for dynamically displaying identification information on the display unit are stored by the dynamic display information storage unit. Based on the lottery condition being satisfied, one of the plurality of dynamic display information groups is determined from the dynamic display information group by the dynamic display information storage means. One of the dynamic display information is determined by the dynamic display information determining means according to the determination result and the first information. Dynamic display notification information for notifying the secondary control unit of the dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining unit is generated by the dynamic display notification information generating unit.

  On the other hand, in the slave control means, the display means displays identification information indicating the result of the judgment based on the judgment information output from the main control means. The display information is displayed and controlled by the display control means on the display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information corresponding to the dynamic display information of the main control unit is stored by the dynamic display mode storage unit. The dynamic display mode of the identification information is selected by the dynamic display mode selection unit from the dynamic display mode storage unit based on the dynamic display notification information output from the main control unit. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means every time the starting condition is satisfied based on the prior information received from the main control means.

  The specific dynamic display information group composed of the specific dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means triggered by the determination of the first win by the hit / fail determination means is a plurality of dynamic display information. Included in the group. A specific dynamic display mode corresponding to the specific dynamic display information and capable of displaying the specific display mode on the display unit based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition is stored in the dynamic display mode storage unit of the slave control unit.

  The main control means determines a dynamic display mode of the lottery game to be continuously executed after the lottery game from the specific dynamic display information group based on the determination of the first hit by the hit / fail determination means. The number of games is set by the transition number setting means.

  In the sub-control means, the number of times set by the number-of-transitions setting means of the main control means is determined by the number-of-transitions determination means based on the first hit determined by the hit / fail determination means of the main control means. Each specific dynamic display information determined from the specific dynamic display information group according to the advance information stored in the advance information storage means corresponding to the number of times determined by the number-of-transitions determination means is determined before the lottery condition is satisfied. Then, the specific dynamic display mode selected by the dynamic display mode selection unit according to the determined specific dynamic display information is determined by the pre-specific dynamic display mode determination unit.

  The remaining time until the specific dynamic display mode selected in the final lottery game is completed in the dynamic display is determined by the remaining time determining means. The upper limit number of times of displaying the specific display mode through all the specific dynamic display modes selected in accordance with the number of lottery games determined by the number-of-transitions determination section is determined by the specific display number determination section. An alternative dynamic display mode storing means for dynamically displaying the identification information instead of the specific dynamic display mode is stored by the alternative dynamic display mode storage means. When the specific display mode is displayed up to the upper limit number determined by the specific display number determination unit, the alternative dynamic display mode is replaced based on the fact that the remaining time determined by the remaining time determination unit is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. It is selected by the dynamic display mode selection means.

  Thus, after the specific display mode up to the upper limit number of times is displayed, the dynamic display mode can be changed to a display mode that matches the remaining time. Therefore, different dynamic display modes can be provided to the player depending on the timing of the specific display up to the upper limit number of times, and the dynamic display modes provided to the player can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter C2 and a big hit type in a special symbol, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a second hit random number counter C4 and a hit in a normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship typically, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the look-ahead effect lottery table 1, and (d) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the look-ahead effect lottery table 2. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a look-ahead count lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a look-ahead effect selection table, and (c) is an effect content command selection table. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the preview data table 1, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the preview data table 2, and (c) is a schematic diagram of the preview data table 2. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a data table 3. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of the pre-reading notice 1 displayed on the third symbol display device, and (b) is a view of a display mode of the pre-reading notice 2 displayed on the third symbol display device. It is a figure showing an example, and (c) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of pre-reading notice 3 displayed on a 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a timing chart showing the timing at which the prefetching advance notice display mode is displayed when the number of prefetching advance notices is four, and (b) is a timing chart showing the timing when the prefetching advance notice mode is three. 5 is a timing chart showing the displayed timing. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the look-ahead effect selection process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the look-ahead effect lottery process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display prefetch command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a notice frequency selection table according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a SW scenario table according to the second embodiment. It is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the effect selection table 1 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the effect selection table 2 in the second embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure variation 1 which is an example of a variation pattern in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation pattern in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the contents of figure fluctuation 2, and (c) is the figure which showed typically the contents of special figure fluctuation 3 which is an example of the fluctuation pattern in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of the special figure fluctuation | variation 4 which is an example of the fluctuation pattern in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a special figure which is an example of the fluctuation pattern in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a fluctuation 5. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a preview data table 1 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a preview data table 2 in the second embodiment. FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a preview data table 3 according to the second embodiment. It is the model which showed typically an example of the notice data table 4 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows start winning processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect selection process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a notice frequency selection table 2 in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the SW scenario table 2 in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the effect selection table 3 in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production lottery process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed command judgment processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect selection processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect selection process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a status selection table in the fifth embodiment. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of status information according to the fifth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a small hit exclusive change pattern in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a small hit exclusive change pattern selection table (status B) in the fifth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example, and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the small hit only fluctuation pattern selection table (status C) in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a small hit-only variation pattern selection table (status D) in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a small hit-only variation pattern selection in the fifth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the table (status E) typically. It is a timing chart of the fluctuation display when the number of transition fluctuations in the fifth embodiment is three. (A1) and (a2) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of variation 1 when the number of transition variations in the fifth embodiment is three, and (b1) and (b2) are diagrams of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a variation 2 when the number of transition variations in is three, and (c1- (A)) and (c1- (B)) show that the number of transition variations in the fifth embodiment is FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of a fluctuation 3 in the case of three times. (C2) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a variation 3 when the number of transition variations is three in the fifth embodiment, where (d1- (A)), (d1- (B)), and (d1). d2) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a variation 3 when the number of transition variations is three in the fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the status shift processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed variable display setting processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart of variable display in the case of no alternative variable display in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart of variable display in the case of alternative variable display in the sixth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a small hit-only variation pattern table in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a small hit-only variation pattern selection table (status B) in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the small hit variation pattern selection table (status C) according to the sixth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a small hit exclusive change pattern selection table (status D) in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a small hit exclusive change pattern selection in the sixth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the table (status E) typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of an effect time setting table according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a maximum effect number determination table according to the sixth embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram, (c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically an example of an alternative variation pattern table in a 6th embodiment, and (d) is a mimetic diagram of an example of an alternative production lottery table in a 6th embodiment. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows start winning processing 3 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch lottery process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed main processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the prefetching effect lottery process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed a status command receiving processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed alternative production lottery processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a sectional view of a variable winning device in a 7th embodiment. It is a top view showing a part of the inside of the variable winning device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 3 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the modification of a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a modification of a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric auditors product opening / closing process 3 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 7th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is set to ON, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the distance, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first symbol) is selected when the ball passes through the second entrance 67. Lottery). In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance opening 64, the winning or non-judgment of the special symbol jackpot is performed, and if the special symbol jackpot is determined, the type of the jackpot is determined. Is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) Release and the release is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of jackpot types for special symbols: "jackpot A" and "jackpot B". After the special game state ends, as a value added after the end of the jackpot, a game corresponding to these jackpot types is performed. (Game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the variation of the special symbol, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds), The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed in the first symbol display. This is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. Note that a special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, it is determined whether the symbol is a hit or not. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. State. In other words, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the first entry opening 64, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is increased to the first symbol display device 37. , And also at the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, as the jackpot types of the special symbols, two types of “jackpot A” and “jackpot B” are provided.

  In the case of "big hit A" and "big hit B", both are in the special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit), and then, as the added value after the big hit is "big hit A", the next big hit is Until that time, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a special symbol high probability state (special symbol is being changed). On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", the time of the ordinary symbol is reduced until the lottery is executed (until the change of the special symbol is started) 100 times after the end of the big hit.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (special symbol is being changed). In other words, the special game state (16R jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is referred to as the special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol probability state, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (medium symbol time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state", which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during normal time. .

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the probable change period of the special symbol are common, and according to the type of the jackpot, `` the time reduction of the ordinary symbol '' The period of “state” is changed. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Also, for example, instead of changing the period during which the “normal symbol time saving state” is set according to the type of the jackpot, a time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 or one time The number of times the electric accessory is opened at the time of the normal symbol may be changed. Also, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol time reduction state” are set, but after the “special symbol high probability state” ends, the “normal symbol time reduction state” ".

  In the pachinko machine 10, when an initial setting is performed by turning on a power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “low probability state of special symbol”. Thereafter, when the special symbol hits, the state shifts to the “special symbol high probability state” and to the “normal symbol time reduction state”.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by displaying a lighting state to indicate whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64, is performed, or the variation is performed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a change is not executed among the balls inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the first entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four times, but three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) if the jackpot is a jackpot. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), the display of the special symbol (first symbol) is changed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with the trigger as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the special symbol lottery result is "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. In the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each retained ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when a ball passes through the second entrance 67, is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (a second symbol) according to a lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67, a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" are alternately lit as the second symbol. A variable display is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 for a predetermined time. It is configured so as to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball easily enters the first entrance hole 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the plurality of lamps on and off in the second symbol display device 83, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of passing balls at the second entrance 67 is three or less, or five or more. (For example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Pre-reading production>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entrance 64 and various counters have been acquired for the reserved ball of the special symbol, various types of information (whether or not, type of stop, , Fluctuation patterns) are determined (read ahead) in advance. When the pre-reading is completed, a prize information command (big hit prize command or out-of-prize prize command) including various information (acceptance, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-read is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute a prefetch effect.

  Here, the pre-reading effect will be described. As shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), the pre-reading effect is a notice effect that is executed across the fluctuation of the special symbol (third symbol). As the contents of the notice effect, characters indicating the number of prefetch effects are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIGS. At that time, the background color of the character is selected and displayed by lottery (one of blue, yellow, and red).

  Specifically, a case where four times are selected in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 13A will be described as an example. A look-ahead is executed for a reserved ball stored in the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the MPU 201 of the MPU 201, and a prefetch effect is provided for a winning information command based on the look-ahead. When it is determined to execute, when the prefetching effect is determined four times, a prefetching effect as shown in FIG. 13A is executed across the variation from the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the prefetching effect in which the number of prefetching effects is four, variation 1 (fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved first area) and variation 2 (fluctuation in the reserved second area) 12 (a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a prefetch effect of the first notice, which is the first prefetch effect. This notice display is displayed before the fluctuation of the special symbol (third symbol) in the fluctuation of the fluctuation 1 stops (while it is fluctuating). During this period (in this embodiment, the notice display time is 3 seconds).

  Next, between the fluctuation 2 and the fluctuation 3 (the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved third area), the "second time" shown in FIG. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This notice display is displayed before the change of the special symbol (third symbol) of the change 2 stops (while changing), and the special symbol of the change 3 starts to change as in the first notice display. Even if the timing comes, it is displayed for a while (in this embodiment, the notice display time is 3 seconds).

  After that, between the fluctuation 3 and the fluctuation 4 (the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved fourth area), as the look-ahead effect of the notice 3 which is the third look-ahead effect, the “third time” shown in FIG. The character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This notice display is displayed before the change of the special symbol of the variation 3 (the third symbol) stops (while it is changing), and the special symbol of the variation 4 is displayed in the same manner as the first and second notice displays. Even when the timing to start the fluctuation is displayed, the display is performed for a while (in this embodiment, the notice display time is 3 seconds). At the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, if the special symbol is hidden by the display of the notice effect, a small “小 さ い” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a substitute for the special symbol (the third symbol). It is displayed and blinks, for example, green and white during the change, and when the special symbol stops, it is stopped and displayed in white to indicate the departure.

  In this way, in the look-ahead effect, the stop display of the special symbol is hidden by the notice until the final number of the look-ahead effect, and the next variable display is started. You can make it appear as if you are continuing. Therefore, it is possible to show the fluctuation effect without clearly showing the change of the deviation to the player, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is disappointed by the deviation.

  Further, the specific notice display mode (corresponding to notices 1 to 3) displayed in the look-ahead effect is, as shown in the detailed view of FIG. The display is started when or shortly before switching from the state of the high-speed fluctuation period in which the symbols are variably displayed to the state of the low-speed fluctuation period in which the symbols are displayed at a low speed. Then, the period during which the symbol is fixed and stopped is also displayed, and the next fluctuation display is started, and is continuously displayed during the low-speed fluctuation period of the fluctuation. Notice 2 and notice 3 have the same configuration.

  This allows a plurality of variations to appear as if one variation were being displayed much faster. Therefore, it is possible to make a plurality of changes appear as one change.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol is hidden in the specific notice display mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The third symbol is displayed in one corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 during the period in which the specific notice display mode is displayed. For example, the design may be configured such that the design is reduced to a small size or the design is fluctuated and displayed as a temporary design (for example, “「 ”,“ × ”, etc.).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the third symbol is configured to be hidden during the period in which the specific notice display mode is displayed, but the start timing of the variable display of the third symbol may be delayed. . In this case, the fluctuation display of the third symbol may be started at a high speed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load for controlling the display of the third symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the details will be described later, since the last fluctuation of the look-ahead effect is configured to be a super reach or a jackpot reach, a notice effect of the look-ahead effect is displayed to the player. This will increase your expectations for jackpots. Therefore, the player can play the game with expectation that the pre-reading effect will not be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Also, since the look-ahead effect is displayed at a timing before the timing of the stop of the design of the change, the player does not perform the look-ahead effect at the start of the change, as compared with the case where the look-ahead effect is performed at the start of the change. The disadvantage of being disappointed early can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, even when the third symbol is hidden by displaying the notice effect, an alternative symbol (“「 ”in the present embodiment) is displayed. It can be confirmed by the design. Here, since the alternative symbol is configured to be displayed smaller than the normal symbol, it is difficult to identify the alternative special symbol. Therefore, the player who wants to know the stop timing of the special symbol can be informed, and for the player who wants to play according to the production of the game, it is difficult to understand the stop timing of the special symbol as the design effect. Thus, it is possible to show an effect as if one change is performed in all the number of prefetching effects.

  In the present embodiment, the change of the special symbol is hidden by the notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol is stopped at a chance such as “3”, “4” or “1”. May be. Further, the special symbol may be displayed in another symbol different from the normal symbol (for example, a character of a girl character or a character such as a chance).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the pre-reading effect, all the notice effects are configured to straddle two fluctuations. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured. With such a configuration, various announcement effects can be performed. Furthermore, the notice effect may be configured to be different depending on the result of the right / wrong judgment of the last look-ahead effect (for example, when the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the notice effect across fluctuations is likely to be selected). With this configuration, it is possible to easily determine the result of the determination as to whether or not the information is valid based on the mode of the announcement effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of prefetch effects is configured to be selected by lottery. However, when a jackpot winning command is received, a greater number of prefetch effects is configured to be selected. Is also good. By configuring in this way, a larger number of advance notice effects are displayed, so that the player can expect higher jackpots.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

<Electrical configuration of main controller 110>
The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in synchronization with the timing of entering the ball 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to a special value. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the big hit set by the symbol big hit random number table, it decides that it is the big hit of the special design. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used when the special symbol has a low probability (the period when the special symbol is in the low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot from the low probability (the special symbol) ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the special symbol high probability and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the special symbol low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first one The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are three random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value "7, 107, 282" is a special symbol for the low probability. It is stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of the random numbers is three and the total number of the random numbers to be the big hit is three, so the probability of the big hit of the special symbol is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are thirty random numbers which are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the value is “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Is stored in As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300 and the total number of jackpot random numbers is 30, so the probability of the special symbol jackpot is "1/10".

  In this embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, and the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time Therefore, a random number value for each jackpot is set so as not to be a duplicate value. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a big hit is changed depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot to be predicted, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 7A, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 59” is “big hit A”. When the value is “60 to 99”, the big hit type is “big hit B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hits (big hits A and big hits B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random number value for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random number value) is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99) and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., in the range of 90-97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than before and after the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random value) is set in a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of the random number value set for each type of stop according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In this table, the "reach out of front and rear" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front and rear out" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select "reach out of front and rear" or "reach other than front and rear out". In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a small low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, the reach display with a long effect time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-reach reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). It is acquired at the timing when a game ball enters the first entrance hole 64 and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 24) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (not shown) storing a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. I have.

  In the variation pattern table, for example, “variation (for a long time)”, “variation (for a short time)”, “variable normal reach”, “variable super reach”, “variable special reach” as variation patterns for the deviation. Various types are defined, and as the variation patterns of the jackpot A and the jackpot B, various types of “shared normal reach”, various types of “shared super reach”, and various types of “shared special reach” are defined. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being performed, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is set by a random number table per normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the normal symbol. When the value matches the value of the random number which is a win set by the win random number table, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, the random number table per ordinary symbol is used when the ordinary symbol has a low probability (the period in which the ordinary symbol is in the normal state) and when the ordinary symbol has a higher probability of being hit by the ordinary symbol than when the ordinary symbol has a low probability. And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of them are set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 24 out of 240 in the total number of random numbers, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has the low probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 6, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 24), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 23). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When NMI is input to the terminal, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and It has a counter 203e and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Of the vacant areas of the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are changed to the execution area. Is shifted (moved), and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball opening 64, and as soon as the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained in accordance with the starting winning, the original special symbol is obtained. Apart from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the respective counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various types of data obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each counter value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the winning start. Predicting the information will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to pass / fail, stop type, change pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts a winning / failure, a stop type, and a variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

  In addition, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the winning / failing determination result (the result of the pre-reading determination) determined in S407 of the start winning process (S106 in FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 described later is also held. It is stored in each of the first to fourth areas.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding area). Of the vacant areas in the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored as in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases by 1 to a maximum value of four. It is added (see S404 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 17).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 17 and S405 in FIG. 19). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d counts the number of waiting balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. The counter counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S704 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 20).

  If the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67 and the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, the second random number per hit The value of the counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. It is not performed (S703 in FIG. 21: No).

  The time reduction counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203e during time reduction is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203e is set to zero, and the main control device 110 performs a lottery of a special symbol and sets a value according to the type of the big hit each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Is done. In other words, when a special symbol hits, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is newly set regardless of the value of the time-saving medium time counter 203e.

  Specifically, if it is determined that the “big hit B” is set, it is set to 100 (see S214 in FIG. 17). Thereafter, until the value of the counter 203e during working hours is reduced to 0, 1 is subtracted each time the fluctuation effect of the special symbol ends (S217 in FIG. 17).

  When the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter 203e during time saving is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the random number table for the normal symbol for the high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203e during time saving is 0, the lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for the low probability time (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 20).

  The other memory area 203z is an area in which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores various other flags and data necessary for controlling the pachinko machine 10.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the sphere launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the sphere according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the sphere control is instructed by the main control device 110. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores control programs necessary for various controls, various data, and the like. As a part thereof, a prefetching effect lottery table 222a, a prefetching number lottery table 222b, a prefetching effect selection table 222c, and an effect content command selection table 222d are respectively set.

  The prefetch effect lottery table 222a is a data table for determining whether a prefetch effect is present or not. The look-ahead effect lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 7C and the look-ahead effect lottery table 2 shown in FIG. The look-ahead effect lottery table 222a is a data table used for performing a lottery with and without a look-ahead effect. When it is determined that the big hit determination flag 223e is ON in the process of S1603 of the look-ahead effect lottery process (S1412 in FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the look-ahead effect lottery table 2 is selected. A lottery of a pre-reading effect is performed (S1604 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot determination flag 223e is off, the prefetch effect lottery table 1 is selected, and the prefetch effect lottery is performed (S1605 in FIG. 29). In the present embodiment, the value of the effect counter 223h for selecting the presence of the prefetch effect is set larger in the prefetch effect lottery table 2, and the value of the effect of the prefetch effect is set to be easily selected. Therefore, when the jackpot winning command is received, the prefetching effect is easily executed.

  The look-ahead number lottery table 222b is a data table for determining the number of look-ahead effects as shown in FIG. FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the look-ahead count lottery table 222b. In the look-ahead number lottery table 222b, the number of look-ahead effects is selected based on the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the effect counter 223h. Note that the upper limit is set to the value of the number of reserved balls, and the number of times of the pre-reading effect is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the look-ahead effect selection table 222c stores the look-ahead effect of the look-ahead effect on the basis of the variation pattern of the special symbol at the last time of the look-ahead effect (special figure variation 1 to 5) and the value of the look-ahead effect counter. It is a data table for deciding a notice effect (effects 1-3). FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the prefetching effect selection table 222c. In addition, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in which the pre-reading effect is executed is simplified and shown as special figure fluctuations 1 to 5. Actually, one of the effects 1 to 3 is assigned to each variation pattern. Also, the announcement effect is not limited to the effects 1 to 3, but may be set as appropriate.

  As the notice effect of the prefetch effect, effects such as those shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C are respectively displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, in the announcement effect of effect 1, characters indicating the number of times of the look-ahead effect (the value of the look-ahead effect counter) shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C are displayed, and the background color is blue. Is displayed. Similarly, in the announcement effect of effect 2, characters indicating the number of times of the prefetch effect (the value of the prefetch effect counter) shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C are displayed, and the background color is displayed in yellow. You. In the announcement effect of effect 3, characters indicating the number of times of the prefetch effect (the value of the prefetch effect counter) shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C are displayed, and the background color is displayed in red.

  As described above, the notice display modes (effects 1 to 3) selected for each of the number of times of the pre-reading effect are set for the fluctuation pattern. By setting it to be selected, it is possible to give the player the expectation of a jackpot in the background color by setting the red background color so that it is difficult to select it for the variation pattern (super reach) that is out of range. it can.

  In addition, if the number of pre-reading effects is large and the success / failure judgment of the variation pattern is a big hit, a setting is made so that a large red background color is selected. If so, a large number of effects 3 are set, and for an out-of-order fluctuation pattern, when the value of the effect counter is 3, the effect 1 or the effect 2 is set to be selected more than the effect 3). Thus, as the notice of the pre-reading effect increases, the effect of giving the player the expectation of the jackpot can be performed.

  The effect content command selection table 222d is used to select a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the type of the notice effect of the pre-reading effect (no effect or effect 1 to 3) as shown in FIG. It is a data table. Specifically, in the look-ahead effect selection table 222c, if no effect is selected, the command “90h00h” is selected, and if effect 1 is selected, the command “90h01h” is selected, and effect 2 is selected. For example, if the command “90h02h” is selected, and if the effect 3 is selected, the command “90h03h” is selected.

  If the first look-ahead effect is the first look-ahead effect (the value of the look-ahead counter in the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f is 1), the first time of the 90h01h command is added to the 90h11h display look-ahead command. Command is set. At this time, if it is the second time, the command of 90h01h is set as the display look-ahead command of 90h21h. Similarly, if it is the third time, the command of 90h01h is set as the display look-ahead command of 90h31h. The display look-ahead commands for the effects 2 and 3 are set in the same manner.

  In the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a big hit determination flag 223e, and a prefetch effect counter At least a storage area 223f, a prefetch number counter storage area 223g, an effect counter 223h, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. A counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1409 in FIG. 27). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is set to ON when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 27), and when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. It is set to off (see S1702 in FIG. 30). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is set to ON when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 27), and when the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. Is set to off (see S1607 in FIG. 30).

  The jackpot determination flag 223e is a flag indicating that a jackpot winning command whose jackpot determination result is a jackpot has been received from the main control device 110. The big hit determination flag 223e is set to ON in the process of S1411 of the command determination process (S1312 in FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is set to OFF in the process of S1413. When the jackpot winning command is received, the jackpot flag 223e is set to ON, and in the prefetching effect lottery process (S1412 in FIG. 29) to be described later, if the jackpot flag 223e is ON, the prefetching is performed. The look-ahead effect lottery table 222a for which the determination is easy to select is selected. Note that the big hit determination flag 223e is a flag that is set to be off in the initial setting when the power is turned on.

  The prefetch effect counter storage area 223f is a storage area in which the value of the prefetch effect counter is stored. The pre-reading effect counter is incremented by 1 when the pre-reading effect is set in the pre-reading effect selecting process (S1403 in FIG. 28, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the pre-reading effect is added. It is stored in the counter storage area 223f. The look-ahead effect counter is initially set to 0, and is incremented by one up to an upper limit of four.

  The prefetch number counter storage area 223g is a storage area in which the number of prefetch effects is stored. In the process of S1611 of the look-ahead effect lottery process (S1412 in FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the number of times of the look-ahead effect acquired from the look-ahead number lottery table 222b is stored.

  The effect counter 223h is a counter value that is used when an effect of a notice is given, when the presence / absence of a prefetch effect is selected from the prefetch effect lottery table 222a, and when the number of prefetch effects is selected from the prefetch number lottery table 222b. The effect counter 223h is a counter value that is incremented and updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. It is repeatedly updated in the range up to the value 99. The effect counter 223d is a counter value that is set to 0, which is an initial value, when a power failure occurs.

  The RAM 223 further has another storage area 223z for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 30) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Directing). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electrical configuration of display control device 114>
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are read from the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a long time from the address designation to the data output in reading the first page of data, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start up the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 31) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S1801 in FIG. 32) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 13) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  When drawing an image using nonresident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 31).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first to generate a power-on main image (in the present embodiment, Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the “X” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", display the "○" image for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if it is "special symbol loss", display the "x" image after stopping the variable effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user must wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the "O" and "X" images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the power is turned on. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 each time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect stopped. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the received error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and for each sub-area, the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the character ROM 234, image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 to image data required for subsequent image rendering, from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame for the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image of one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the third symbol display device 81 can display the read image of one frame.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect A display data table corresponding to an ending effect and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The ending effect informs the player of the end of the special game state and informs the player of the game value (usually a short period of time of the symbol) given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or the special symbol held. Is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light in the image are defined as one frame of rendering content defined corresponding to each address. For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by this back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. The identification is performed based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the immediately preceding variable effect stopped symbol is switched to the offset information of the variable effect stopped symbol performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numeral of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the numeral. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 10) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is used to add An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

<Notification data table for pre-reading effects>
Next, details of the notice data table will be described with reference to FIG. Notice data tables 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C are notice data tables for displaying the notice effects of the look-ahead effects shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C.

  More specifically, the advance notice data table 1 shown in FIG. 11A displays the “first time” display shown in FIG. It is an advance notice data table instructing to display for 1.5 seconds before the stop of the change of the special symbol during the change (from 3 seconds before the stop). The notice data table 2 shown in FIG. 11B indicates that the “second time” display shown in FIG. 12B is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined number of seconds (in this embodiment, It is an advance notice data table instructing to display during a period of 1.5 seconds before the stop of the change of the special symbol to 3 seconds. The notice data table 3 shown in FIG. 11C indicates that the display of “third time” shown in FIG. It is an advance notice data table instructing to display during a period of 1.5 seconds before the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol (3 seconds).

  In the preview data tables 1 to 3, various data necessary for the preview display are set, similarly to the display data table. The preview data tables 1 to 3 select the preview data tables based on the display prefetch command based on the fact that the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has received the display prefetch command. Actually, the notice data tables 1 to 3 are composed of three kinds of notice data tables 1 to 3 of effects 1 to 3 having different background colors. That is, even in the preview data table 1, the preview data table 1 having a blue background (corresponding to the effect 1), the preview data table 1 having a yellow background (corresponding to the effect 2), and a red background (corresponding to the effect 3). Notice data table 1). The notice data table 2 and the notice data table 3 are similarly set.

  The notice data table selected based on the display prefetch command is set in the notice data table buffer 233k of the display control device 114. Then, the image data designated by the set notice display data table is read from the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 by the image controller 237 and stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Further, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the time data set in the notice display data table, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing set in the notice data table. Note that the notice display mode displayed in the notice data table is set so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in preference to the display mode specified in the display data table.

  As a result, when the notice data table is set, the notice display mode is displayed 1.5 seconds before the stop timing of the change of the special symbol during the change display, and the display data table is set for 3 seconds thereafter. The displayed display mode is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the preview display mode set in the preview data table is displayed. Therefore, the stop display of the special symbol can be hidden in the notice display mode, and even if the start of the change of the special symbol based on the next hold starts, the notice display mode is displayed for 1.5 seconds, so that the next change The display mode of the start of the change can be hidden by the notice display mode, so that the player can see even two changes as one change. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to notice that the notification has been made, and the player can be shown up to the last change of the prefetching effect. As a result, since the last round of the look-ahead effect is configured in a manner of a super-reach or a jackpot variation, the player can enjoy the notice display mode and expect and enjoy the variation of the final round as a jackpot. it can.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 14 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 12 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 14, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to start the transfer at that time is acquired, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display, on the third symbol display device 81, the characters “Initial setting” which is an image at power-on (a main image at power-on and a fluctuation image at power-on). It is a flag. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1805 in FIG. 31). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 41B).

  This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 33B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 33B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 33B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 33 (b) (see S2109). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 38 to 40) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 41A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 41B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later, which describes the contents of an instruction to draw an image, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 15) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 15) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 33 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 40) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 13), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite based on the transfer data table is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol (not shown), notice display 1-3 of prefetching effect) The detailed information corresponding to the sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side. Accordingly, when any of the preview data tables 1 to 3 is set, the corresponding preview display mode in FIGS. Displayed on the front side. Therefore, the notice display mode can be displayed on the entire display area of the third symbol display device 81 so as to hide the special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, an image corresponding to the preview data table is set at the end of the drawing list, so that the preview display mode is displayed on the foreground side. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When an image is set, only the image based on the preview data table may be set in the drawing list. With this configuration, the process of creating the drawing list can be simplified, and the control load can be reduced.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 33B Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3008 in FIG. 38). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 231. Is In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 42). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 42). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter, referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 43).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 33B) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 of FIG. 43).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the second entrance 67 with a through gate. The processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the command of the number of reserved balls is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined in accordance with the value of the first random number counter C1. Is determined to be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S211). If the result of the lottery is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), it is determined what the jackpot type is among the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A and jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type is determined. If is the big hit A, the setting related to the big hit A is executed (S213). In the setting relating to the jackpot A, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the probability change jackpot are set (S213). In the case of the jackpot B, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the number of time savings (100 in the present embodiment) are set (S214). Then, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S215), and the present process ends.

  In the processing of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S216). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203e is equal to or greater than 1 (S216: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203e during the working hours is 0 (S216: No), the process of S221 is skipped, and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the special symbol change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is an execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the first and second symbols, the lottery of the "special symbol jackpot" or "missing the special symbol" is determined (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform the lottery. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (a change effect pattern) of a change effect to be performed.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the current game state is a high probability state (probable change) (S302). If the game is in the high-probability game state (S302: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability (S304).

  In the process of S304, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 30 random number values stored in the special symbol large hit random number table for high probability. As described above, the random number value to be a special symbol jackpot is “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168”. , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the If the random numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S306.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if the gaming state is the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S302: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the low probability probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained is acquired (S305). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with three random number values stored in the special symbol large random number table for low probability. Three random numbers of “7, 107, 282” are set as the random numbers for the special symbol big hit, and when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the random numbers of these hits. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S306.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery of the special symbol obtained by the processing of S304 or S305 is a special symbol jackpot (S306). The display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) (S307). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S308). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of S308, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and a symbol variation such as a normal reach or a super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from a variation pattern table (not shown). Determine the variation pattern (variation time). The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by the variation pattern table.

  For example, as the variation patterns for the departure, “departure”, various types of “normal departure”, various types of “departure of super reach”, and various types of “departure of special reach” are defined. Variation patterns for jackpot A include various types of "probably variable jackpot normal reach", various types of "variable jackpot super reach", and various types of "variable jackpot special reach". , "Normal jackpot super reach" and "Normal jackpot special reach" are specified.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S309). In the processing of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off-design.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined from a variation pattern table (not shown) (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. (Fluctuation time) is determined.

  When the process of S308 or the process of S310 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S308 or S310 is set (S311). A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (stop type at the time of a big hit) is set (S312). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 24). You. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and if there is a start win, it is determined. This is a process for executing a hold process of the values indicated by the various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-balls command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S405, the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process are updated. Each value is stored in the first area of the free symbol storage area 203a of the special symbol storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (first storage area to fourth storage area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. After that, the process of S407 is performed.

  In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in S406 is determined to be a big hit at the start of the change. Whether the game state at the start of the change is the high-probability game state or the low-probability game state is determined from the determination result of the reserved ball stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the determination of the hitting or not is made. This is performed in advance (pre-read determination of the result of the determination of success or failure). In the process of S407, not only the hit / failed determination result but also the stop type and the variation pattern are determined and stored in the corresponding reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  If it is determined in the process of S407 that it is a jackpot (S407: Yes), a jackpot winning command, which is a type of the winning information command, is set based on the stop type and the variation pattern (S408). Here, for example, if the jackpot A is a super reach, a jackpot winning command corresponding thereto is set. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S402 that the pattern is out of range (S407: No), it is determined whether the variation pattern is super reach (S409). In the processing of S409, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is super reach (S409: Yes), an off-reach winning command, which is a type of winning information command, is set (S409). On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is different from the super reach (S409: No), an out-of-prize winning command, which is a type of the winning information command, is set (S411).

  When the winning information command is set, it is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83 and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 are performed. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of suspended display of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the during-hours counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time reduction counter 203e is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203e during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

  When the value of the counter 203e during the working hours is equal to or greater than 1 (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent a ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, the first entrance 64 is prevented from entering the ball during the special symbol jackpot. Many balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 7B).

  In the processing of S608, when the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the processing shifts to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 is Based on the random number table for ordinary symbols for probabilities, a lottery result is determined as to whether or not the symbol is a regular symbol (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 7B).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “と し て” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is hit at this moment. It is determined whether or not it is (S615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory associated with the set 64 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the processing shifts to S619.

  In the processing of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S619). If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The change time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203e during the working hours is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). Note that the variable time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S620 or S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the end, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or S618.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S624). If the result of this lottery is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S624: No), the processing of S625 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 16), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed at the second entrance 67, and if a ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspending it.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display is held in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, referring to FIG. 23, a description will be given of a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 when power is applied to main control device 110. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is set to ON (S904). If the switch is set to ON (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. Move to. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S912.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S912 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. If the data has been backed up in the RAM 203 (S907: Yes), the power-off information is cleared (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command for the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 17) and the start winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the ordinary symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display updating process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the variation symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Also, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the ordinary symbol change start process (see FIG. 20), the process is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20). Display (lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the processing of S1008, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 22 has been executed, the process at S1012 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

<Control Process Executed by MPU 221 of Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 25, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1318 (see FIG. 26). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, when receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 26), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1318. Before the power-off processing is performed, the power-off processing flag is set to ON, and after the power-off processing ends, the power-off processing flag is set to OFF. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1318 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the current startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure and the power-off processing in S1318. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up processing is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1318 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is set to ON (S1208). The power-off flag is set to ON when the power-off process is performed in S1318 (see S1317 in FIG. 26). In other words, the power-off flag is set to on before the power-off processing in S1318 is executed, so that the processing in step S1208 with the power-off flag set to on is the same as that in the current startup processing. This is a case where the process is started after a momentary power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag set to OFF is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, via the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is the case where the process of S1208 has been reached, or the process has been started only without resetting the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process skips S1209, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1210, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1210), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1211), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1209 is skipped is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is performed via the process of S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processes in S1302 to S1310 are mainly related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process in S1312, the command determination process in S1311, and the process of updating the counter values in S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1311 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307), an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect corresponding to. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. Also, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1310), and the flow shifts to the processing in S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process (S1312), a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform the variation effect. . As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1315 (S1313: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1315), and the power-off processing is executed (S1316). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1317), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Also, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1314), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1314: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1311), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is sent from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1401). If the variation pattern command has been received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1402). Next, a prefetch effect selection process is performed (S1403). The look-ahead effect selection process (S1403) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 28. Then, a process of setting a display look-ahead command based on the determination is executed.

  After S1403 is executed, a variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1404), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 30) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 30) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol) Is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409). In the process of S1409, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S1409, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn. Is detected or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol retaining ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S1409 to the special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main controller 110. 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1409 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1408, when the command of the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1408: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning command has been received (S1410). If it is determined that the jackpot winning command has been received (S1410: Yes), the jackpot determination flag 223e is set to ON (S1411). After that, a prefetching effect lottery process is executed (S1412). This prefetching effect lottery process (S1412) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 29. The process of determining whether or not the item is determined by lottery is executed. After the prefetching effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1412) is executed, the big hit determination flag 223e is set to OFF (S1413).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1410, when it is determined that the jackpot winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not the miss reach winning command has been received (S1414). When it is determined that the out-of-reach reach winning command has been received (S1414: Yes), a prefetching effect lottery process is executed (S1412). After that, the process of S1413 is performed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1414, when it is determined that the off-reach prize winning command has not been received (S1414: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is performed. Is executed (S1415), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the pre-reading effect selection process (S1403), which is one process of the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the prefetch effect selection process (S1403).

  In the pre-reading effect selection process (S1403), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern determined to have been received by the sound lamp control device 113 is a large hit variation pattern (S1501). When it is determined that the pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (S1501: Yes), the prefetch effect counter and the prefetch frequency counter are both initialized and set (S1502). Although not shown, when the process of S1502 is executed, the setting is made without a prefetch effect. After that, this processing ends. In this manner, if the change is a jackpot, the look-ahead effect is not set, and the look-ahead effect counter and the look-ahead count counter are set so that the look-ahead effect is not executed until the subsequent change is set to the presence of the look-ahead effect again. Initialized and set without prefetching. Thereby, in the change of the big hit, the notice display mode of the look-ahead effect is displayed from the timing of 1.5 seconds before the special symbol stops changing, and the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the player. It is possible to prevent a problem that is not notified by the special symbol to be notified.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of determining whether the variation pattern received by the voice lamp control device 113 is out of the range (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the prefetch effect is set. Whether or not the prefetch effect is set is determined based on whether the prefetch effect flag is set to ON in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. The look-ahead effect flag is set to ON in the process of S1610 of the look-ahead effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1412) described later.

  In the process of S1503, when it is determined that the prefetch effect is not set (the prefetch effect flag is off) (S1503: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the prefetch effect is set (S1503: Yes), the prefetch effect counter is incremented by 1 and stored in the prefetch effect counter storage area 223f (S1504). The prefetch effect is acquired based on the prefetch effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 8B) and the value of the prefetch counter stored in the prefetch effect counter storage area 223f. Here, for example, if the fluctuation pattern received by the sound lamp control device 113 is the fluctuation pattern indicating the special figure fluctuation 1 and the value of the look-ahead counter is 1, the look-ahead effect of the effect 1 (the background color is blue) is selected. You. Based on the value of the selected pre-reading effect, a display pre-reading command to which the number of times is given is selected (set) from the effect content command selection table 222d (S1506).

  Here, if the look-ahead effect of the effect 1 has been selected in the processing of S1505, and the first look-ahead effect (the value of the look-ahead counter in the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f is 1), the first time of the 90h01h command is added to the 90h01h command. And a display prefetch command of 90h11h is set. At this time, if it is the second time, the command of 90h01h is set as the display look-ahead command of 90h21h. Similarly, if it is the third time, the command of 90h01h is set as the display look-ahead command of 90h31h. The display look-ahead commands for the effects 2 and 3 are set in the same manner.

  Therefore, when the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives the display prefetch command from the sound lamp control device 113, the notice display mode of the prefetch effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display prefetch command is the number of times. It is possible to determine whether or not the display is an advance notice display, and select and set an advance notice data table corresponding to the background colors of the effects 1 to 3.

  After the processing of S1506 is performed, it is determined whether the value of the look-ahead counter in the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f is the same as the value of the look-ahead counter stored (set) in the look-ahead counter storage area 223g. (S1507). When it is determined that the value of the look-ahead effect counter and the value of the look-ahead counter are the same (S1507: Yes), the look-ahead effect flag in the other storage area 223z is set to off, and the look-ahead effect is set to no. The initial value 0 is set in the prefetch number counter storage area 223g (the prefetch number counter is initialized). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the prefetch effect counter is different from the value of the prefetch number counter (S1507: No), the process ends.

  As described above, when the execution of the prefetch effect is set, the display prefetch command is set so that a notice display (number display) of the prefetch effect based on the number of times is displayed. Further, the background color is selected from the look-ahead effect selection table 222c according to the selected variation pattern. Here, from the look-ahead effect selection table 222c, the content of the effect selected according to the type of the variation pattern of the last look-ahead effect is configured to change. More specifically, the effect 3 having a red background color is more easily selected as the variation pattern has a longer variation time. Further, the shorter the fluctuation time is, the easier it is to select a blue or yellow background color. Further, when a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected, the effect 3 with a red background color is easily selected even when the number of prefetch effects is small (the value of the prefetch effect counter is small). .

  Note that the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time has a lot of success / failure determination results set to the winning special reach or the like. Therefore, when the effect 3 with the red background color is displayed, the player is in an early stage (the first time or the second time). The game can be played in expectation that the special reach of the winning will be executed from the notice of the second look-ahead effect). In the look-ahead effect selection table 222c, as the number of times of the look-ahead effect is larger (the value of the look-ahead effect counter is larger), the effect 3 having a red background color is more likely to be selected, and conversely, the number of times of the look-ahead effect is smaller. The effect 1 and the effect 2 which are blue or yellow background colors are more easily selected as the value of the look-ahead effect counter is smaller. Therefore, the player can easily identify the number of prefetch effects.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a description will be given of a prefetch effect lottery process (S1412), which is one of the command determination processes (S1312 in FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the prefetching effect lottery process (S1412).

  In the pre-reading effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1312), the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 is first stored in the reserved first to fourth reserved areas. It is determined whether there is a change in the jackpot or out-of-reach super reach (S1601). Here, in the winning information storage area 223a, based on the winning information command received from the main control device 110, the information of the pre-read success / failure determination, the stop type, and the variation pattern are individually stored corresponding to the number of suspensions. Therefore, it is determined based on the information.

  In the processing of S1601, if it is determined that there is no change in the jackpot or the out-of-reach super reach (S1601: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation that causes the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot or out-of-reach super reach is suspended (S1601: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set to the variable N (S1602). It is determined whether the value of the look-ahead counter stored in the look-ahead counter storage area 223g is greater than 0 (S1603). If it is determined that the value of the prefetch number counter is greater than 0 (S1603: Yes), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the prefetch number counter is 0 (S1603: No), it is determined whether the big hit determination flag 223e is off. When it is determined that the big hit determination flag 223e is off (S1604: Yes), the prefetching effect lottery table 1 (see FIG. 7C) is set as the lottery table (S1605). On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit determination flag 223e is ON (S1604: No), the pre-reading effect lottery table 2 (see FIG. 7D) is set as the lottery table (S1606).

  The lottery result is acquired based on the look-ahead effect lottery table set in the processing of S1605 or S1606 and the value of N (the number of reserved balls) set in S1602 (S1607). Specifically, for example, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is “3” and the prefetching effect lottery table 1 (see FIG. 7C) is selected, the effect counter 223h If a value is obtained and the value is any of 0 to 69, it is determined that there is no prefetch effect, and if it is any of 70 to 99, it is determined that there is a prefetch effect.

  It is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S1607 indicates a prefetch effect (S1608). If it is determined that there is no prefetch effect (S1608: No), the prefetch effect counter is initialized (set to 0), set in the prefetch effect counter storage area 223f, and the prefetch number counter is initialized (to 0). (S1609).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1608 that the lottery result indicates that there is a prefetch effect (S1608: Yes), the prefetch effect flag indicating that there is a prefetch effect is set to ON, and the value of the prefetch effect counter is initialized. (Set to 0) and stored in the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f (S1610). The number of pre-reads is determined based on the value of N (the value of the special reserved ball number counter 223b) and the effect counter 223h from the pre-fetch number lottery table 222b (see FIG. 8A) and stored in the pre-read effect number storage area 223g. (S1611). The determination of the number of prefetches will be specifically described. For example, when the value of N (the value of the special reserved ball number counter) is “3”, the effect is produced from the prefetch number lottery table 222b (see FIG. 8A). If the value of the counter 223h is any one of 0 to 29, the number of prefetches “1” is obtained. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any of 30 to 59, the number of prefetches “2” is obtained. If the value of the counter 223h is any one of 60 to 99, the prefetch number “3” is obtained.

  It is determined whether or not the change corresponding to the last number of the prefetch times acquired in S1611 is a change in the jackpot or out-of-reach super reach (S1612). This determination is made based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the last number. If it is determined that the change of the last number of the prefetching is the change pattern of the jackpot or out-of-reach super reach (S1612: Yes), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change of the last number is a change other than the jackpot or the out-of-reach super reach (S1612: No), the pre-reading is performed so that the last change in the pre-reading effect is the change in the jack-in-out or out-of-reach super reach. The number of times is set (S1613).

  In this way, the number of prefetching effects is determined by lottery so as to be random, but by configuring so that the last change is always a jackpot or out-of-reach change, the notice of the prefetching effect is made Even if the display is displayed, it is possible to prevent a problem in which an effect in which the player has a bigger expectation of the jackpot than usual is not displayed. Therefore, when the notice display of the pre-reading effect is displayed, the player can have a greater expectation of the jackpot, and can play the game by expecting that the pre-reading effect will not be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). The variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1701). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then, in the process of S1404 of the command determination process (see FIG. 27), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707). The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  In the processing of S1709, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. Here, the display control device 114 is notified of the stop type corresponding to the exact stop type (complete loss, front / rear reach, big hit (big hit A, big hit B), etc.).

  In the process of S1710, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1710). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Control processing executed by MPU 231 of display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great deal of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start up the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, a boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing in S1902, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 31). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing to be performed (see S1802 in FIG. 31) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process (S1801) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 32, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S1902 and S1902, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

  Thereby, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set in the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed by detecting the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a ends based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). The image controller 237 sends the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1804, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1805). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 41A) described later, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 41A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 33B), the simple command determination processing is performed so that a power-on image (not shown) (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) is drawn. (See S2108 in FIG. 33B) and simple display setting processing (see S2109 in FIG. 33B).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. When the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the display change pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is displayed immediately during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the transfer takes a long time, and therefore, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on after power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S1806, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 33B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 15) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In the V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 33B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the contents of the command from the sound ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2103), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S2104). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the display setting processing (S2103) or the simple display setting processing (S2109). The type of sprite (display object) is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process (S2105), while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 to the image controller 237. Set the transfer instruction to transfer. The details of the transfer setting process (S2105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2104), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S2105) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As the counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2104.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, details of the above-described command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 34, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), and returns to the process of S2201.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing (S2205) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing (S2205), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2301, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the process of S2301 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2306).

  Thereafter, the variation pattern command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing. By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, and complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 33B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (S2403).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402. In the above-described task processing (S2105), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2403, and the specified stop is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, but before the drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main controller 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S2402.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2206, when it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), it is determined whether a display prefetch command has been received (S2208). If it is determined that the display prefetch command has been received (S2208: Yes), the display prefetch command processing is executed (S2209), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the display prefetch command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the display prefetch command processing (S2209).

  In the display look-ahead command processing (S2209), first, a notice data table corresponding to the received display look-ahead command is determined and set in the notice data table buffer (S2501). Here, the display look-ahead command is set so that the effect contents of the look-ahead effect and the number of times of the look-ahead can be identified. Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 selects a notice data table corresponding to the number of prefetch effects and the effect contents indicated by the display prefetch command. For example, if the display look-ahead command is the first look-ahead effect number and the effect is “90h11h” indicating the effect 1, the notice data table 1 of the effect 1 is selected.

  An advance transfer data table corresponding to the advance data table set in the process of S2501 is determined and set in the advance transfer data table buffer set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). The notice transfer data table has the same configuration as that of the display data table shown in FIG. 14, and its illustration and description are omitted.

  Based on the advance notice data table set in the process of S2501, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer is initialized (S2504).

  Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. In the process of S2208, when it is determined that the display prefetch command has not been received (S2208: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2210). If there is a command (S2210: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2211), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the error command processing (S2211) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing (S2211) executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio ramp control device 114.

  In the error command processing (S2211 in FIG. 37), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2902). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the processing of S2901, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the processing of S2902 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2210 that there is no error command (S2210: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2212), and the process returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes) ), And execute the processing of steps S2202 to S2212 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S2201 to S2212 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extraction and execution of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 35A) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 35B), which are processing corresponding to each command, are performed. A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 35A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 38, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S3002), and then S3003 to S3004. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, a pointer update process is performed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In the pointer update process (FIG. 40, S3005), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S2802). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2803 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting processing is ended and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S3009: Yes), the effect of the confirmed display has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2104), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3015 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S3009: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, so that the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The content of the drawing can be set.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3017: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is completed, and this means that the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 33B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, for a predetermined time, the image of the power-on fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3402). In the process of S3402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3402 (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3301, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3403, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 33B), the command determination processing (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 38 to 40) are performed instead of the simple command determination processing and the simple display setting processing. ) Is executed, so that the normal image drawing is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 42) (see S3301: No in FIG. 41A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In the normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 42, S3303), first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer update process (S3005) of the previously executed display setting process (S2103) is performed. The information described at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is obtained (S3501). Here, information indicated by pointers of the transfer data table of the display data table and the notice transfer data table of the notice data table is obtained. Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

  Also, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3505). If the transfer has been completed (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3406, after setting a transfer instruction of image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in step S3506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the processing of S3505, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S3505: No), the processing shifts to the processing of S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S3508),
In the processing of S3517, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3517 (S3517: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3517, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3418). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S3518, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3519), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is ON (S3513). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S3516), and the flow shifts to the process of S3517.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, details of the above-described drawing processing (S2106), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2105) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, the type of storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2105). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the head address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In the present embodiment, the notice display mode of the pre-reading effect is set such that the display order is the foreground as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the display mode of the pre-reading notice is displayed at a timing that straddles each variation (for example, variation 1 and variation 2), thereby stopping the variation of the special symbol. It can be hidden to make it difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, it is possible to show the player as if the change in the jackpot executed in the last round of the prefetching effect or the super reach was performed in one cycle.

  In the present embodiment, the preview display mode of the pre-reading effect is set at the end of the drawing list (see FIG. 15) so as to be displayed in the foreground (on the front side of the special symbol (third symbol)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the data set in the notice data table is transferred, other display data may not be set in the drawing list. With this configuration, when the notice display mode of the pre-reading effect is set, the process of setting other display information in the drawing list does not need to be performed, so that the control load of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Can be reduced.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3502). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image rendered on one frame buffer is developed, so that the rendering process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process in S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 33B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  Note that the look-ahead notice display mode is longer (or the same period) than the low-speed variable display period displayed for about 3 seconds when the special symbol (third symbol) variable display is started. It is displayed so as to hide the symbol (without displaying the third symbol). Accordingly, it is possible to make the display of the third symbol at high speed appear to be continuously continued, and thus it is possible to make the continuous fluctuation of a plurality of lottery games look like the fluctuation of one lottery game.

  Further, as shown in the detailed diagram of the notice 1 in FIG. 13A, the fluctuation of the special symbol (third symbol) is displayed at a low speed for a certain period from the start of the fluctuation (dynamic display). After the variable display is performed at a high speed, the variable display is performed again at a low speed. The look-ahead notice display mode is such that, of the two variable displays of the continuous lottery game, the fluctuation period of the special symbol at a low speed displayed after the high speed fluctuation and the fluctuation at a low speed of the special symbol at the start of the next lottery game It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over the period. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the display at the high-speed change continues over the continuous change, and it is possible to make the display look like one change.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific notice display of the pre-reading effect has a fixed display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display time may be changed according to a lottery or the like, display contents, or the like. Further, in addition to the one displayed over the fluctuation, the display may be performed only during the fluctuation of one special symbol.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case has been described in which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the prefetching and performs the prefetching effect across a plurality of fluctuations based on the result of the prefetching.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a variation pattern of a SW (switch) effect for executing a specific notice effect is set in advance in the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is set in advance by the variation pattern. When the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing, the specific notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the specific notice effect is configured in a notice display mode for notifying the player of the number of notice displays as in the prefetch effect of the first embodiment. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Main Control Device 110 in Second Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Second Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment is different from the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the first embodiment in that the look-ahead effect lottery table 222a of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 includes: The look-ahead number lottery table 222b, the look-ahead effect selection table 222c, and the effect content command selection table 222d have been deleted, and the notice number selection table 222e, a SW (switch) scenario table 223f, and an effect selection table 222g have been added.

The notice number selection table 222e is a data table for determining the specific notice number shown in FIG. More specifically, the SW received in the process of S1412 of the announcement effect selection process (S1420 in FIG. 54), which is one of the command determination processes 2 (S1420 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The number of notices set for the change pattern is selected based on the change pattern of the effect (in the notice number selection table, simply indicated by special figure changes 1 to 5).

  As shown in FIG. 45 (b), the SW scenario table 222f is set next each time the effective time for which the selected SW effect variation pattern frame button 22 is pressed and processed as effective is passed. 5 is a data table in which the valid time of the frame button 22 and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed are set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (c) and FIGS. 48 (a) to 48 (b), the SW effective time is predetermined in the variation pattern of each SW effect. This period is set in the SW scenario table 222f. Each of the SW effect variation patterns is set, and when the effective time elapses, the next effective time and the number of presses are set with reference to the SW scenario table 222f. It should be noted that it is set to be the same as the selected number of notices, and when the effect of the number of notices is set, END data indicating the end of the next data is set. This SW scenario table 222f is executed based on the fact that the SW valid time counter 223j is 0 in the processing of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307 in FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. It is referred to in the processing of S1324.

  The effect selection table 222g is a data table for determining the background color of the specific notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIGS. The effect selection table 222g includes an effect selection table 1 and an effect selection table 2. The effect selection table 1 and the effect selection table 2 are configured such that the effect selection table 2 is easier to select the yellow, green, and red background colors than the effect selection table 1.

  The effect selection table 222g indicates that the frame button 22 is depressed within the effective time in the process of S1334 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307 in FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, If the remaining time is less than 1.5 seconds, the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46A) is selected, and if the remaining time of the effective time is longer than 1.5 seconds, the effect selection table 2 is selected. Is done.

  Therefore, the type of the effect selection table 222g to be selected can be changed according to the difference in timing (early timing or late timing) when the player presses the frame button 22, and the same SW effect variation pattern is selected. Even in this case, different announcement effects can be displayed. Therefore, the announcement effect displayed to the player has a fixed pattern, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  In this embodiment, in the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46A) and the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46B), the effect of the background color is added to the variation pattern of the selected SW effect in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) in a state where the remaining time of the effective time of the frame button 22 is longer than a predetermined time, that is, after the frame button 22 becomes effective When the button is pressed at an early timing, the red or green background color is easily selected when the result of the determination is a hit based on the result of the determination of the special symbol, and when the result of the determination is off, the color is blue. Alternatively, the setting may be made so that a background color of yellow or yellow is easily selected. In detail, in the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46 (b)), many effects of red or green background colors are set for the fluctuation pattern in which the hit / failure determination result is a hit, and Or an effect with a yellow background color can be easily selected (may be the same as the effect selection table 1).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect selection table 222g has a configuration in which the background color is set in advance in accordance with the variation pattern and the value of the notice counter 223i. May be configured to acquire a counter value based on the counter value and select an effect pattern of the background color based on the counter value. At this time, a plurality of selection tables in which the counter values are assigned corresponding to the advance notice counter 223i may be set in advance, and the table may be selected based on the hit / fail judgment and the timing of pressing the frame button 22. In such a case, the frame button 22 is depressed with good timing in the SW effect by configuring so that the red or green background color is more easily selected when the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is short due to the determination of success or failure. By doing so, the player can see the effect based on the right / wrong determination earlier, and the motivation for the game can be increased.

  Returning to FIG. 44, the description will be continued. In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the prize information storage area 223a, the big hit determination flag 223e, the prefetch effect counter storage area 223f, and the prefetch effect number storage area 223g are different from the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. , The effect counter 223h is deleted, and a notice counter 223i, a SW (switch) valid time counter 223j, and a SW (switch) press count counter 223k are respectively added.

  The notice counter 223i is a counter for counting the number of specific notice displays in the variation pattern of the SW effect. As the display of the specific notice display, characters indicating the number of notice displays are displayed in the background color selected from the effect selection table 222g as shown in FIGS. .

  The notice counter 223i is updated by being incremented by one in the process of S1336 of the frame button input monitoring / producing process (S1307 in FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. When the number of notices is selected from the notice number selection table 222e, the notice counter 223i is initialized to 0, which is the initial value.

  The SW valid time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the valid time of the frame button 22. The SW valid time counter 223j is set with a preset SW valid time period based on the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect set in the SW scenario table 222f. When the valid time elapses, the next valid time is set based on the SW scenario table 222f.

  The SW press counter 223k is a counter that counts the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed within the SW valid time. In the present embodiment, the number of times the SW is pressed set in the SW scenario table 222f is set in the SW number-of-times counter 223k. If the number of times the switch is pressed within the valid time is reduced, the number is reduced (see S1331 in FIG. 52).

  In the present embodiment, the number of times the SW is pressed in the SW scenario table 222f is set to “1”. Therefore, when the switch is pressed once, the value of the SW number-of-times counter 223k becomes 0, and a display advance notice command is set. . Here, if the number of times the SW is pressed is set to a plurality of times, for example, five times in the SW scenario table 222f, the display advance notice command is set unless the frame button 22 is pressed a plurality of times within the valid time. In this case, the specific notice display may not be displayed. Therefore, if the number of times the SW is pressed in the SW scenario table 222f is variously set, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed until the notice display is displayed can be made different every time. Can be provided.

  Furthermore, by making the number of presses set in the SW scenario table different based on the result of determining whether or not the selected variation pattern is correct, the player can expect a big hit by the number of presses until the notice display is displayed. Can be made. Specifically, it can be realized by a configuration in which a relatively large number of presses is set when the hit / failure determination result is a hit, and a relatively small number of presses is set when the result is wrong. In addition, even in the case of a miss, by configuring so that a large number of presses are set with a low probability, even if the result of the determination is incorrect, a large number of presses is set, so that a big hit is expected. To play the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114 in Second Embodiment>
The notice data table of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment is different from the notice data table of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 11A to 11C) in FIGS. Notice data tables 1 to 4 shown in FIG. This is mainly a change due to an increase in the types of background colors, and there is no change in the detailed configuration and the like from the first embodiment, so a detailed description will be omitted. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Second Embodiment>
The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is different from the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment in one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 16). Has been changed to the start winning process 2 (S120 in FIG. 51).

  The start winning process 2 (S120) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S120). In the start winning process 2 (S120 in FIG. 51) in the second embodiment, the processes in S407 to S411 are deleted from the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 19) in the first embodiment. Since each processing from S401 to S406 is the same as each processing from S401 to S406 in the first embodiment, detailed description will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Second Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 52, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring / producing process (S1307), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307). In the frame button input monitoring / producing process (S1307) in the first embodiment, since only input monitoring of the frame button 22 is controlled in the same manner as in the related art, detailed description is omitted. In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307 in FIG. 52) in the second embodiment, when the variation pattern of the SW effect is selected, the SW valid time (see FIG. 45 (b)) is obtained from the SW scenario table 222f (see FIG. 45 (b)). SW effective period) is set, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) within the effective time, and if it has been pressed, processing for setting a corresponding display advance notice command is executed. This is different from the first embodiment.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 52, S1307), first, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is 0 (S1321). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is 0 (S1321: Yes), the SW press counter 223k is set to 0, which is the initial value (S1322). The SW scenario counter is incremented by 1 (S1323). The SW scenario counter is a counter value set in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, and is incremented by 1 in order from 0 which is the initial value. Is added. The SW scenario counter is set to 0, which is the initial value, based on the fact that it has been determined that the SW effect variation pattern command has been received in the processing of S1424 of the notice effect selecting process (FIG. 54, S1420) described later. Is done.

  The SW scenario is acquired based on the fluctuation pattern and the SW scenario counter received from the SW scenario table 222f (see FIG. 45B) (S1324). Specifically, when the SW effect variation pattern is received and the SW effect is executed, the SW scenario counter is set to 1, which is the initial value, and 1 is added in the processing of S1323, and the SW scenario counter is incremented. The value is 2. For example, assuming that the variation pattern of the received SW effect is the special figure variation 2, the No. 2 is determined from the SW scenario table 222f shown in FIG. The SW scenario of special figure variation 2 corresponding to 2 (valid time: 3 seconds, number of times the SW is pressed once) is selected. Here, the set valid time is a detailed valid period, and a detailed period of 3 seconds from 5 seconds to 8 seconds in the special symbol fluctuation time is set. In the special figure change 2, two specific notice effects are executed.

  In the processing of S1325, it is determined whether the SW scenario acquired in the processing of S1324 is END data (S1325). If it is determined that the SW scenario acquired in the processing of S1324 is END data (S1325: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW scenario is not the END data (S1326: No), the SW valid time and the number of times the SW is pressed are acquired from the SW scenario. As described above, the SW valid time acquired here is the SW valid period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is set to be valid next in the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect.

  The period during which the next frame button 22 acquired in the processing of S1326 is valid is set in the SW valid time counter 223j (S1327). The number of times of SW pressing acquired in the process of S1326 is set to the number of times of SW pressing counter 223k (S1328).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1321 that the SW valid time counter 223j is greater than 0 (S1321: No), the SW valid time counter 223j is decremented by 1 (S1329). Next, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1330). In the process of S1330, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1330: Yes), the value of the SW press counter 223k is decremented by 1 (S1331). It is determined whether the value of the SW press counter 223k is greater than 0 (S1332). Here, in the present embodiment, the number of times of pressing set in the SW scenario table is set to one by executing the determination of the SW pressing number counter 223k, but the number of times is set to three, five, etc. When the value is set to, the processing in the case of being pressed is not executed until the value of the SW pressed number counter 223k becomes 0 in the processing of S1332, and the SW effect is specified by pressing the game button 22 a plurality of times. A notice display can be configured to be displayed.

  If it is determined in the process of S1332 that the SW press counter 223k is greater than 0 (S1332: Yes), it is determined whether the remaining valid time of the SW valid time counter 223j is 1.5 seconds or less. (S1333). When it is determined that the remaining valid time of the SW valid time counter 223j is 1.5 seconds or less (S1333: Yes), the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46A) is set (S1334). On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining valid time of the SW valid time counter 223j is longer than 1.5 seconds (S1333: No), the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46B) is set (S1335). ).

  As a result, after the SW effective time is set and it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid, the frame button 22 is pressed at an early timing (early time elapses) (that is, the remaining time of the valid time). And the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46B) are selected, so that the effect 3 having a red background color can be easily selected. If the frame button 22 is pressed at a late timing (that is, the remaining time of the effective time is short), the effect selection table 1 is selected, and it is difficult to select the effect 3 which is a red background color. Therefore, the effect selected according to the timing of pressing the game button 22 can be made different, and various effects can be provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, only the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the result of determining whether the variation pattern is correct is hit when the button is pressed at an early timing, the red effect 3 is selected. Set easily. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game button 22 is pressed is late, even if the result of the determination of the success or failure of the fluctuation pattern is a big hit, the selection is more difficult than when the red background color is pressed earlier. If the result is incorrect, the earlier the button is pressed, the easier it is to select the red background color. Set so that the background color is not likely to be selected. With this configuration, the player can quickly know advantageous information by pressing the frame button 22 early (before the special symbol stops changing), and predict the hit / fail judgment result to some extent. You can enjoy the game. Therefore, it is possible to greatly expect a jackpot in the specific notice display mode, and it is possible to increase a player's willingness to play a game.

  Description of FIG. 52 will be continued. The notice counter 223i is updated by adding 1 to it, and a background color is selected from the effect selection table 222g selected in S1334 or S1335 based on the value of the notice counter 223i (S1336). A display announcement command is set based on the background color selected in the processing of S1336 and the value of the announcement counter 223i (S1337). The display notice command is generated by a command that can identify the background color in the specific notice display of what time. The MPU 231 of the display control device 114, based on the display notice command, outputs notice data corresponding to the background color and the number of specific notice effects from the notice data table shown in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) and FIG. Select a table. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1330 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1330: No), the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is decremented by 1 (S1337).

  Next, a command determination process 2 (S2020) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S2020). Steps S1401 to S1402, S1404 to S1409, and S1415 in the command determination process 2 (S2020 in FIG. 53) in the second embodiment are performed in steps S1401 to S1402 and S1404 in the command determination process (S1312 in FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those of steps S1409 and S1415 are executed. Detailed description of the same processing is omitted.

  In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 53, S2020), first, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1401). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is set to ON (S1402), and the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1404). It is determined whether the variation pattern extracted in the process of S1404 is a variation pattern in which a SW effect is executed (S1419).

  Here, the variation pattern in which the SW effect is executed is set in the present embodiment to a variation pattern in which the hit / fail determination result is a big hit and a variation pattern in which a super reach is obtained. With this configuration, when the specific notice display mode of the SW effect is displayed, the effect is always a jackpot or a missed super reach, and the specific notice display mode is an effect that gives the player the expectation of the jackpot. be able to. Therefore, the player can play the game with expectation that the specific notice display will not be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the process of S1419, when it is determined that the pattern is a variation pattern of the SW effect (S1419: Yes), a notice effect selection process is executed (S1420). The details of the announcement effect selection process (S1420) will be described later with reference to FIG. 54, but a process of setting the SW effective time and the number of times the SW is pressed for executing the SW effect is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pattern is not the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1419: No), the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a description will be given of the announcement effect selection process (S1420), which is one of the command determination processes 2 (FIG. 53, S2020) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this announcement effect selection process (S1420).

  In the notice effect selection process (FIG. 54, S1420), first, the number of notices is selected based on the type of the variation pattern received from the notice number selection table 222e (see FIG. 45A) (S1421). The SW scenario is acquired based on the fluctuation pattern selected from the SW scenario table 222f (see FIG. 45A) and the SW scenario counter (S1423).

  The value of the SW scenario counter is initialized to 1 which is an initial value (S1424). The SW valid time and the number of times the SW is pressed are acquired from the SW scenario based on the SW scenario counter (S1425). Here, as the acquired SW valid time, a period in which the game button 22 is valid for the first time (first time) within the fluctuation time is set. The valid time acquired in the process of S1425 is set in the SW valid time counter 223j. The number of times of SW pressing acquired in the process of S1425 is set in the number-of-SW-presses counter 223k (S1427).

  In the present embodiment, a variation pattern for performing the SW effect is set in advance, and when the variation pattern is selected, various settings of the SW effect are performed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. When a pattern command is received, a lottery may be performed to determine whether to execute the SW effect. In this case, this lottery may be performed for all the fluctuation patterns. However, if the SW effect is always executed by limiting the fluctuation pattern to reach, for example, the reach effect is performed. And the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the specific notice display is displayed by using the frame button 22, and the specific notice display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player does not press the frame button 22. Do not show. In addition, when the number of times of notice of the specific notice set in advance in the variation pattern is less than the number of notices of the SW because the player has not pressed the SW effective time, the display corresponding to the number of notices is displayed. It is configured. Specifically, in the notice frequency selection table 222e (see FIG. 45A), the number of notices corresponding to the special figure variation 4 is selected, and as shown in FIG. Even if it is configured to be set, the player does not press the frame button 22 during the first and second SW valid times, but presses the frame button 22 for the first time during the SW valid time corresponding to the third time. However, the first display shown in FIG. When the frame button 22 is pressed again at the next SW valid time, a second display shown in FIG. 12B is displayed. Then, reach display such as super reach is started.

  Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in accordance with the operation of the player. Therefore, when the player does not need the specific notice display, the game is not displayed unless the game button 22 is operated, and the game can be performed according to the player's preference.

  In the present embodiment, when the SW valid time is reached, a character, an icon, a character, or the like indicating that the SW valid time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or a sound, or a sound indicating that the SW valid time is reached. Is output. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which an LED or the like is built in the frame button 22 or the like, and the frame button 22 itself is turned on when the SW valid time is reached to notify the user. With such a configuration, the player can be notified of the SW effective time in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the variation pattern of the SW effect, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the SW valid time and the display notice command is output, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 indicates the display notice command. In addition to setting the advance notice data table, the variation mode after the specific advance notice display is displayed is randomly selected from the remaining time and displayed (corresponding to the switching means). Specifically, before the frame button 22 is pressed by the SW effect, the special symbol fluctuates at high speed on the background screen in the mountain, and after the specific notice is displayed, the special symbol is displayed on the riverside background screen. Change to a fast-changing display. As described above, when the specific notice display is performed, the contents of the subsequent effects on the third symbol display device 81 are also changed, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the background is changed after the frame button 22 is pressed in the SW effect and the specific notice is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the design of the design may be changed, It may be configured to be in a reach display mode or to start displaying super reach. Note that this display may be configured to perform a lottery based on the fact that the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has received the display notice command.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the case has been described in which the period of the SW effective time is set in advance in the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the maximum number of specific notice displays (the number of SW effects) is set in the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect, but the period is not set. The difference is that the specific notice display is displayed up to the maximum number of times by operating the game button of the player. Note that the same components as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Third Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment.

<Electrical Configuration of Main Controller 110 in Third Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Third Embodiment>
In the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 MPU 221 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the notice frequency selection table 222 e, the SW scenario table 222 f, and the performance selection table 222 g are respectively deleted from the second embodiment, 2 (222h), SW scenario table 2 (222i), and effect selection table 3 (222j).

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the notice number selection table 2 (222h) indicates the maximum number of the specific notice display for the variation pattern of the SW effect (in this case, it is simplified by special figure variations 1 to 5). It is a data table in which the number of notices was set. The difference is that the number of notices is changed to the maximum value with respect to the notice number selection table 222e of the second embodiment. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  In the SW scenario table 2 (222i), as shown in FIG. 56B, the number of times the SW is pressed is set based on the variation pattern and the value of the SW scenario counter. The difference is that the SW valid time is not set for the SW scenario table 222f (see FIG. 45B) in the second embodiment. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the effect selection table 3 (222j) displays the effect color displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the background color when the specific notice display is selected and the specific notice display are displayed. It is a data table for selection. Based on the value of the notice counter 223i and the value of the effect counter (same as that described in the first embodiment), each effect from effect 1 to effect 4 shown in FIG. 57 is selected. The effects 1 to 4 are for determining the background color of the specific notice display and the effect time after the specific notice display is displayed, as in the second embodiment. In the third embodiment, after the specific notice display for three seconds is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 of the display control device 81 displays the third symbol display on the third symbol display device 81 based on the selected effect time. The pattern is changed by selecting the pattern change mode.

  Specifically, in the effect selection table 3 shown in FIG. 57, if the value of the notice counter 223i is 2 and the value of the effect counter is 15, the specific notice display of the effect 2 is selected, and the notice for display based on it is displayed. Command is set. The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 selects the advance notice data table 2 (see FIG. 49 (b)) set with a yellow background color based on the advance notice command for display, and executes the “second time” for 3 seconds. The specific notice display as a character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a yellow background color. Then, as an effect for the set effect time of 4 seconds, a special symbol (third symbol) design is displayed by lottery, for example, by changing a wooden box to a car. During the effect time, the effect is displayed by the character, and the effect continues until the next display notice command is received. In the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special symbol (third symbol) dedicated to reach, which is not normally displayed, may be displayed by using the effect time, and a character or the like may be used. May be executed. As a special symbol for reach, the same symbol is displayed on the left and right in normal times to inform the player of reach, but the special symbol for reach selected in this production time is a larger symbol than normal Only one reel is displayed, and a notification (for example, a character or the like) indicating reach is displayed on the symbol.

  With this configuration, it is possible to entertain the player by displaying a specific notice display which is a different effect from the normal state, and to enjoy the game without getting tired. During this effect time, the frame button 22 is not activated, and the player can show the effect at least during this effect time. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly presses the frame button 22 continuously, it is possible to suppress a problem that the effect is skipped and the next effect is displayed before watching the effect.

  In contrast to the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46A) and the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46B) of the second embodiment, the effect selection table 3 of the present embodiment (see FIG. 57) The difference is that the background color is randomly selected without depending on the fluctuation pattern.

  The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment differs from the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the second embodiment in that the SW effective time counter 223j is deleted, the SW effect time counter 223m, and the reach. A previous second counter 223n is added. The other points are the same as those of the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The SW effect time counter 223m is a counter for counting the effect time after the specific notice display selected from the effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 57). The SW effect time counter 223m is decremented by 1 in the process of S1357 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. 58, S2610) described later. When the SW effect time counter 223m is determined to be 0 (S1343 in FIG. 58: Yes), if the number of seconds before reach is 10 seconds or more, the frame button 22 is set to valid.

  As described above, the SW effect time counter 223m is also a counter value for counting a prohibition period for prohibiting the operation of the frame button 22 during the effect time. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the effect from being skipped due to the pressing of the frame button 22 during the effect time.

  In the present embodiment, the SW effect time counter 223m is provided to ensure that the effect is displayed to the player during the effect time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is configured to be able to do so, the SW effect time counter 223m may not be provided. By doing so, the effect can be skipped by the player's intention, and the effect can be efficiently shown to the player.

  The before-reach seconds counter 223n is a counter for counting the time until the fluctuation pattern of the selected SW effect becomes reach and the reach display mode effect predetermined in the fluctuation pattern is started. The pre-reach seconds counter 223n stores the pre-reach seconds acquired in the process of S1434 of the announcement effect selection process 2 (FIG. 61, S1430) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be described later. In addition, the value is decremented by 1 in the processing of S1358 of the frame button input monitoring / production processing 2 (S2610 in FIG. 58). Also, it is determined whether the number of seconds before reach is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of seconds (10 seconds in this embodiment) (see S1344), and if it is equal to or greater than 10 seconds, the frame button 22 is enabled. On the other hand, if the time is less than 10 seconds, the specific advance display of the effect 5 which is the advance display that develops into the reach effect is selected. The pre-reach seconds counter 223n is set to 0, which is an initial value, in an initial state such as when the power is turned on.

  Thus, when the number of seconds before the reach is equal to or less than the predetermined number of seconds, the third symbol display device 81 can display an effect for notifying the player that the reach effect is started. Therefore, the start of the reach effect can be accurately notified to the player, and the player can be prevented from overlooking the reach effect.

  Other electrical configurations of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment are the same as those of the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Third Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 58, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (FIG. S2610), which is one of the main processing (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. .

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (FIG. 58, S2610), first, it is determined whether the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is a value larger than 0 (S1341). When it is determined that the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is greater than 0 (S1341: Yes), the pre-reach second counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S1342). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number-of-seconds-before-reach counter is equal to or smaller than 0, that is, it is 0 (S1341: No), the processing of S1343 is executed. In the process of S 1343, it is determined whether the value of the SW effect time counter 223 m is 0 (S 1343). When it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1343: Yes), it is determined whether or not the reach second counter 223n is less than 10 seconds (S1344). If it is determined that the before-reach seconds counter 223n is shorter than 10 seconds (S1344: Yes), a display announcement command of the effect 5 for notifying that the reach effect is to be performed is set (S1345). Thereafter, the SW press counter 223k is initialized to 0 as an initial value (S1346), the SW scenario counter is initialized to 0 as an initial value (S1347), and the before-reach seconds counter 223n is initialized to 0 as an initial value. (S1348).

  As described above, when the number of seconds before the reach is less than the predetermined number of seconds (less than 10 seconds in the present embodiment), a display announcement command of the effect 5 which is an advance notice for notifying that the reach effect is to be executed is set. . As the notice display content corresponding to the effect 5, a display mode in which the background rotates in a spiral at high speed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the time when the reach starts.

  In the present embodiment, the effect 5 is set as an effect to notify that the reach effect is started. However, the effect is not limited to this, and a display indicating the number of specific notice displays may be performed based on the value of the notice counter 223i. Good. With this configuration, it is possible to execute more specific notice displays.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is equal to or longer than 10 seconds (S1344: No), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1349). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1349: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1349: Yes), the value is set by subtracting 1 from the SW press counter 223k. It is determined that the number of times of SW depression counter 223k is 0. When it is determined that the SW press counter 223k is 0 (S1351: Yes), an effect lottery process is executed (S1352). The effect lottery process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 59. However, the effect content and the effect time of the background color are determined from the effect selection table 3, and a display notice command based on the determined content is set. Is performed.

  The effect time selected in the process of S1651 in the effect lottery process (S1352 in FIG. 59) is stored in the SW effect time counter (S1353). The SW scenario counter is incremented by 1 (S1354), and the next SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) based on the variation pattern and the SW scenario counter (S1355). It is determined whether the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1355 is END information. If it is determined that the information is the END information (S1356: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information is not END information (S1356: No), the number of times of SW pressing is obtained from the SW scenario obtained in the process of S1355 (S1357). The number of times of SW pressing obtained in the process of S1357 is set in the number of times of SW pressing counter 233k (S1358). On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effect press counter is not 0 (S1351: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S 1343, when it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223 m is not 0 (S 1343: No), the value of the SW effect time counter is decremented by 1 (S 1357), and the pre-reach second counter 223 n is set. One is subtracted (S1358), and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, only when the SW effect time counter 223m is not 0, the number of seconds before reach is subtracted and updated by one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 ( A configuration may be adopted that is always updated each time step S2610 of FIG. 58 is executed.

  Next, the effect lottery process (S1352), which is one of the frame button input monitoring and effect processes 2 (S2610 in FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. . FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the effect lottery process (S1352).

  In the effect lottery process (FIG. 59, S1352), first, the effect and the effect time are selected from the effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 57) based on the values of the effect counter 223h and the notice counter 223i (S1651). A display notice command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect and the effect time selected in S1651 and the notice counter 223i is set (S1652).

  Next, a command determination process 3 (S2030) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S2030 in FIG. 60). The command determination process 3 (S2030 in FIG. 60) according to the third embodiment is different from the command determination process 2 (S2020 in FIG. 53) in the second embodiment in that the preview effect selection process (S1420) is the preview effect selection process 2 ( S1430). As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the second embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S1419, when it is determined that the extracted variation pattern is the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1419: Yes), the announcement effect selection process 2 is executed (S1430).

  This notice effect selection process 2 (S1430) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the announcement effect selection process 2 (S1430). In the notice effect selection process 2 (FIG. 61, S1430), first, the maximum number of notices is obtained from the notice number selection table 2 (see FIG. 56 (a)) based on the variation pattern (S1431). Next, the notice counter 223i is initialized to 0, which is the initial value (S1432). An SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario table 2 based on the values of the fluctuation pattern and the SW scenario counter (S1433). The SW scenario is the number of times the SW is pressed or the END information indicated in the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) using the SW scenario counters (No. 1 to 7) and the variation patterns.

  The number of seconds before reach is acquired based on the fluctuation pattern from the notice number selection table 2 (see FIG. 56A), and is set in the before-reach seconds counter 223n (S1434). The SW scenario counter is set to an initial value of 1 (indicating No. 1) (S1435), the number of times of SW pressing is obtained from the SW scenario obtained in the process of S1432 (S1436), and the number of times of SW pressing is set to the number of times of SW pressing counter 223k. The number of times of SW pressing acquired in the process of S1435 is set (S1438).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the variation pattern of the SW effect is selected, the maximum number of the specific notice display (SW effect) is set, and if the number is the number, the player can arbitrarily select By pressing the frame button 22 at the time (except during the production time), the specific notice display can be displayed. In the variation pattern of the SW effect, a notification mode for notifying that the frame button 22 is in a valid period is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as in the second embodiment. As a result, the player cannot predict how many times the specific notice display is to be displayed, and can operate the frame button 22 in anticipation that the specific notice display will still be displayed. After the specific notice display (for 3 seconds) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined effect (effect of the effect time selected in the effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 57)) is executed. Since this effect is selected from a plurality of effects preset in the display control device 114 in accordance with the effect time, various effects are provided, and a different effect is displayed each time the specific notice display is displayed. Further, if the effect is set to an effect that matches the effect time (for example, a character is displayed and the character talks for the effect time), the player can be notified that the effect time has elapsed. . The player can operate the frame button 22, thinking that the specific notice display may be displayed again after the end of the series of effects. Therefore, the game operation of the player can be easily understood.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the case has been described where the specific notice display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the operation of the player by pressing the frame button 22. However, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that, based on the number of histories of the player pressing the frame button 22, whether or not to display the specific notice display is determined based on the number of histories. Is different from the pachinko machine 10. The same elements as those in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Fourth Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Embodiment>
The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that a SW holding number counter 223o and a SW history number counter 223p are added.

  The SW holding number counter 223o is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed within a valid time (within a period in which pressing of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid). It should be noted that the SW holding number counter 223o is a counter that counts the number of times the button is pressed within the effective time of the variation pattern when the variation pattern of the SW effect is received. Initial processing is initialized to 0 in S1447 of the announcement effect selection process 3 (S1440 in FIG. 65) executed when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command. In addition, in the process of S1381 of the frame button input monitoring / producing process 3 (S2620 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, one is added based on the determination that the frame button 22 is pressed. Is done. In the process of S1375 of the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S2620 in FIG. 63), the counted value is saved and stored in a SW history counter 223p described later. The SW holding number counter 223o is set to an initial value of 0 in an initial state such as when the power is turned on.

  The SW history number counter 223p is a counter for counting the number of times that the frame button 22 is pressed during a valid period in one SW effect variation pattern. As described above, in the SW history counter, the value of the SW holding counter 223o is saved and stored in the process of S1375 of the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S2620 in FIG. 63), and the value of the frame button 22 The number of presses is stored.

  In the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect, when the frame button 22 is pressed within the valid period, the next SW scenario (see FIG. 56 (b)) is set, which is a setting as to whether the next specific notice display is displayed. When the lottery is performed, the value of the SW history counter is used. As will be described in detail later, if the value of the SW history counter is not equal to or more than the predetermined number, the next SW scenario is set.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 63, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S2620) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S2620). The frame button input monitoring / producing process 3 (S2620) in the fourth embodiment is a process executed in place of the process of the frame button input monitoring / producing process 2 (S2610 in FIG. 58) of the third embodiment.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 63, S2620), first, it is determined whether the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is greater than 0 (S1371). When it is determined that the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is greater than 0 (S1371: Yes), the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S1372). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is equal to or smaller than 0, that is, it is 0 (S1371: No), the process of S1373 is executed. In the processing of S1373, it is determined whether or not the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1373). When it is determined that the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1373: Yes), it is determined whether the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is less than 3 seconds (S1374). If it is determined that the before-reach second counter 223n is shorter than 3 seconds (S1374: Yes), the value of the SW holding number counter 223o is saved (stored) in the SW history number counter 223p (S1375). The SW depression counter 223k is initialized to 0 as an initial value (S1376), the SW scenario counter is initialized to 1 as an initial value (S1377), and the before-reach seconds counter 223n is initialized to 0 as an initial value. (S1378).

  In the process of S1374, when it is determined that the before-reach seconds counter 223n is 3 seconds or longer (S1374: No), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S1379). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1379: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1379: Yes), the SW pressing counter 223k is decremented by 1 (S1380), and 1 is added to the SW holding counter 223o (S1381). It is determined whether the number of times of SW depression counter 223k is 0 (S1382). If it is determined that the value of the SW press counter 223k is not 0 (S1382: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of times of SW depression counter 223k is 0 (S1382: Yes), an effect lottery process is executed (S1352). This effect lottery process (FIG. 59, S1352) is the same process as that already described in the third embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the effect lottery process (FIG. 59, S1352) is performed, the effect time of the SW scenario is set in the SW effect time counter 223m (S1383). One is added to the SW scenario counter (S1384). The SW scenario is obtained from the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) based on the variation pattern and the SW scenario counter (S1385). It is determined whether the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1385 is END information (S1386). If it is determined that the SW scenario is the END information (S1386: Yes), each process from S1375 to S1378 is executed, and then this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW scenario is not the END information in the process of S1386 (S1386: No), the value of the variable T is set to 0 (S1387). A value obtained by adding the value of the SW history number counter 223p to the variable T and the maximum number of notices in the notice number selection table is acquired (S1388). The calculation (lottery) of T / 6 is executed (S1389). It is determined whether the calculation result (lottery result) of S1389 is 1 or more (S1390). When it is determined that the calculation result is 1 or more (S1390: Yes), the number of times of SW pressing is obtained from the SW scenario obtained in the process of S1385 (S1389). The number of times of pressing the SW scenario is set in the number-of-SW-buttons counter 223k (S1390). On the other hand, in the process of S1390, when it is determined that the calculation result of S1389 is less than 1 (S1390: No), the processes of S1375 to S1378 are executed, and then the process ends.

  In the process of S1373, when it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is not 0 (S1373: No), the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S1393).

  As described above, even when the data of the SW scenario selected from the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) is not END information, if the value of the SW history frequency counter 223p is small, the next SW scenario is executed. Based on the above, the number of times the SW is pressed is not set in the SW number counter 223k. Therefore, even if the frame button 22 is pressed next, the specific notice display is not displayed. Next, the next specific notice display is not displayed until the value of the SW history number counter 223p becomes equal to or more than a predetermined value. Therefore, even if the same maximum notice number is selected, the player who presses the frame button 22 many times is displayed. The number of times that the specific notice display is displayed increases, and the number of times of the specific notice display can be reduced for a player who does not press the frame button 22 very much, and the effect can be changed depending on the player. As a result, various effects can be executed for the player.

  Also, by adding the maximum number of notices and the value of the SW history number counter 223p and dividing by the maximum notice number "6" in the notice number selection table 2 (see FIG. 56 (a)). When the maximum number of notices in the notice number selection table 2 (see FIG. 56 (a)) is selected, the calculation result is always 1 or more, and the specific notice display can be displayed up to the maximum number. Therefore, each time the specific notice display is not displayed up to the maximum number of times even when the frame button 22 is pressed, when the specific change pattern is selected, the specific notice display is displayed regardless of the number of history times. , Can give the player unexpectedness.

  Next, a command determination process 4 (S2040) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 4. The command determination process 4 (FIG. 64, S2040) in the fourth embodiment is different from the command determination process 3 (FIG. 60, S1312) in the third embodiment in that a preview effect selection process 2 (FIG. 61, S1430) is performed. The selection process has been changed to selection process 3 (S1440 in FIG. 65). As for the other processing, the same processing as the command determination processing 3 (S1312 in FIG. 60) in the third embodiment is executed, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, notice effect selection process 3 (S1440) which is one of the command determination processes 4 (S1440 in FIG. 64) executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the announcement effect selection process 3. In the preview effect selection process 3 (FIG. 65, S1440) in the fourth embodiment, the process of S1448 is added to the preview effect selection process 2 (FIG. 61, S1430) in the third embodiment. In each process from S1441 to S1447 in the fourth embodiment, the same process as each process in S1431 to S1437 in the third embodiment is executed. Detailed description of the same processing is omitted. In the processing of S147, when the number of times of pressing acquired in the processing of S1446 is set in the SW number-of-times counter 223k (S147), the processing of S1448 is executed. In the processing of S1448, the value of the SW holding counter 223o is initialized to “0” which is the initial value (S1448). After that, this processing ends.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the prefetching and performs the prefetching effect across a plurality of fluctuations based on the result of the prefetching. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, when the small hits different from the big hits are won, the fluctuation pattern exclusive for the post-small hits different from the normal time is selected for the held lottery game. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in that the effect of performing a variable display a plurality of times as if it were one lottery game is executed. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Fifth Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

<Electrical Configuration of Main Controller 110 in Fifth Embodiment>
In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. A table 202e is set.

  The big hit random number table 202a sets the value of the first hit random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 is “7,107,282” in the normal probability gaming state (low probability gaming state), and “4,11,28,38,” in the high probability gaming state. 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285 299 "is set as a jackpot determination value determined to be a jackpot (the same as in the first embodiment). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is any of “0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12”, a small hit determination value determined as a small hit Is set as Note that the small hit is set as being included in the one determined to be out of place in the determination of success or failure, and is set as a kind of out of place. In the present embodiment, the small hit determination value is set from the outlier determination values. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The small hit may be set as one of the big hits and set from the big hit determination value. Further, it may be set to be determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2 from the one determined to be a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, when a small win is won, the variable winning device 65 is opened twice for 0.5 second. In the gaming state after the small hit (low probability gaming state or high probability gaming state), the same gaming state as the gaming state before the small winning is set.

  The variation pattern selection table 202b is a selection table for determining a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) for variably displaying the first symbol and the third symbol. In the variation pattern selection table 202b, each variation pattern table is set for a low-probability game state, a high-probability game state, a time-short game state, and a small hit only (including the number of shift changes after the small hit).

  Since the variation pattern other than the small hit only is selected in the same manner as in the first embodiment, a detailed illustration and description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 68 (a), for the small hit only variation pattern, a small hit only variation pattern that is selected when the result of determination is out of place and when the hit is a hit is set. Details of each variation pattern will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 68 (b) to 68 (c) and FIGS. 69 (a) to 69 (b), the small hitting only variation pattern selection tables 202e are set.

  FIG. 68B is a selection table 202e dedicated to small hits selected when the status flag B is determined at the time of the small hit winning. In this selection table, a normal small hit variation pattern is selected for all variation type counters CS1. In this normal small hit variation pattern, after the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a chance like "341", the variable winning device 65 is operated for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds). During ()), the small jackpot that is opened is executed twice.

  FIG. 68 (c) is a fluctuation pattern selection table 202e dedicated to the small hit which is selected when the status flag C is determined at the time of winning the small hit. When this selection table is selected, the selection table is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 based on the value of the fluctuation counter 203g. When the value of the fluctuation counter 203g is 0, that is, at the time of the small hit winning, the special small hit fluctuation pattern is selected so as to correspond to the values of all the fluctuation type counters CS1. Here, the fluctuation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of transition fluctuations after the small hit, which will be described later in detail. Note that the small hit is determined to be a small hit determination value when the result of the hit determination is out of order, and thus the fluctuation pattern for the hit is not set.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a1), after the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 71 (a2), the special small hit variation pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device. , The first symbol is displayed, the third symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right, and is stopped and displayed at "341" indicating a small hit. In the present embodiment, the stop symbol indicating the small hit is “341”. However, the stop symbol is not limited thereto, and another stop symbol may be used, or a temporary symbol different from a normal symbol (for example, a musical note or the like). Symbol combination).

  Next, when the held lottery game starts to fluctuate, the fluctuation counter 203g is updated to 1, so if the result of the determination as to whether or not the lottery game is off, corresponding to all the fluctuation type counters CS1, The out-of-reach start / end fluctuation pattern is set. After the display shown in FIG. 71 (a2), the out-of-reach reach start / end fluctuation pattern is displayed from the state where the third symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 71 (b1), as shown in FIG. 71 (b2). After the same symbol is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol in the reach display mode in which the symbols are stopped, after a predetermined time, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the reach symbol. Is reported to have been missed.

  On the other hand, when the lottery game held next is a win, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 170, the hit reach start / end variation pattern 1 is selected, and the value of the variation type count CS1 is changed. If it is 171-199, the winning reach end variation pattern 2 is selected. Note that the hit reach start / end variation pattern 1 and the hit reach start / end variation pattern 2 differ from the above-described out-of-reach reach start / end variation pattern in that the hit reach start / end variation pattern is stopped with a symbol indicating a hit.

  FIG. 69 (a) is a fluctuation pattern selection table selected when the status flag D is determined at the time of winning a small hit. When the fluctuation counter 203g is 0, the special small hit fluctuation pattern is set corresponding to all the fluctuation type counters CS1. If the fluctuation counter 203g is 1, and if the result of determination is out of range, the out-of-reach start fluctuation pattern 1 is set according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponding to 0 to 160, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. The off-reach start variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to the values 161 to 199.

  The off-reach start variation pattern 1 and the off-reach start variation pattern 2 are displayed in a state where the third symbol fluctuates, as shown in FIG. 71 (b1), and as shown in FIG. 71 (b2), In the state of the reach display mode, the fluctuation display of the middle symbol is continuously displayed until the fluctuation time ends.

  On the other hand, when the result of the determination on the success or failure of the lottery game held next is a hit, the hit type start / end change pattern 1 is set in the change type counter CS1 corresponding to the value of 0 to 170, and the change A hit reach start / end variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to the type counter CS1 of the values of 171 to 199.

  As described above, when the status flag C is determined, the variation pattern selection table dedicated to the small hit is selected from the small hit winning until the lottery game is executed twice. Even if the result of the determination is a hit due to a change in the middle, the result of the determination is correctly notified.

  Further, at the start of the fluctuation of the next held lottery game, the fluctuation counter 203g is updated to 2 so that if the result of determination is incorrect, the fluctuation counter 203g is changed to 0 to 50. Correspondingly, the out-of-reach variation pattern 1 is set, and the out-of-reach reach variation pattern 2 is set in accordance with 51 to 180 of the variation type counter CS1. Reach fluctuation pattern is set.

  Here, in the off-reach variation pattern 1 and the off-reach variation pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (A)), the character "second time" is displayed, and the display of the third symbol is reduced and started. You. At this time, the third symbol whose display is reduced and started to be displayed is displayed in the reach display mode as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (A)). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (b2), the reach display mode is displayed, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, a symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the out-of-reach reach variation pattern 1 and the out-of-reach reach variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 72 (c2), an effect is displayed around the middle symbol during the change of the middle symbol, and a reach display mode different from that in the normal state is displayed. Is notified to the player.

  When the out-of-SP reach variation pattern is selected, as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (B)), the word "development" is displayed, and the display of the third symbol is reduced and started. The third symbol whose display is started to be reduced is displayed in the reach display mode. Thereafter, a display mode is displayed to notify the player that the special reach "next notice crane reach" as shown in FIG. 72 (d1- (B)) is displayed. Thereafter, the display mode of the crane reach as shown in FIG. 72 (d2) is displayed, and the crane lifts the middle symbol, which is a hit symbol, but does not lift the entire symbol but drops it, and a symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped and displayed. A display mode indicating the departure is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the value of the fluctuation counter 203g is 2, when the lottery game in which the hit / failure determination result is a win is started, the hit reach fluctuation pattern 1 is set corresponding to 0 to 20 of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the hit reach variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to 21 to 150 of the variation type counter CS1, and the hit SP reach variation pattern is set corresponding to 151 to 199 of the variation type counter CS1. The hit reach fluctuation pattern 1, the hit reach fluctuation pattern 2, and the hit SP reach fluctuation pattern are reported as hits of the out-reach reach change pattern 1, the out-reach reach change pattern 2, and the out-of-SP reach reach fluctuation pattern. Are different.

  FIG. 69 (b) is a fluctuation pattern selection table 202e selected when the status flag E is determined at the time of the small hit winning. Until the value of the fluctuation counter 203g is up to 1, it is the same as the selection table 202e (see FIG. 69 (a)) selected in the case of the status flag D, and therefore the description is omitted.

  If the value of the fluctuation counter 203g at which the number of transition fluctuations is the second time is 2 and the result of the determination as to whether or not it is out of range, the out-of-reach reach fluctuation pattern 1 is set in accordance with 0 to 165 of the fluctuation type counter CS1. , And the variation pattern 2 during the out-of-reach state is set corresponding to the variation type counters 166 to 199.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 72 (d1- (A)), the character “third time” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern 1 during out-of-reach reach and the variation pattern 2 during out-of-reach reach. At the lower right of the display area of the three-symbol display device 81, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the reach display mode, and the display is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (c2), a reach display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a display mode in which the middle symbol continues to fluctuate until the fluctuation time has elapsed is displayed.

  On the other hand, if the result is a hit, a hit reach variation pattern 1 is set corresponding to 0 to 20 of the variation type counter CS1, and a hit reach variation pattern is set corresponding to 21 to 150 of the variation type counter CS1. Pattern 2 is set, and a hit SP reach variation pattern is set corresponding to 151 to 199 of the variation type counter CS1. Here, the hit reach variation pattern 1 and the hit reach variation pattern 2 are set so that the character "3rd time" is displayed at the start of the variation. Other display modes are the same as those already described above.

  Next, when the value of the fluctuation counter 203g, at which the number of transition fluctuations is the third, is 3, and the result of the validity determination is out of range, the out-of-way fluctuation pattern 1 corresponds to the fluctuation type counter CS1 from 0 to 140. The deviation reach variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to the variation type counter CS1 141 to 170, and the deviation SP reach variation pattern is set corresponding to the variation type counter CS1 171 to 199. Here, when the out-of-reach reach variation pattern 1 and the out-of-reach reach variation pattern 2 start to fluctuate, the character "4th time" is displayed. Other display modes are the same as those already described above.

  On the other hand, if the result is a hit, a hit reach variation pattern 1 is set corresponding to 0 to 20 of the variation type counter CS1, and a hit reach variation pattern is set corresponding to 21 to 150 of the variation type counter CS1. 2 is set, and the hit SP reach variation pattern is set corresponding to 151 to 199 of the variation type counter CS1. Here, when the hit reach variation pattern 1 and the hit reach variation pattern 2 start to fluctuate, the characters “fourth time” are displayed. Other display modes are the same as those already described above.

  As described above, in the configuration of the fifth embodiment, the plurality of changes in the number of transition changes set in the status flag determined at the time of the small hit winning are set to the change pattern so that the player sees the change as one change mode. Is selected. Further, at the start of the change, a display mode such as “first time” or “second time” is displayed, and a related notification mode that makes it seem that the fluctuation is continuing is displayed. As if it were one variation. Further, in the display mode displayed at the start of the change, the display area of the third symbol is reduced and displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to notice that the third symbol has started to change, and the previous change is still continued. You can make it seem as if you are.

  In addition, with the occasion of the small hit, the actual number of changes for continuously displaying the plurality of changes to appear as one change within the range of the number of items being held at that time is determined by determining the status flag. In the meantime, since the exclusive variation pattern selection table 203e is configured to be selected during this time, it is possible to easily perform an effect that makes a plurality of variations appear as one variation.

  Furthermore, it is set so that the fluctuation pattern selected according to the number of transition fluctuations after the small hits winning time is changed, and in the final fluctuation, since the display form showing the lottery result is set from the reach display form, When the small hit is won, the reach display mode can be easily made to remind the player.

  In the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment, a status flag storage area 203f, a fluctuation counter 203g, and a selection counter 203h are added to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment.

  The status flag storage area 203f is a storage area for storing a status flag for determining whether or not it is a period for selecting a dedicated fluctuation pattern after a small hit in a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As the status flags, five types of flags A to E are set in advance as shown in FIG. 67 (c).

  The status flag A is a flag indicating that a period during which a normal fluctuation pattern is selected. The status flag B is a flag indicating that it is a period during which the small hit only variation pattern is selected once. Similarly, the status flag C selects the small hit-only variation pattern twice, the status flag D selects the small hit-only variation pattern three times, and the status flag D selects the small hit-only variation pattern four times. This is a flag indicating that this is a period of time.

  It should be noted that the status flag is determined by lottery in the process of S421 of the status transition process (FIG. 76, S329) which is one of the special symbol change start processes (FIG. 75, S220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Is selected from the status selection table 202c (see FIG. 67 (b)).

  Here, when the status flag is selected, it is stored in the status flag storage area 203f of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. When the power is turned off, the status flag storage area 203f is backed up and stored by being supplied with power from a backup power supply. Then, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to return to the state immediately before the power was turned off. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the status flag A, which is a default setting, is set in the status flag storage area 203f.

The fluctuation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of transition fluctuations after the small hit. The fluctuation counter 203g is incremented and updated by 1 in the processing of S335 in the special symbol fluctuation start processing (S220 in FIG. 75) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the special symbol variation start process (S220 in FIG. 75, S220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and in the process in S221 in the special symbol variation process 2 (S140 in FIG. 74), the initial value is reset to 0. The selection counter 203h is a counter that is sequentially updated one by one within a range from an initial value of 0 to an upper limit value of 99. In the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. After updating to the upper limit of 99, if it is further updated, it is updated to the initial value of 0. Although not shown, the selection counter 203h is incremented by one and updated in the process of S1011 of the main process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, in the process of S421 of the status transition process (S329 in FIG. 76) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the status flag (status) is determined from the status selection table 202c, the value of the selection counter 203h is obtained. You.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
A sub fluctuation counter 223r and a sub status flag storage area 223s are respectively added to the RAM 223 of the first embodiment of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113.

  The sub fluctuation counter 223r is a counter for counting the number of transition fluctuations in synchronization with a fluctuation counter 203g provided in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the value is incremented and updated by 1 in S1712. In the process of S1714, the initial value is reset to 0. In this embodiment, although not shown, the initial value is reset to 0 based on the reception of the opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot game output from the main control device 110.

  The sub status flag storage area 223s is a storage area for storing a status flag based on a status command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of a status flag determined by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. . The status flag based on the status command received in the process of S1451 in the command determination process (S2050 in FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is stored (set) in the sub status flag storage area 223s.

<Variation display mode when the number of transition fluctuations according to the present embodiment is set>
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, an example of a variation display mode in the number of transition variations set in response to a small hit winning in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example of a case where a small win is won and the status flag E is determined when three or more pieces are held.

  In the variation 1, it is determined that the small hit is won, the status flag E is determined, and the special small hit variation pattern is selected. During the period indicated by a1, after the high-speed variable display of the third symbol continues (see FIG. 71 (a1)), as shown in FIG. The third symbol is displayed on the three symbol display device 81, and the third symbol is reduced to the lower right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and out of the out of symbol “341” (a symbol different from the big hit symbol), a specific chance eye Is displayed.

  Next, the fluctuation 2 shows a case where the out-of-reach reach start fluctuation pattern 1 or the out-of-reach reach start fluctuation pattern 2 is selected. As shown in FIG. 71 (b1), after the high-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol is displayed for a predetermined period within the period of b1, the display is switched to the low-speed display, and as shown in FIG. 71 (b2), the left symbol column is displayed. The reach display mode is stopped at "7" symbol, then the right symbol column is similarly stopped at "7" symbol, the left and right symbols are displayed with the same symbol, and the variation display of the middle symbol is continued at b2. Displayed for the indicated period.

  Thereafter, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation 3 is started. The variation 3 shows a case where the variation pattern 1 during out-of-reach reach and the variation pattern 2 during out-of-reach reach are selected. A notice period c1 is set in the period indicated by c1, a SW valid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 for three seconds is valid is set, and when the frame button 22 is operated within that time, FIG. As shown in c1- (A)), the character "second time" is displayed until the notice period c1 ends. If the frame button 22 is not operated even after the SW valid period has elapsed, a cut-in display mode in which the word “development” is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (B)) is displayed. .

  In this way, by making the display mode displayed when the player operates the frame button 22 different from the display mode displayed when the player does not operate the frame button 22, the player sets the frame button 22 by the player. The pleasure of operating can be increased.

  After the notice period c1 ends, as shown in FIG. 71 (c2), the reach display mode displayed with the same symbol as the reach symbol displayed with the fluctuation 2 is displayed. Here, in the reach display mode displayed by the variation 3, an effect or the like is displayed on the middle symbol, and an effect different from the variation 2 is executed.

  After the fluctuation time of fluctuation 2 has elapsed, the fluctuation display mode indicated by fluctuation 4 is displayed. Variation 4 shows a case where either the out-of-SP reach variation pattern or the hit SP reach variation pattern is selected. Three seconds out of the period indicated by d1 is set as the SW valid period. Then, when the frame button 22 is operated within the SW valid period, as shown in FIG. 72 (d1- (A)), the characters "third" are displayed until the notice period ends. On the other hand, if the frame button 22 has not been operated during the SW valid period, a cut-in display mode in which characters “next notice crane reach” is displayed as shown in FIG. 72 (d1- (B)) is displayed. Is done. Thereafter, during a period d2, a special reach display mode (SP reach display mode) in which a display mode in which a jackpot symbol is lifted by a crane as shown in FIG. 72 (d2) is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hit is won, the number of transition fluctuations is determined, and a dedicated selection table is set so that the fluctuation pattern selected by the number is different from the normal fluctuation pattern. Configured to set. Therefore, it is possible to show by combining a plurality of variable display modes as if a plurality of variable displays (lottery game) set to the number of transition changes from the small hit variable display mode are one variable display mode. .

  In addition, since the variation pattern of the display mode having continuity with the previously displayed variation display is selected in accordance with the number of transition variations, a plurality of variations are more likely to be presented to the player as one variation. Can be shown. Therefore, even in the case of a lottery game that is actually out of the way, it is possible to play the game while maintaining the expectation to the big hit.

  In addition, at the time of winning a small hit, a variable display mode different from the normal time can be easily displayed, and the small hit to the player can give a greater sense of expectation to the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game by the next big hit game.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Fifth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 73 to FIG. 76, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment will be described only with respect to changes, and illustration and description of the same process will be omitted.

  FIG. 73 illustrates a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 17, S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140). Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a special symbol variation process 2 (S140), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S140). The special symbol change process 2 (FIG. 74, S140) in the fifth embodiment is different from the special symbol change process (FIG. 17, S104) in the first embodiment in that the special symbol change start process (FIG. 18, S208) is special. In the symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 75, S220), the process of S215 is changed to the process of S221, respectively, and the processes of S222 to S223 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the processing of S213 or S214 is performed, the processing of S221 is performed. In the process of S221, the start of the jackpot game is set (similar to the first embodiment), the fluctuation counter 203g is reset to 0, which is the initial value, and the status flag A is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f. .

  Further, in the process of S211, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of order (S211: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S222). Here, the determination as to whether or not the small hit is made by determining whether the value of the first random number counter C1 is the same as the small hit determination value described above. In the process of S222, when it is determined that the small hit is won (S222: Yes), the start of the small hit game in the small hit is set. Here, the operation of moving (opening) the variable winning device 65 for a predetermined period (0.5 s in the present embodiment) is set twice. On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that there is a non-small hit (S222: No), the process of S216 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, a special symbol variation start process 2 (S220), which is one of the special symbol variation processes 2 (FIG. 74, S140) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process 2 (S220). The special symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 75, S220) in the fifth embodiment is different from the special symbol change start process (FIG. 18, S208) in the first embodiment in each of S328 to S331 and S334 to S337. Processing has been added. Note that the processes in S321 to S327, S332 to S333, and S338 to S339 are the same processes as the processes in S301 to S312, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S325, if it is determined that the result of the hit determination is out of order (S325: No), it is determined whether the result of the hit determination is a small hit (S328). When it is determined that the result is the small hit (S328: Yes), the status transition processing is executed. (S329).

  Here, the status transition processing (S329) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the status transition processing (S329).

  In the status transition processing (FIG. 76, S329), first, a status flag (status) is determined based on the current hold number and the value of the selection counter 203h from the status selection table (see FIG. 67 (b)) (S421). . It is determined whether or not the lottery result is the status flag B (S422). If the result is the status flag B (S422: Yes), the status flag B is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f (S423).

  On the other hand, in the process of S422, when it is determined that the lottery result is not the status flag B (S422: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is the status flag C (S424). When it is determined that the lottery result is the status flag C (S424: Yes), the status flag C is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f (S425).

  On the other hand, in the process of S424, when it is determined that the lottery result is not the status flag C (S424: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is the status flag D (S426). When it is determined that the lottery result is the status flag D (S426: Yes), the status flag D is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f (S427). On the other hand, in the process of S426, when it is determined that the lottery result is not the status flag D, that is, when it is determined that the status flag is E (S426: No), the status flag E is set in the status flag storage area 203f. (Storing) (S428). After that, the status command indicating the status flag set in any of the processes of S423, S425, S427, and S428 is set to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 (S429).

  Here, returning to FIG. 75, the description will be continued. After the status transition processing (FIG. 76, S329) is executed, the display mode displayed on the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the small hit is set (S330). Thereafter, based on the status flag stored in the status flag storage area 203f and the value of the variation type counter CS1, a small hit variation pattern is determined from the small hit dedicated variation pattern selection table 202e.

  Next, after any one of S327, S331, and S333 is performed, the process of S334 is performed. In the process of S334, it is determined whether the status flag 203f stored in the status flag storage area 203f is a status flag other than the status flag A (that is, any one of the status flags B, C, D, and E). In the process of S334, when it is determined that the status flag is other than the status flag A (S334: Yes), the value of the variation counter 203g is updated by adding 1 to the value of the variation counter 203g (S335), and the updated value of the variation counter 203g is set. It is determined whether the value is equal to or greater than the number of transition changes set in the status flag (see FIG. 67 (c)) (S336). When it is determined that the value of the variation counter 203g is equal to or greater than the number of transition variations (S336: Yes), the value of the variation counter 203g is reset to 0, which is the initial value, and the status flag A is stored in the status flag storage area 203f. It is set (S337). After that, the process of S338 is performed. Further, in the process of S336, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 203g is less than the number of transition variations (S336), and when it is determined that the status flag is A in the process of S334 (S334: No), the process of S338 is performed.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fifth Embodiment>
A control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that only changes are shown in the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and illustration and description of the same processing is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 77, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The main process (FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is different from the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment by a frame. The button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307) is displayed in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (FIG. 80, S2630), and the command determination processing (FIG. 27, S1311) is displayed in the command determination processing 5 (FIG. 78, S2050). The setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed from the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060). The other processing is the same as the processing in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a command determination process 5 (S2050) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 5 (S2050). In the command determination process 5 (S2050 in FIG. 78) according to the fifth embodiment, the processes from S1410 to S1414 are deleted from the command determination process (S1311 in FIG. 27) according to the first embodiment, and S1450 to S1451 are performed. Each process up to has been added. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the processing of S1408, when it is determined that the hold command has not been received (S1408: No), it is determined whether the status command output from the main control device 110 has been received (S1450). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S1450: Yes), the status flag indicated by the status command is set in the sub status flag storage area 223s (S1451). On the other hand, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1450: No), the process of S1415 is executed.

  Next, a variable display setting process 2 (S2060) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S2060). In the variable display setting process 2 (S2060 in FIG. 79) according to the fifth embodiment, the respective processes from S1711 to S1714 are respectively added to the variable display setting process (S1312 in FIG. 30) in the first embodiment. I have. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S1706, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is off (S1706: No) or after the process of S1710 is performed, the process of S1711 is performed. In the processing of S1711, it is determined whether the status flag stored in the sub status flag storage area 223s is other than the status flag A, that is, any of the status flags B, C, D, and E (S1711). . If it is determined that the status flag is other than the status flag A (S1711: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the sub fluctuation counter 223r and updated (S1712).

  It is determined whether the value of the sub fluctuation counter 223r is equal to or greater than the number of transition fluctuations set in the status flag (S1713). If it is determined that the value of the sub fluctuation counter 223r is equal to or greater than the number of transition fluctuations (S1713: Yes), the value of the sub fluctuation counter 223r is reset to 0, which is the initial value, and the status is stored in the sub status flag storage area 223s. The flag A is set (S1714). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1713 that the value of the sub fluctuation counter 223r is less than the number of transition fluctuations, the processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (FIG. 80, S2630) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (S2630).

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (FIG. 80, S2630), first, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is 0 (S1521). When a change pattern command is received, a predetermined SW valid time effective counter 223j is set in accordance with the change pattern. When it is determined that the SW valid time counter 223j is 0 (S1521: Yes), it is determined whether the SW press count counter 223k is a value larger than 0. It should be noted that the SW press counter 223k is set to 1 based on the setting of the valid time counter 223j.

  When it is determined that the number of times of pressing the switch 233k is greater than 0 (S1522: Yes), the value of the number of times of pressing the switch 233k is set to 0 (S1523), and based on the value of the sub fluctuation counter 223r. Then, a display cut-in command to be output to the display control device 114 is set (S1524). Based on this display cut-in command, for example, a cut-in display mode as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (B)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this cut-in display mode, a plurality of display modes are set in addition to the display mode as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (B)). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1523 that the value of the SW press counter 223k is equal to or smaller than 0 (S1522: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S1521, if it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is a value other than 0 (S1521: No), the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is updated by subtracting 1 (S1525). . It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (S1526). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1526: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW press counter 223k is greater than 0 (S1527). When it is determined that the value of the SW detour number counter 223k is greater than 0 (S1527: Yes), the value of the SW press number counter 223k is decremented by 1 (S1528), and the value of the sub fluctuation counter 223r. , A display notice command to be output to the display control device 11 is set (S1529). On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed in the processing of S1526 (S1526: No), or in the processing of S1527 in the processing of S1527, it is determined that the value of the SW press counter 223k is 0 or less. If the processing has been performed (S1527: No), this processing ends.

<Control Process Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Fifth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 81, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that only changes are shown in the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment, and illustration and description of the same processing is omitted.

  The command determination process 2 (S2120) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 2 (S2120). Command determination processing 2 (S2120 in FIG. 81) according to the fifth embodiment is different from command determination processing (S2102 in FIG. 34) according to the first embodiment in that the processing from S2208 to S2209 is deleted, and S2121 to S2124. Each process up to has been added. The other processing is the same as the processing in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S2121, when it is determined that the display cut-in command has not been received (S2121: No), it is determined whether the display advance command has been received (S2123). In the process of S2123, when it is determined that the display advance notice command has been received (S2123: Yes), the advance notice display data corresponding to the received display advance notice command is set in the display data table buffer ( S2124). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2123 that the display advance notice command has not been received (S2123: No), the processing of S2210 is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol change pattern (at the time of the jackpot winning (at the time of executing the time-saving game state, at the time of starting the high-probability game, at the time of starting the normal game (low-probability game start)) and at the time of the winning of the small hit) (Variable time) is configured to be switched. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that the selection table of the variation pattern is frequently switched, the variation time and the like are frequently changed, and the gambling of the game becomes unstable.

  Then, in such a configuration, when a small hit is won, a change pattern is selected from a change pattern selection table dedicated to a small hit until a predetermined number of changes. A changed effect can be provided.

  Further, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, the effect is configured to be set so as to be continuous with the effect of the preceding and following change patterns so that a plurality of changes including the small hits appear to be one change. A plurality of variation patterns are set in advance, and a variation pattern selection table dedicated to small hits is set so that each variation pattern can be combined and sequentially selected so as to be continuous. It can appear as if it were a single change.

  Furthermore, in the variation pattern selection table dedicated to small hits selected at the time of the small hit winning, the variation pattern is selected in a variation pattern that is easy to be selected when the result of the determination of the special reach or super reach is a big hit in the last variation. Since the same effect as that described above is configured to be executed, the player can increase the degree of expectation of the jackpot.

  Also, in the present embodiment, a plurality of transition fluctuation times are set at the time of winning a small hit, and if a lottery game that becomes a big hit in the middle of the number is included, the big hit is executed. Since the number of transition fluctuations is configured to be reset, a series of fluctuations is completed by a jackpot, and then, when an effect is performed to make a plurality of fluctuations appear to be one fluctuation. Can be expected to be a big hit. Further, even after the jackpot, a continuous effect (for example, an effect of starting a change from the reach state) is continuously selected, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that gives a sense of incongruity to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hit is won, a plurality of subsequent fluctuations in the special symbol are displayed to the player as if they were a single special symbol. Are configured to be combined, so that even a plurality of out-of-place fluctuations can be seen as if they were one out-of-place fluctuations. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a chance that the player is disappointed that he / she is out. Further, since it is possible to make a plurality of fluctuations including a change that causes a jackpot to appear as if it were a single change, the fluctuation judgment result displayed before the jackpot is out of order. Even in this case, it is possible to make it appear as if it were one variation in combination with the variation of the jackpot, so that a variation that is out of the range can be used effectively.

  In addition, in this embodiment, at the time of winning a small hit, it is configured such that the number of transition fluctuations is determined within the number of reserved balls of the lottery game that is being reserved, so that a plurality of fluctuations is more than one fluctuation. It was configured to be able to look like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the number of transition fluctuations equal to or greater than the number of reserved balls is set, so that a plurality of fluctuations appear to be continuing. In such a configuration, all fluctuations are in a reach state, and by performing an effect such as performing a chance effect to determine whether or not a lottery game that can be a big hit can be started, the player can more participate in the game. Motivation can be increased.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the prefetching and performs the prefetching effect across a plurality of fluctuations based on the result of the prefetching. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the number of transition changes is determined in response to the winning of the small hit, and when the maximum number of production executions determined within the number of transition changes is executed, the remaining The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in that the reach display mode of the variable time corresponding to the time is selected. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

<Display Mode of Pachinko Machine 10 in Sixth Embodiment>
A display mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 (a) is a time chart showing the variable display mode when the status flag E is set at the time of the small hit winning when the alternative display mode is not set. In the sixth embodiment, at the time of winning a small hit, the status flag is determined and the number of transition fluctuations is set as in the fifth embodiment. The example shown in FIG. 82A shows a case where the status flag E is set and the number of transition changes is set to three.

  In the sixth embodiment, the special reach display mode set by the final change in the number of transition changes (in the example shown in FIG. 82A, the change 4 corresponds to the start of the change 2) is the change display start. The period until the effect is set as the production possible time. In addition, the maximum number of productions is set based on the result of the win / fail determination and the value of the selection counter 203h at the time of the small win. The maximum number of productions is set by the player operating the frame button 22 during the production possible time, and the maximum number of productions is set to one production displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . As the effect contents, characters such as “second time” and “third time” as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (A)) and FIG. 72 (d1- (A)) are displayed based on the number of effects. You. At that time, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right display area.

  In the example shown in FIG. 82 (a), the maximum number of effects is set to three, but the notice effect is executed only up to two times, and the maximum number of effects has not been reached. As described above, when the maximum number of productions has not been reached, the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is waited until the available production time elapses, and then the reach display mode of the display mode of the preset fluctuation 4 is set. (In the present embodiment, a special reach display mode (SP reach display mode)) is displayed.

  As described above, the notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 up to the maximum effect number based on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22. Here, when the maximum number of effects is a hit or a negative result of the fluctuation 4, a larger number of effects is selected, and the player operates the frame button 22 to determine the right or wrong earlier. The result can be predicted from the number of executions of the notice effect. Therefore, the pleasure of pressing the frame button 22 can be given to the player more.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82 (b), a display mode in the case of FIG. 82 (a) when the notice effect is executed up to the maximum number of effects will be described. FIG. 82 (b) is a time chart showing a case where a notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 up to the maximum number of effects. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 82 (b), the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the fluctuation time of the fluctuation 3, and the third notice effect which is the maximum number of effects is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is what was displayed. In this case, an alternative variation display mode closer to the remaining time is selected based on the remaining time until the variation 4 ends. Although the details of this alternative fluctuation display mode will be described later, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are set in advance for each of the pass / fail judgment results, and the fluctuation patterns closer to the remaining time are set. An alternative variation pattern for the variation time is selected. The alternative variation pattern is configured in a special reach display mode in which a specific reach display mode is set, as shown in FIG. 72 (d2).

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Sixth Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment.

<Electrical Configuration of Main Controller 110 in Sixth Embodiment>
In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, a big hit random number table 202a, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, a status selection table 202c, status information 202d, and a small hit dedicated fluctuation pattern selection table 202e are respectively set.

  The jackpot random number table 202a, the variation pattern selection table 202b, the status selection table 202c, and the status information 202d are the same as those already described in the fifth embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  FIGS. 84 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 85 (a) and (b) show the small hit-only variation pattern selection table 202e in the sixth embodiment. Note that the normal small hit variation pattern and the special small hit variation pattern in the small hit only variation pattern in the sixth embodiment are the normal small hit variation pattern and the special small hit variation pattern configured in the same display manner as in the fifth embodiment. Each is composed of a fluctuation pattern. The off-going fluctuation patterns 1 to 3 are configured in a non-reach display mode from the start of the change to the stop of the change in the third symbol, and the change times are different from each other. Off-SP reach variation patterns 1 and 2 are configured in a special reach display mode including a reach display mode such as a crane reach display mode as shown in FIG. 72 (d2) described in the fifth embodiment. Further, the winning SP reach variation patterns 1 and 2 are different from the out-of-SP reach reach variation patterns 1 and 2 in that the result of the determination is displayed as a hit.

  The variation pattern selection table 202e only for small hits shown in FIG. 84B is a table selected when the status flag B is selected, and similarly, the variation pattern selection table 202e only for small hits shown in FIG. 85e is a status flag C, a variation pattern selection table dedicated to small hits shown in FIG. 85 (a) is a status flag D, and a variation pattern selection table dedicated to small hits shown in FIG. 85 (b). A table 202e is selected when the status flag E is selected. The method of selecting each variation pattern is the same as the method described in the fifth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, a status flag storage area 203f, a fluctuation counter 203g, and a selection counter 203h are respectively added to the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. Have been. Note that each of them has the same configuration as that already described in the fifth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Sixth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 83, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described.

  In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment, the effect time setting table 222k, the maximum number of times determination table 222m, the substitute variation pattern are stored in the ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. A table 222n and an alternate effect lottery table 222p are added. Although not shown, the selection table of each variation pattern set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is also set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can determine the fluctuation pattern selected by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 from the winning command output from the main control device 110. Note that, even when the selection table of the variation pattern is switched according to the number of reservations, by fixing the variation pattern that becomes a reach or a super-reach according to the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the number of reservations, the voice lamp can be read in advance. The MPU 221 of the control device 113 can determine a change that causes a reach or a super reach.

  The effect time setting table 222k is data for setting the effect time (display time) of the notice display displayed in the small hit variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG. 86 (a). It is a table. The effect time is set longer as the number of times increases. In addition, when the lottery game corresponding to the number of transition fluctuations includes a lottery game that is a big hit, a larger number of production times is configured to be easily selected than when the lottery game is not included. Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict the success / failure determination result based on the number of productions, and when a large number of productions are selected, the player can play the game with more expectation of a big hit. Note that, as described in the fifth embodiment, a display mode for notifying the number of effects as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (A)) is displayed in the preview effect displayed here. In the present embodiment, the display mode is to notify the number of productions of the notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a tentative third design or the like is displayed, and a pseudo reach effect or the tentative third design is stopped and displayed. Such a display may be performed to make it appear that more lottery games have been performed, or an effect in which a character or the like is displayed may be performed.

  The maximum effect number determination table 222m is a data table for determining the maximum number of announcement effects displayed during the display of the small hit exclusive change pattern in which the number of shift changes is set on the third symbol display device 81. The maximum notice number determination table 222m is determined by the lottery corresponding to the set number of transition fluctuations in the processing of S2264 in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 (S2060 in FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The maximum number of productions is determined based on the result of the game success / failure determination and the value of the production counter 223h. Thereby, the maximum number of productions is determined which is larger when the winning lottery game is included in the lottery game executed during the number of transition changes. Therefore, by executing many announcement effects, it is possible to make the player expect the big hit.

  The alternative variation pattern table 222n is a data table in which the variation time of the alternative variation pattern is set, as shown in FIG. 86 (c). As an example of the alternative variation pattern, a missed SP reach variation pattern 1, a missed SP reach variation pattern 2, a per-SP reach variation pattern 1, and a per-SP reach variation pattern 2 are set.

  The alternative effect lottery table 222p is a data table for determining whether or not to set an alternative variation pattern when the notice effect is executed a maximum number of times. In the alternative effect lottery table 222p, the value of the effect counter 223h is set such that the alternative change pattern is more easily set when the lottery game that wins during the transition change count is included than when it is not included. Is allocated.

  The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment has a SW press counter 223k, a sub status flag storage area 223s, a total time storage area 223t, an effectable time storage area 223u, and a reach fluctuation time storage area 223v. , Effect number counter 223w is added.

  The SW press counter 223k has the same configuration as that described in the second embodiment, and the sub status flag storage area 223s has the same configuration as that described in the fifth embodiment. Detailed description is omitted.

  The total time storage area 223t is a storage area in which, when the number of transition fluctuations is set, the total of the fluctuation time of the lottery game for the number of transition fluctuations is stored. This total time storage area 223t stores the fluctuation of each fluctuation pattern corresponding to the number of transition fluctuations (the value of the prefetch frequency counter) in the processing of S2253 of the effect setting processing (S2075 in FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The total time is set.

  The effect possible time storage area 223u is a storage area for storing a time during which a notice effect can be displayed when the number of transition changes is set. The effectable time storage area 223u is the value set in the total time storage area 223t in the processing of S2261 in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 (S2060 in FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The value obtained by subtracting the number of reach seconds of the final change in the number of transition changes is stored. In the process of S2276, the effect possible time is subtracted and updated based on the elapsed time.

  The reach variation time storage area 223v is a storage area for storing the reach variation time of the final variation in which the number of transition variations (the number of prefetches) is set. The reach variation time storage area 223v stores the number of reach seconds in the processing of S2252 in the effect setting processing (S2075 in FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113.

  The effect number counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of notice effects. When the maximum number of productions is determined from the maximum production number determination table (see FIG. 86 (b)), the maximum number of productions is set in the production number counter 223w. In the frame button input monitoring / producing process 5 (S2060 in FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the value is decremented and updated by 1 in S2275, and reset to the initial value of 0 in the process of S2269. Is done.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Sixth Embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 87 to 89, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment will be described only with respect to changes, and illustration and description of the same process will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. The special symbol change process (FIG. 17, S104) is changed to the special symbol change process 2 (FIG. 74, S140), and the starting winning process (FIG. 19, S105) is changed to the starting winning process 3 (FIG. 88, S150). ing. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. The special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140) has the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 88, start winning processing 3 (S150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 3 (S150). The start winning process 3 (S150 in FIG. 88) according to the sixth embodiment is different from the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 19) in the first embodiment in that the processes from S407 to S411 are deleted, and the prefetch lottery process is performed. (FIG. 89, S430) has been added. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 89, the prefetch lottery process (S430), which is one process in the start winning process 3 (FIG. 88, S150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the prefetch lottery process (S430).

  In the prefetch lottery process (FIG. 89, S430), first, it is determined whether or not it is determined to be a big hit at the start of the fluctuation based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in S406 in the start winning process 3 (S150 in FIG. 88). Is performed (S431). If it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S431: Yes), a jackpot winning command that can determine the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S406 is set to be output to the audio lamp control device 113. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S431 that it is out (S431: No), it is determined whether it is a small hit (S433). If it is determined that the win is a small hit (S433: Yes), a small hit prize winning command that can determine the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S406 is set to be output to the audio lamp control device 113. Is performed (S434).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S433 that it is not a small hit, it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that becomes a super reach (S435). If it is determined that the variation pattern is a super-reach variation pattern (S435: Yes), an out-of-reach prize winning command that can determine the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S406 is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. Output is enabled (S436). On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern does not become a super-reach variation pattern (S435: No), an out-of-prize winning command indicating the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S406 is set (S437).

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that only changes are shown in the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and illustration and description of the same processing is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 90, a description will be given of a main process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment is different from the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The frame button input monitoring / producing process (S1307) corresponds to the frame button input monitoring / producing process 5 (FIG. 96, S2640), the command determining process (FIG. 27, S1311) corresponds to the command determining process 6 (FIG. 91, S2070), The variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed to the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060). Note that the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060) is the same process as that already described in the fifth embodiment, and the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 91, a description is given of the command determination process 6 (S2070) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 6 (S2070). The command determination process 6 (FIG. 91, S2070) in the sixth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 27, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment in S1410 to S1414. Are deleted, and the processes from S2071 to S2075 are added. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the processing of S1408, when it is determined that the hold command has not been received (S1408: No), it is determined whether the winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2071). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S2071: Yes), a winning command receiving process is executed (S2072).

  The winning command receiving process (S2072) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the winning command receiving process (S2072). In the winning command reception processing (FIG. 92, S2072), first, the winning command indicating the value of the received variation type counter CS1 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2081).

  It is determined whether the received winning command is a jackpot winning command (S2082). If it is determined that the jackpot winning command has been received (S2082: Yes), the jackpot determination flag 223e is set to ON (S2083). After that, the process of S2085 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning command is not the jackpot winning command (S2082: No), it is determined whether the received winning command is a miss reach winning command (S2084). When it is determined that the command is the out-of-reach prize winning command (S2084: Yes), the prefetching effect lottery process 2 is executed (S2085). This prefetching effect lottery process 2 (S2085) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After the prefetching effect lottery process 2 (S2072 in FIG. 93) is executed, the big hit determination flag 223e is set to OFF (S2086). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2084 that the command is not a missed reach winning command (S2084: No), this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the prefetching effect lottery process 2 (S2085) which is one of the winning command receiving processes (S2072 in FIG. 92) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the prefetching effect lottery process 2 (S2085). In S2222 to S2234 in the pre-reading effect lottery process 2 (S2085 in FIG. 93) in the sixth embodiment, the same processes as those in S1601 to S1613 in S1412 in FIG. The processing of S2221 is added to the processing of the first embodiment.

  In the process of S2221, it is determined whether or not the winning information storage area 223a (reserved area) stores a small lottery game, ie, a small hit winning command. If it is determined that the small hit winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2221: Yes), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2221 that the small hit winning command is not stored (S2221: No), the processing of S2222 is added.

  Returning to FIG. 91, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2071 that no winning command has been received (S2071: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2073). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S2073: Yes), a status command receiving process is executed (S2074).

  The status command reception processing (S2074) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the status command receiving process (S2074).

  In the status command processing (S2074 in FIG. 94), first, it is determined whether the received status command is a status command indicating the status flag B (S2241). If it is determined that the status flag is B (S2241: Yes), the status flag B is set in the sub status flag storage area 223f, and the prefetch count counter is set to 0 (S2242). No pre-reading is set (S2243), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the status flag indicated by the received status command is other than the status flag B (S2241: No), it is determined whether the received status command is the status command indicating the status flag C. (S2244). If it is determined that the status flag is the status flag C (S2244: Yes), the status flag C is set in the sub status flag storage area 223f, and the prefetch count counter is set to 1 (S2242). Although illustration is omitted, it is set to “read ahead”, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the status flag indicated by the received status command is other than the status flag C (S2244: No), it is determined whether the received status command is the status command indicating the status flag D. (S2246). If it is determined that the status flag is the status flag D (S2246: Yes), the status flag D is set in the sub status flag storage area 223f, and the prefetch counter is set to 2 (S2247). Although illustration is omitted, it is set to “read ahead”, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the status flag indicated by the received status command is other than the status flag D, that is, the status flag E (S2246: No), the status flag E is set in the sub status flag storage area 223f, The prefetch frequency counter is set to 3 (S2248). Although illustration is omitted, it is set to “read ahead”, and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 91, the description will be continued. After the status command receiving process (FIG. 94, S2074) is executed, the effect setting process is executed (S2075). After that, this processing ends. The effect setting process (S2075) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this effect setting process (S2075). In the effect setting process (FIG. 95, S2075), first, the small hits exclusive use is performed based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the value of the prefetch number counter set in the prefetch number counter storage area 223g. The fluctuation pattern information is acquired again from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222 (S2251). As a result, when the small hit is won, the information read in advance can be updated in correspondence with the small hit dedicated fluctuation pattern selected by the main control device 110.

  When the process of S2251 is executed, the reach time of the final change corresponding to the value of the prefetch number counter is set in the reach change time storage area 223v (S2252). The total of the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern selected by each lottery game corresponding to the look-ahead counter is set as the total fluctuation time in the total time storage area 223t (S2253).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 (S2640) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (FIG. 96, S2640).

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process 5 (FIG. 96, S2640), first, as the production possible time in the production possible time storage area 223u, the total fluctuation time stored in the total time storage area 223t is stored in the reach fluctuation time storage area 223v. A value obtained by subtracting the stored reach seconds is set (S2261). It is determined whether the effectable time set in S2261 is a value larger than 0 (S2262). When it is determined that the possible production time is a value greater than 0 (S2262: Yes), it is determined whether or not the production number of the production number counter 223w is set (S2263).

  When it is determined that the number of effects has been set (S2263: Yes), the process of S2265 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of effects has not been set (S2263: No), the maximum number of effects is stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the number of prefetches set in the maximum effect number determination table 222m. The maximum number of productions is determined based on the validity determination information and the value of the production counter 223h, and is set in the production number counter 223w (S2264).

  In the process of S2265, it is determined whether the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S2265). When it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is a value other than 0, the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is updated by subtracting 1 (S2266), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S2265: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the effect number counter 223w is 0 (S2267). When it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223w is not 0 (S2267: Yes), an alternative effect lottery process is executed (S2268). Here, the alternative effect lottery process (S2268) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this alternative effect lottery process (S2268). In the alternative effect lottery process (FIG. 97, S2268), first, it is determined whether the total fluctuation time is longer than 25 seconds (S2281). If it is determined that the total fluctuation time is longer than 25 seconds (S2281: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is obtained, and the lottery result is obtained from the alternative effect lottery table 222p (see FIG. 86 (d)). I do.

  It is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained in the processing of S2282 is an alternative (win) (S2283). When it is determined that the lottery result has the alternative (S2283: Yes), it is determined whether the total fluctuation time is longer than 30 seconds (S2284). If it is determined that the total variation time is longer than 30 seconds (S2284: Yes), the out-of-SP reach variation pattern 2 or the per-SP reach variation pattern 2 is determined based on the determination result, and the corresponding display command is determined. Is set (S2285). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2284, when it is determined that the total variation time is 30 seconds or less (S2284: No), the out-of-SP reach variation pattern 1 or the per-SP reach variation pattern 1 is determined based on the determination result. Then, a corresponding display command is set (S2286). After that, this processing ends.

  As described above, when the notice effect is displayed up to the set maximum number of effects on the third symbol display device 81, the remaining total change time at that time is determined, and the change display of the alternative change pattern is possible. If it is time, it is determined whether to display the alternative variation pattern by lottery. Here, the lottery for displaying the alternative variation pattern is executed based on the result of the determination of the variation of the lottery game, and if the result of the determination is a hit, the alternative variation pattern is more likely than the case of the deviation. Since the display is set so as to be easily displayed, the player can expect a bigger hit by displaying the alternative variation pattern. Further, when the remaining time of the total fluctuation time is long, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player has to wait for a long time until the reach display mode of the final fluctuation is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

  In the present embodiment, after the alternative variation display mode is displayed, if there is a remaining time until the variation time further elapses, in a state where all the third symbols have fluctuated while the variation display is stopped, It waits until the fluctuation time elapses. Thereafter, based on the elapse of the fluctuation time, a fixed stop is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the display until stopping is a more natural display mode.

  Returning to FIG. 96, the description will be continued. After the alternative effect lottery process (FIG. 97, S2268) is executed, the effect number counter 223w is reset to the initial value of 0 (S2269). The value of the effectable time storage area 223u is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S2270). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2267, when it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223w is not 0 (S2267: No), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S2271). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2271: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW press counter 223k is greater than 0 (S2272). When it is determined that the value of the SW press frequency counter 223k is greater than 0 (S2272: Yes), the value of the SW press frequency count 223k is decremented by 1 (S2273), and the value of the effect frequency counter 223w. Is set (S2274). The value of the effect number counter 223w is decremented by 1 (S2275), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed in the processing of S2271 (S2271: No), or if the value of the SW press counter 223k is equal to or less than 0 in the processing of S2272 (S2272: No), this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of special symbol changes are made to appear to the player as if the special symbol change were a single special symbol change at the time of the small hit winning. Since the variation patterns are configured to be combined, it is possible to make it appear as if it were a single variation even if the variation was multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a chance that the player is disappointed that he / she is out. Further, since it is possible to make a plurality of fluctuations including a change that causes a jackpot to appear as if it were a single change, the fluctuation judgment result displayed before the jackpot is out of order. Even in this case, it is possible to make it appear as if it were one variation in combination with the variation of the jackpot, so that a variation that is out of the range can be used effectively.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of advance notice displays (display of the first time, the second time, etc.) are displayed on the frame button 22 of the player during the effect of making the plurality of changes appear as one change. Since the display is performed based on the operation, it is possible to configure so that different effects are given to the respective players according to the operation timings of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing the game with the same effect.

  In addition, the maximum number of times the notice display is displayed is configured such that a larger number of times is selected in the case of a jackpot based on the result of the determination of success or failure. The result of the success / failure determination can be predicted in advance, and the enjoyment of the game can be further increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the notice display of the maximum number of times is displayed, an alternative variation pattern that is close to that time is selected and displayed based on the remaining time until the final variation is completed. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the player from getting bored, and to give the player an effect that matches the fluctuation time.

  In addition, the alternative variation pattern is not always selected, but is randomly selected based on the result of the determination of success or failure, and in the case of a jackpot, the alternative variation pattern is configured to be easily selected, so that the alternative variation pattern is displayed. It is possible to make the player expect a big hit.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the notice display is configured to display the first and second characters, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, after displaying the first character, a predetermined time or the like is displayed. A special symbol (a symbol dedicated to reach, a symbol with a different symbol pattern, etc.) may be displayed in a variable manner, or a character or the like may be displayed. With this configuration, the player can enjoy the notice display.

  In the present embodiment, the number of transition fluctuations is determined within the number of reserved balls at the time of winning a small hit, and a plurality of special symbol changes including the small hit are made to appear as one change within the number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the number of transition fluctuations equal to or greater than the number of reserved balls is set, and a fluctuation effect is performed in a continuous fluctuation pattern within the number. In such a case, for example, every time within the number of transition fluctuations, as a chance effect that the fluctuation pattern starts to fluctuate from the reach state, it is configured to perform an effect of whether the player can start a big hit fluctuation. May be.

  In such a configuration, each time the variation pattern dedicated to small hits that starts to change in the reach state starts to change, the number of times the variation pattern dedicated to small hits starts to change continuously is notified to the player. Is also good. With this configuration, the player wants to start a jackpot lottery game while the chance effect is being executed, and can continue the game.

  In the present embodiment, the status command determined by the main control device 110 is output. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be configured to execute the same processing as the processing to be performed. With this configuration, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to determine the result of determination of success or failure and the type of jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110. In such a case, by setting a dedicated variation pattern command for each of the types such as the jackpot A and the jackpot B, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can easily determine the jackpot type from the variation pattern command. Can be. Therefore, the number of commands output by main controller 110 can be reduced.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the prefetching and performs the prefetching effect across a plurality of fluctuations based on the result of the prefetching. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, after the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs the opening processing of the variable winning device 65 after the small win, before the variable winning device 65 opens, This is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that processing for hindering the operation is performed. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 98 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of the variable winning device 65 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. The variable prize device 65 has a rotating door 620 for rotating the front surface of the game board 13 by about 90 degrees to receive a game ball falling on the game board surface and taking the game ball into the variable prize device 65. And a plunger link 610 for rotating the rotating door 620 forward based on the operation of the solenoid 600 (209). The plunger link 610 has a shaft portion 610b, and is rotatably fixed inside the variable winning device 65.

  One end of the plunger link is fixed to the tip of the plunger 600a of the solenoid 600, and when the solenoid 600 is electrically operated and the plunger 600a is sucked, the plunger link 610 is rotated about the shaft 610b. . The plunger link 610 is provided with a locking portion 610a protruding toward the rotating door, and the rotation of the plunger link 610 releases the locking between the locking portion 610a and the rotating door 620. The pivot door 620 pivots 90 degrees toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by its own weight.

  As shown in the top view of a part of the inside of the variable winning device 65 in FIG. 99, the regulating solenoid 640 (209) is orthogonal to the solenoid 600 inside the variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment. It is provided as follows. The restricting solenoid 640 is a push-type solenoid, and has a configuration in which the plunger 640a projects forward when electrically operated. When the regulating solenoid 640 operates and the plunger 640a projects, it comes into contact with the plunger link 610 and regulates rotation of the plunger link 610.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 98, when the plunger link 610 rotates, the tip of the locking portion 610a is at the top of the locking recess 620b with the locking portion 610a provided on the back side of the rotating door 620. By rotating the rotating door 620 slightly toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in contact with the wall, the center of gravity of the rotating door 620 is shifted and the rotation of the rotating door 620 is started by its own weight. The time t required for the locking portion 610a to contact the upper wall of the locking recess 620b of the rotating door 620 is 50 ms.

  As will be described in detail later, at the time of the small win, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the small win and activates the solenoid 600 to execute the opening process of the variable winning device 65, and then, less than 50 ms. The control for operating the regulating solenoid 640 is executed. Thereby, when the variable winning device 65 is opened at the time of winning a small hit, it is possible to prevent a problem that the player can easily determine that the determined result of the winning is a small hit.

  In addition, in the case of setting the number of transition fluctuations at the time of winning a small hit, and performing an effect that makes a plurality of changes appear as one change, the opening operation of the variable entry saving device 65 by the small hitting wins, It is possible to suppress a problem that the player easily determines a plurality of fluctuations.

<Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment will be described only with respect to changes, and illustration and description of the same process will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 100, a description will be given of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment in that a special symbol change process (FIG. 17, S104) is special. It has been changed to the symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 101, S160). As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, a special symbol variation process 3 (S160), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. I do. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 3 (S160). In the special symbol change process 3 (FIG. 101, S160) in the seventh embodiment, the processes of S222 to S223 are added to the special symbol change process (FIG. 17, S104) in the first embodiment. The start process (FIG. 18, S208) is changed to the special symbol change start process 3 (FIG. 102, S240). Note that these processes from S222 to S223 are the same processes as S222 to S223 of the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140) in the fifth embodiment, and thus detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 102, a special symbol variation start process 3 (FIG. 101, S160) which is one of the special symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 101, S160) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 102, S240) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process 3 (S240). In the special symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 102, S240) in the seventh embodiment, each process from S340 to S342 is added to the special symbol variation process (FIG. 18, S208) in the first embodiment. . Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the lottery result of S304 or S305 is not a big hit (S306: No), the process of S340 is executed. In the process of S340, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the small hit determination value (S340). If it is determined that the small hit has occurred (S340: Yes), the display mode at the time of the small hit displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S341). Then, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit is determined (S342), and the process of S311 is executed.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In the main process (FIG. 103) according to the seventh embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1003) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 104, S1020) in comparison with the main process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. The object opening / closing process (S1005) has been changed to electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (S1040 in FIG. 106). As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 104, the jackpot control process 2 (S1020), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 103) in the seventh embodiment, will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1020).

  In the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 104, S1020), first, it is determined whether the start of the jackpot has been set in the process of S215 in the special symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 101, S160) (S1021). If it is determined that the start of the jackpot has been set (S1021: Yes), an opening command for notifying the sound ramp control device 113 of the start of the jackpot game is set (S1022).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the start of the jackpot has not been set (S1021: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being played (S1023). If it is determined that the game is not in the jackpot game (S1023: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit game is being played (S1023: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting a new round (S1024). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round game (S1024: Yes), the opening of the large opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is set (S1025).

  A round number command for outputting the number of newly opened rounds (the number of rounds of the jackpot game) to the audio ramp control device 113 is set (S1026). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1024 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1024: No), it is determined whether the condition for closing the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1027). In the present embodiment, in the big hit game, when ten game balls are won in the large opening 65a or when 30 seconds elapse after being opened, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1027: Yes), the closing of the large opening 65a is set (S1028).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1027, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65a is not satisfied (S1027: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1029). The ending effect is an effect of notifying the player of the end of the big hit game by voice or a display mode of the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing (S1029: Yes), an ending command for notifying the end of the big hit game is set to the audio ramp control device 113 (S1030).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1029, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1029: No), the small hit process is executed (S1031). After that, this processing ends.

  The small hit processing (S1031) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the small hit processing.

  In the small hit processing (FIG. 105, S1031), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit start is set in the processing of S223 in the special symbol change processing 3 (FIG. 101, S160) (S1101). If it is determined that the start of the small hit is set (S1101: Yes), and if it is determined that the start of the small hit is set (S1101: Yes), the start of the small hit game is indicated by an audio lamp. An opening command for notifying control device 113 is set (S1102).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the start of the small hit is not set (S1102: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit is being played (S1103). When it is determined that the small hitting game is not being performed (S1103: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit game is being performed (S1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting a new round (S1104). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round game (S1104: Yes), the opening of the large opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is set (S1105). Thereafter, the operation of the regulating solenoid 640 is set (S1106).

  As described above, after the solenoid 600 is set to open, the restricting solenoid is also set to operate, so that the restricting solenoid operates before the large opening port 65a is opened, and the plunger 640a rotates the plunger link 610. By moving to the restricting position, the opening of the large opening 65a is restricted. Therefore, even if the execution of the small hit is set, the turning door 620 does not turn, and the player can be less likely to notice that the small hit has been won than the operation of the turning door.

  A round number command for outputting the number of newly opened rounds (the number of rounds of the small hit game) to the sound ramp control device 113 is set (S1107). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1108). In the present embodiment, in the small hitting game, when ten game balls are won in the large opening 65a or when 0.5 second has passed since the opening, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the closing of the large opening 65a is set (S1109).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1108, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65a is not satisfied (S1108: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1111). The ending effect is an effect of notifying the player of the end of the small hitting game by voice or a display mode of the third symbol display device 81. Here, in the case of the small hitting game, the player is not notified of the small hitting, and a display such as a letter “notice effect display (in this embodiment,“ first time ”) is executed.

  If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1111: Yes), an ending command for notifying the end of the big hit game is set to the audio lamp control device 113 (S1112). After that, this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S1111 that it is not the ending effect start timing (S1111: No), the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, a description will be given of the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (S1040), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. . FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (S1040).

  In the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (FIG. 106, S1040), first, it is determined whether the large opening 65a is set to be opened (S1041). The setting for opening the large opening 65a is set in the processing of S1025 in the big hit control processing 2 (S1020 in FIG. 104) and the processing in S1106 in the small hit processing (S1031 in FIG. 105).

  When it is determined that the opening of the large opening 65a is set (S1041: Yes), the solenoid 600 of the large opening 65a is set to ON (S1042). On the other hand, it is determined whether the operation of the regulating solenoid 640 is set (S1043). The operation of the regulating solenoid 640 is set in the process of S1106 in the small hit process (FIG. 105, S1031). When it is determined that the operation of the regulating solenoid 640 is set (S1043: Yes), the regulating solenoid 640 is set to ON (S1044). Thereafter, this processing is ended.

  In the processing of S1041, when it is determined that the opening of the large opening 65a is not set (S1041: No), it is determined whether the closing of the large opening 65a is set (S1045). The closing of the large opening 65a is set in the process of S1028 in the big hit control process 2 (S1020 in FIG. 104) and the process in S1109 in the small hit process (S1031 in FIG. 105). When it is determined that the large opening 65a is closed (S1045: Yes), the solenoid 600 is set to off (S1046). Then, the control solenoid 640 is set to off (S1047), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1045 that the closing of the large opening 65a has not been set (S1045: No), this processing ends.

  As described above, when a small win is achieved, the regulating solenoid 640 is set to be turned on immediately after the process of turning on the solenoid 600 whose large opening 65a is opened. Here, it takes 50 ms from the start of the operation of the solenoid 600 to the start of the turning of the turning door 620, so that the turning of the turning door 620 is started. Before the plunger link 610 rotates, the tip of the plunger 640a of the restricting solenoid 640 can be moved to a position where the rotation of the plunger link 610 is restricted before the plunger link 610 rotates. Therefore, at the time of the small hit, although the large opening 65a is set to be opened, the large opening 65a is not opened, and it is difficult to recognize that the player has hit the small opening.

  Here, as shown in the fifth embodiment to the sixth embodiment, when an effect is made to show a plurality of fluctuations as if they are one fluctuation at the time of a small win, a plurality of fluctuations are preferably set. I want to make it difficult for the player to understand each break. Here, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, when a small hit is won, a small hit is set, but by restricting the rotation of the rotating door 620 so as not to rotate, the fluctuation of the small hit can be reduced. This can make it difficult for the player to understand something. Therefore, it is possible to make a plurality of fluctuations including the small hit appear as one fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, the round in which the large opening port 65a is opened is executed twice for the small hit for 0.5 second. By setting a big hit (two round big hit) of the same action and setting the type of the big hit which sets the probability of the success / failure judgment in the high probability game state (probable change game) in the subsequent game, the third symbol display By giving the same information (displayed in the same symbol) for the two rounds as the big hit and the small hit with the device 81, the player cannot distinguish between the small hit and the two round big hit. Here, furthermore, based on the two rounds of big hits, as in the case of the winning of the small hits, by performing the effect of causing a plurality of changes including the two rounds to appear as one change, the player can change the plurality of changes by one. By performing the effect shown, it is possible to have a higher expectation of the jackpot.

<Modification of Pachinko Machine 10 in Seventh Embodiment>
A modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the seventh embodiment, a regulating solenoid 640 is provided to prevent the opening operation of the turning door 620 of the variable winning device 65, thereby restricting the turning of the turning door 620. On the other hand, in the modification of the seventh embodiment, the variable winning device 65 does not have the regulating solenoid 640, and after the solenoid 600 of the variable winning device 65 is operated, the plunger link 610 opens the turning door 620. The seventh embodiment is different from the seventh embodiment in that the solenoid is de-energized and a process for restricting the opening is executed by the time until the operation is started (50 ms in the present embodiment). The other configuration is the same, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A small hit opening counter 203i is added to the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modification of the seventh embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the seventh embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The small hit opening counter 203i is a counter for measuring the time from the start of the opening operation of the solenoid 600 of the variable winning device 65 to the start of the closing operation of the variable winning device 65 based on the small hit winning. is there. In the small hit opening counter 203i, a counter value corresponding to a time of 20 ms is set in the processing of S1056 in the small hit processing 2 (S1050 in FIG. 108) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In addition, it is updated by being subtracted by 1 in the process of S1074 in the electric accessory opening / closing process 3 (FIG. 109, S1070) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

<Control Process of Main Control Device 110 in Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. A detailed description of the same processes as in the seventh embodiment will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 108, the small hitting process 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. The small hitting process 2 (FIG. 108, S1050) is a process executed instead of the small hitting process (FIG. 105, S1031) in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the small hit processing. The small hitting process 2 (S1050 in FIG. 108) according to the seventh embodiment is different from the small hitting process (S1031 in FIG. 105) in that the processes in S1105 and S1110 are deleted, and the process in S1056 is omitted. Has been added.

  When the processing of S1055 is executed, a counter value (5 in this embodiment) indicating 20 ms is set to the small hit release counter 203i (S1056). After that, the process of S1057 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a description will be given of the electric auditors product opening / closing process 3 (S1070) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modification of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening / closing process 3 (S1070).

  In the electric accessory opening / closing process 3 (FIG. 109, S1070), first, it is determined whether or not the large opening of the variable winning device 65 is set to be opened (S1071). If it is determined that opening of the large opening is set (S1071: Yes), the solenoid 600 with the large opening is set to ON (S1072). On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening of the large opening is not set (S1071: No), it is determined whether the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is greater than 0 (S1073). When it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is greater than 0 (S1073: Yes), the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is decremented by 1 (S1074). It is determined whether the value of the small hit release counter 203i is 0 (S1075).

  When it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is 0 (S1075: Yes), the solenoid 600 having the large opening is set to off (non-excitation) (S1076), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is 0 or less (S1073: No), or when it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is not 0 (S1075: No), The process of S1077 is executed.

  In the process of S1077, it is determined whether the large opening is set to be closed (S1077). When it is determined that the large opening is set to be closed (S1077: Yes), the solenoid 600 having the large opening is set to off (S1078).

  In this manner, when the small opening wins the large opening of the variable winning device 65, the opening is set to be opened twice for 0.5 seconds, but any opening causes the large opening to be opened. Before the door 620 starts rotating, the solenoid 600 is set to be non-excited, so that the opening of the large opening at the time of a small hit can be forcibly restricted.

  As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that the small hit has been won at the time of the small hit because the open mouth is opened to the player. Therefore, at the time of winning a small hit, by displaying the same combination of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 as in the case of the small hit, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit has been won.

  In addition, as described in the fifth and sixth embodiments, in a production in which a plurality of fluctuations including a small hit are made to appear as one change display mode, it is difficult to understand that the small hit has been won. , A plurality of variations can be shown to the player as if they were one variation.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. The command to be performed is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

  In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (ie, in use). ) May be provided in the image controller 237 so that the MPU 231 checks the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and the state of the resident It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when ending the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 checks the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether the scanning is in the blank period. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 to determine whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  In this case, in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since the image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. The image data not required to reside in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Note that the process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a main process loop executed by the MPU 231. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and Can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the respective video RAMs using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In a given address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM and each video RAM may be managed. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when specifying the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is sufficient to simply specify the address set in the common address system. The configuration of the instruction for performing the designation can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected between the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is by the NAND flash memory 234a. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Note that even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low readout speed, but by using the configuration described in the above embodiment of the display control device 114, an image can be displayed at a desired display time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The present invention is not limited to this. A first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. May be stored in the boot program. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored in an internal bus (bus line 240). , A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided therein. May store a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, it is determined whether the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Since the character ROM 234 is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be.

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified for the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b determines that the address is specified by the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from and read out to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thus, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. (Line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, each having image data corresponding to an image corresponding to various modes, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the character ROM 234 while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn. The process of writing the image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the possibility that drawing processing is delayed due to writing of image data can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM may be used as a resident area and a normal area. The area may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write processing. It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

  The type of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other external input, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is made resident. Preferably, it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten during power-on and the contents thereof are continuously held has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from the user, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion. Good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept stored in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave. Also, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and reads the read image data into the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during the unused period (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer instruction). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and is transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not being used (that is, during a period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three symbol display device 81. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receiving the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read out image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal at the time of power failure is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, before starting the transfer of the main image data at the time of power supply from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is checked. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. May be configured. In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the MPU 231 starts execution of the display main process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. In this case, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to reduce the time required to recover from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to an instantaneous stop or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be reduced, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently, and may be configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) that exchanges many data signals is provided. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the data transfer.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period (blank period) during which a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where an actual image is displayed, is scanned (blank period). The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. Thus, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while one area stores the image data read from the character ROM 234, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. And the time required for the processing can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. can do. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are turned on. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the power-on image from the character ROM 234 while displaying the power-on image. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying the main image, the reading of the image data from the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. Although the case of transferring the image data to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 235 is used. , The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a back image change command or a frame button operation command is generated by the audio lamp control device 113, and the back image change command or the frame button operation command is generated by the display control device 114. The case has been described where the back image or the super-reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed based on the operation command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with a change in the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thus, the display control device 114 can change the effect of the rear image or the super reach in accordance with the game state based on the rear image change command or the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image or the super-reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the combined data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image data of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error generation flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 38). The warning image setting process (refer to FIG. 39) may be executed when it is determined that the warning image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since the transmission and reception of the error command from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 are not required, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described. Is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of the magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command notifying an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When the display control device 113 receives an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when the display control device 114 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 Alternatively, the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and turning on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error. Thereby, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image which notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used as the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, an error message image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to immediately notify the magnetic field error. Can be deterred.

  When the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change a part or all of the color tones in one effect, the additional data table or the display data table uses the 1st symbol in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of the sprite after the change in the sprite are associated with the address corresponding to the address in which the time during which the image for the frame is displayed (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is defined as one unit. Color information specifying a color tone may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of the sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the changed color tone in the sprite. When the color information is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing content in the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  When the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying an image to be displayed in one effect is defined by a display data table, the display data table includes an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in correspondence with an address expressed as a unit (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds), and at that time, a sprite type to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed, and a new sprite type to be displayed. The drawing information of the sprite to be displayed may be defined. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 stores, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list instead of the sprite to be replaced. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table includes transfer data information of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be specified together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. When the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. May be configured.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used in accordance with the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing image drawing based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, The case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is described has been described.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in an additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined not only to include the additional drawing content but also to include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the additional drawing content. Good. With this, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed by using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be specified. In comparison with the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified, the load of the processing required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "change start-up", "high-speed change", "announcement effect", "normal reach", and "super reach". After specifying the elements required for the fluctuation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified fluctuation effect are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, a display common to each of the fluctuation patterns is performed for “change start”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like. Therefore, by making the fluctuation effects into elements and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, a case will be described in which the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for which the rendering process is completed (in the above embodiment, every 20 milliseconds). However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that an image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer on which the rendered image is to be rendered based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information developed first from the other frame buffer. Has been described, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, May be alternately selected, the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer, and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller 237 outputs a frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81. Frame buffer to be replaced.

  In the above embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 transmits the sound display control device 113 via the sound lamp controller 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, this may be configured so that the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, until one of the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, the final display effect is performed. Each time the process is completed, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue to display the final display effect until a fluctuation pattern command or a demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the back image and stop and display the third symbol including the main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first stores the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b and displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Can be immediately confirmed that the operation has started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. , A simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is desirably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the fluctuation display using the power-on fluctuation image can be performed more quickly.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the transfer at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  Also, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated by the sprite type itself, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be specified. The display control device 114 reads out the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Manage the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. It is no longer necessary to manage both the information specifying the character string and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233 instead. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and It is determined whether or not is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When a transfer instruction for image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. It is described whether the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is determined whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. The sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is necessary, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “back A” of the plurality of back images is made to reside in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of a rear image used in a part of the super reach may be made to reside in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the rear image of the super reach having high or expected appearance frequency resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Times can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data designated by the character string from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The MPU 231 describes information relating to the required sprite type in the table, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally read from the character ROM 234 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the image data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above embodiment, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled so fast that the player cannot visually recognize them is displayed. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise image y image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 performs the main control of the reserved ball number command each time the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is updated (that is, when the value is increased or decreased). Although the case where the signal is transmitted from the device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases in the main control device 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Thereby, the number of times that main control device 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the winning in the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Instead, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is changed by a number in the part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four by the reserved ball number. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81; The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined direction or a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, and a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and is not provided with a handle for launching a ball. Things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Also, some or all of the above-described embodiments and modifications may be combined and implemented.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described.

<Feature A group>
Main control means for performing game control, and slave control means for performing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, wherein the main control means Acquiring means for acquiring the first information, determining whether or not the first information obtained by the obtaining means determines whether or not the lottery game is appropriate based on the establishment of a lottery condition; A determination signal generation unit that generates a determination signal for notifying the slave control unit, a determination information storage unit that stores the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and a determination information storage unit that stores the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied. And a pre-authorization determination signal generation means for generating a pre-authorization determination signal based on the first information and notifying the sub-controlling means, wherein the sub-controlling means outputs an output from the main control means. Pass / fail judgment signal Display means for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the determination based on the determination, display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and establishment of the start condition based on the preliminary determination signal. A prior information storage means for storing prior information for each of the game machines, wherein the main control means dynamically stores a plurality of pieces of dynamic display information for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. Information storage means, dynamic display information determining means for determining one piece of dynamic display information based on the validity / non-permission determination result from the dynamic display information storage means, and the dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means. Dynamic display information signal generating means for generating a dynamic display information signal for notifying the secondary control means of dynamic display information, wherein the secondary control means outputs the dynamic display information signal output from the main control means. Information display A dynamic display mode selecting means for selecting a dynamic display mode, and a number of times the specific display mode relating to a game effect is displayed on the display module, based on the reception of the advance right / wrong determination signal. A gaming machine A1 comprising: a specific display count determining unit, wherein the specific display mode is displayed on the display unit over the dynamic display mode of the continuous lottery game.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in the main control unit that executes the control of the game, the first information is obtained by the obtaining unit based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition based on the first information acquired by the acquisition means, the success / failure determination means determines the success / failure of the lottery game. A hit / fail judgment signal for notifying the slave control means of the hit / fail judgment result of the hit / fail judgment means is generated by the hit / fail judgment signal generating means. Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the first information is stored in the determination information storage means. Before the lottery condition is satisfied, a preliminary success / failure determination signal based on the first information is generated by the preliminary success / failure determination signal generation means, and is notified to the slave control means. In the slave control unit that receives the control signal from the main control unit and controls the game, based on the match determination signal output from the main control unit, the identification information indicating the match determination result is displayed on the display unit. . The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means every time the starting condition is satisfied, based on the prior appropriateness determination signal. In the main control means, a plurality of dynamic display information for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means is stored in the dynamic display information storage means. One dynamic display information is determined by the dynamic display information determining means from the dynamic display information storage means based on the result of the determination. A dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control unit of the dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining unit is generated by the dynamic display information signal generating unit. In the slave control unit, the dynamic display mode is selected by the dynamic display mode selection unit based on the dynamic display information signal output from the main control unit. The number of times the specific display mode relating to the game is displayed on the display means is determined by the specific display number determination means based on the reception of the preliminary success / failure determination signal. The specific display mode is displayed on the display means over the dynamic display mode of the continuous lottery game. Thereby, the awareness of the identification information is reduced by the specific display mode, and it is possible to make a plurality of dynamic display modes appear as one dynamic display mode. Therefore, a novel effect can be shown to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that a disadvantage that the player gets tired of the game early can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub control means has a specific lottery means for executing a lottery of whether or not to display the specific display mode based on the reception of the preliminary success / failure determination signal, and The determining unit displays the specific display mode on the display unit when the determination of the specific display mode is determined by the specific lottery unit is less than the number of times the starting condition stored in the advance information storage unit is satisfied. The specific display mode corresponds to each of the first information stored in the advance information storage unit when the specific display number determination unit determines the number of times. The gaming machine A2, which is displayed once each time over the two consecutive dynamic display modes displayed by the game machine A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. In other words, in the secondary control means, the lottery of whether or not to display the specific display mode is executed by the specific lottery means based on the reception of the preliminary success / failure determination signal. When it is determined that the specific display mode is to be displayed by the specific lottery means, the number of times the specific display mode is displayed on the display means less than the number of times the start condition stored in the advance information storage means is satisfied is determined by the specific display number determination means. Is done. When the number of times is determined by the specific display number determination unit, the specific display mode is performed once over two consecutive dynamic display modes displayed in correspondence with the first information stored in the advance information storage unit. Is displayed. As a result, the dynamic display mode of the first information stored in the determination information storage means is displayed in a specific display mode from the end to the start of the dynamic display, and the plurality of dynamic display modes are displayed in one dynamic display mode. It can be shown to the player as if it were a target display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel effect can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine A2, the specific lottery means determines that the advance information indicated by the received advance right / wrong determination signal is determined to be a hit or is determined to be a hit in the prior information stored in the prior information storage means. Is stored, the probability of deciding to display the specific display mode is set high.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2. In other words, when the advance information indicated by the received advance / non-permission determination signal is determined to be a hit, or when the information determined to be a hit is stored in the advance information stored in the advance information storage unit, the specific display mode is changed. The probability of deciding to display is set higher by the specific lottery means. Thereby, when the specific display mode is displayed, it can be configured to easily become a big hit, and by displaying the specific display mode, the player can expect the big hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the number of times of displaying the specific display mode is determined by the specific display number determining means, and the dynamic display mode is started while the final specific display is being displayed. If the result of the determination as to whether or not the prior information is to be performed is out of date, and if there is the prior information determined to be a hit in the prior information storage means, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the prior information indicates the dynamic display. A gaming machine A4 comprising a number changing means for changing the number determined by the specific number-of-displays determining means so that the last specific display is displayed during the start.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A2 or A3. That is, the number of times the specific display mode is displayed is determined by the specific display number determination means, and the dynamic display is started while the final specific display is being displayed. If the result is out of order and there is prior information that is determined to be a hit in the prior information storage means, the specific display of the last time is not performed while the dynamic display mode corresponding to the prior information starts dynamic display. The number of times determined by the specific number-of-displays determining means is changed by the number changing means so as to be displayed. Thereby, when a game to be won is stored in the information stored in the advance information storage means, the dynamic display mode started while the last specific display mode is displayed is a hit. Since the number of times of the specific display mode is changed so as to achieve the dynamic display mode, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation of the jackpot by displaying the specific display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine A2 or the gaming machine A3, the main control unit acquires dynamic display determination information for determining the dynamic display information based on the establishment of the starting condition. Pre-dynamic display for generating a pre-dynamic display signal for notifying the sub-control means of pre-dynamic display information based on the dynamic display determination information obtained by the dynamic display determination information obtaining means. Signal generation means, and the slave control means, upon receiving the advance dynamic display signal, triggers the advance dynamic display information indicated by the advance dynamic display signal to the advance information. The specific display number determining means determines whether or not the dynamic display mode for starting the dynamic display while the final specific display is being displayed is based on the prior information. Hit or the pre-dynamic Gaming machine A5, wherein the last round of the dynamic display mode to determine from the shown information is what determines the number of specific display mode so that the particular dynamic display mode.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the dynamic display determination information obtaining means obtains the dynamic display determination information for determining the dynamic display information based on the establishment of the starting condition. A preliminary dynamic display signal generation unit generates a preliminary dynamic display signal for notifying the secondary control unit of preliminary dynamic display information based on the dynamic display determination information acquired by the dynamic display determination information acquisition unit. Is done. In the slave control means, upon receiving the advance dynamic display signal, the advance dynamic display information indicated by the advance dynamic display signal is stored in the advance information storage means. The dynamic display is started while the specific display of the last round is displayed. The result of the determination of the dynamic display mode is determined based on the advance information. The number of specific display modes is determined by the specific notice frequency determining means so that the mode becomes the specific dynamic display mode. Thereby, when the specific display mode is displayed, the final dynamic display mode in which the specific display mode is displayed is a jackpot or the specific dynamic display mode, so that the player performs an effect different from the normal time. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that when the specific display mode is displayed, the player can be expected to execute the final dynamic display mode.

  The gaming machine A6 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, wherein the specific display mode is displayed so as to hide the identification information in an area where the identification information is displayed.

  According to any of the gaming machines A6, in addition to the effect of playing any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a specific display mode is displayed in a region where the identification information is displayed so as to hide the identification information. Is difficult for the player to understand that the result is displayed, and it is possible to show the player a continuous lottery game as if it were one lottery game.

  A gaming machine A7 having delay display means for delaying the dynamic display of the identification information after the specific display mode is displayed in any of the gaming machines A1 to A6.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, after the specific display mode is displayed, the dynamic display of the identification information is delayed by the delay display means. There is an effect that the display control with the information does not overlap and the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A6, the display control unit dynamically displays the identification information on the display unit at a low speed for a certain period of time, and then dynamically displays the identification information at a high speed. The gaming machine A8, which is displayed longer than the predetermined period of the subsequent lottery game among the continuous lottery games.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A6. That is, after the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means at a low speed for a certain period, the identification information is dynamically displayed at a high speed by the display control means. Since the consecutive lottery games are displayed longer than a certain period of the subsequent lottery game, the effect that two consecutive lottery games can be shown to the player as if they are one lottery game is obtained. is there.

<Characteristic B group>
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game judgment unit for executing game judgment, a display unit displaying identification information indicating the judgment result of the game judgment unit, and dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit Display control means, storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means, and one dynamic display from the storage means based on the judgment result. A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a mode, wherein the plurality of dynamic display modes include a periodical dynamic display mode in which a display period for displaying a specific display mode relating to a game is set in advance. When the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period. , It was established A display control unit configured to display the specific display mode on the display unit when the display mode is different; and a switching unit configured to switch a dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed to an alternative dynamic display mode. A gaming machine B1 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B1, based on the establishment of the start condition, the game determination is made by the game determination unit. The identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the display unit. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. A plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are stored in the storage means. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the result of the determination from the storage unit. The plurality of dynamic display modes include a periodical dynamic display mode in which a display period for displaying a specific display mode related to a game is set in advance. When the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period, and the display is performed when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. The specific display mode is displayed on the means on the front side of the identification information by the specific display control means. The dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed is switched to the alternative dynamic display mode by the switching unit. Thereby, different effects can be displayed to the player depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied during the notice display period. Therefore, when the specific display mode is displayed, the subsequent dynamic display mode is also switched, so that the player can perform an effect with freshness. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  The gaming machine B2 has operating means operable by a player, and the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operating means has been operated. .

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operating means operable by the player has been operated. Is established, and the player can be more actively involved in the game.

  The gaming machine B3, wherein in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the specific display mode is to notify a player of the number of times displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, in the specific display mode, the number of times the predetermined display condition is satisfied during the display period is notified to the player as the specific display mode. This has the effect that the player can easily identify the number of times of the specific display mode, and can easily play the game.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the storage means stores at least a plurality of the timed dynamic display modes having different numbers or periods of the display periods, and the dynamic display mode determining means stores When the fixed-period dynamic display mode is determined, a display period is set based on the first display period set in the determined fixed-period dynamic display mode, and the predetermined period is set in the display period. A game machine B4 having a display period setting means for setting the next valid period when the condition (1) is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effect is achieved in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3. That is, a plurality of fixed-period dynamic display modes having at least different numbers of display periods or different periods are stored in the storage means. When one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the display period is set based on the first display period set for the determined dynamic display mode. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the display period, the next valid period is set by the display period setting means. Thus, even when a plurality of display periods are set, the first display period may be set at the start of the dynamic display, and the control load at the start of the dynamic display can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be prevented from being concentrated.

<Characteristic C group>
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game judgment unit for executing game judgment, a display unit displaying identification information indicating the judgment result of the game judgment unit, and dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit Display control means, storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means, and one dynamic display from the storage means based on the result of the determination. And a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a mode, wherein the plurality of dynamic display modes include a special dynamic display mode set to be able to display a specific display mode relating to the game. The special dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, and when the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. On the basis of the A display control unit configured to display the specific display mode on the display unit; and a switching unit configured to switch a dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed to an alternative dynamic display mode. Gaming machine C1 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine C1, a determination as to whether or not a game is performed is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the starting condition. The identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit. The identification information is displayed on the display means by the display control means. A plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are stored in the storage means. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the result of the determination from the storage unit. A plurality of dynamic display modes include a special dynamic display mode that is set to be able to display a specific display mode relating to a game. When the special dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the determination that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific display mode is determined. Is displayed on the display means by the specific display control means. The dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed is switched to the alternative dynamic display mode by the switching unit. Thus, even when the same special dynamic display mode is determined, the display timing of the specific display varies depending on the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the timing of switching to the alternative dynamic display mode is also variable, so that the player can be shown as if the dynamic display mode is different each time. Therefore, there is an effect that various game effects can be shown to the player.

  The gaming machine C2 includes operating means operable by a player, and the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operating means has been operated. .

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operating means operable by the player has been operated. Is established, and the player can be more actively involved in the game.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the remaining time determining means for determining the remaining dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode, and the remaining time is shorter than the predetermined time by the remaining time determining means. And a disabling means for setting the satisfaction of the predetermined condition to invalid when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the remaining dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode is determined by the remaining time determination unit. If the remaining time determination unit determines that the remaining time is equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is set to invalid by the invalidation unit. Accordingly, the specific display is displayed during the period in which the result of the determination of the success / failure in the dynamic display mode is confirmed and the problem that the player cannot know the result of the success / failure determination can be suppressed.

<Feature D group>
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game judgment unit for executing game judgment, a display unit displaying identification information indicating the judgment result of the game judgment unit, and dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit Display control means, storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means, and one dynamic display from the storage means based on the result of the determination. And a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a mode, wherein the plurality of dynamic display modes include a special dynamic display mode set to be able to display a specific display mode relating to the game. Are included, an operating means operable by the player, an operation determining means for determining that the operating means has been operated by the player, and a determination that the operating means has been operated by the operation determining means. Counting means for counting the number of times, and when the special dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, it is determined by the operation determining means that the operating means has been operated, and based on the count value of the counting means. A specific display control means for displaying the specific display mode when the display permission condition determined by the determination is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D1, based on the establishment of the starting condition, the determination as to whether or not the game is performed is performed by the determination unit. The identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. A plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are stored in the storage means. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the result of the determination from the storage unit. A plurality of dynamic display modes include a special dynamic display mode set so that a specific display mode relating to a game can be displayed up to a predetermined number of times. The operation determining means determines that the player has operated the operating means operable by the player. The number of times is counted by the counting means based on that the operation determining means determines that the operating means has been operated. When the special dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, it is determined that the operation means has been operated by the operation determination means, and when the count value of the counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the specific display mode is changed to the specific display control means. Is displayed on the display means. As a result, even if the operating means is operated, the specific display mode is not displayed unless the operation is performed a predetermined number of times or more, and the effect can be changed depending on the player's playing style and frequency. Therefore, even if the dynamic display mode is the same, it can be seen as different dynamic display modes depending on the player, and various effects can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early getting tired of the game.

  In the gaming machine D1, the display permission condition is determined based on a count value of the counting means and a set number of the specific display mode set in the special dynamic display mode. Gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the display permission condition is determined based on the count value of the counting means and the set number of the specific display mode set in the special dynamic display mode, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1. There is an effect that the display permission condition of the specific display mode can be changed by the special dynamic display mode.

  The gaming machine D3, wherein in the gaming machine D1 or D2, the display permission condition is set for each number of times the specific display mode set in the special dynamic display mode is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the display permission condition is set for each number of times the specific display mode set in the special dynamic display mode is displayed. There is an effect that the specific display mode can be displayed under different conditions for each number of times that is displayed.

<Feature E group>
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, a first hit that is advantageous to the player and a second hit that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. A display unit that displays identification information indicating a result of the determination, a display control unit that dynamically displays the identification information on the display unit, and a dynamic display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the display control unit. Storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display mode groups, and dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode based on the result of the determination from the storage section. In the gaming machine in which a lottery game is executed based on a lottery result by the determination means, the plurality of dynamic display mode groups include a specific dynamic display mode having a continuous dynamic display mode corresponding to a plurality of lottery games. Flock included A lottery game in which a dynamic display mode of a lottery game that is continuously executed after the lottery game is determined from the specific dynamic display mode group based on the result of the determination of the first hit. The continuous dynamic display mode has a display mode that is continuous with the dynamic display mode of the lottery game before the continuous dynamic display mode is displayed. A gaming machine E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, based on the establishment of the starting condition, at least the hit determination unit determines whether the first hit which is more advantageous to the player and the second hit which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. Is done. The identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the display unit. The display control means displays the identification information on the display means. A plurality of dynamic display mode groups having a dynamic display mode of identification information dynamically displayed by the display control unit are stored by the storage unit. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the result of the determination from the storage unit. Then, the lottery game is executed based on the determination result of the lottery game. The plurality of dynamic display mode groups include a specific dynamic display mode group having a continuous dynamic display mode corresponding to a plurality of lottery games. The number of times of the lottery game that determines the dynamic display mode of the lottery game to be continuously executed after the lottery game from the specific dynamic display mode group based on the determination of the first hit by the hit / fail determination means It is set by the setting means. The continuous dynamic display mode is configured by a display mode that is continuous with the dynamic display mode of the lottery game before the continuous dynamic display mode is displayed. Thereby, by winning the first hit, a plurality of lottery games can be made to appear as if they are one lottery game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine E1, in the continuous dynamic display mode, a display period for displaying a specific display mode related to a game is set in advance, and the dynamic display mode determining means determines the continuous dynamic display mode. When the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in the display period, and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific display control means for displaying the specific display mode on the display means is provided. A gaming machine E2, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, the display period in which the specific display mode relating to the game is displayed is set in advance to the continuous dynamic display mode. The continuous dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit, and when the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period. The specific display mode is displayed by the specific display control means. Therefore, when the continuous dynamic display mode is displayed, the specific display mode is displayed by satisfying the predetermined condition, so that an effect different from that in the normal state can be given to the player.

  In the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, the continuous dynamic display mode group includes a first continuous dynamic display mode configured in a dynamic display mode from the start of the dynamic display mode to during dynamic display; A second interlocked dynamic display mode in which the displayed state is continued, and a third continuous dynamic display mode composed of a dynamic display mode from the dynamically displayed state until the dynamic display is stopped and displayed. At least, the first continuous dynamic display mode, the second continuous dynamic display mode, and the third continuous mode from the continuous dynamic display mode group corresponding to the number of times set by the transition set number setting unit. The gaming machine E3, wherein any one of the dynamic display modes is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, in the continuous dynamic display mode group, the first continuous dynamic display mode includes a dynamic display mode from the start of the dynamic display mode to during the dynamic display. In the second continuous dynamic display mode, the state of dynamic display is continued. The third continuous dynamic display mode includes a dynamic display mode from a state in which the dynamic display is performed until the dynamic display is stopped and displayed. The first continuous dynamic display mode, the second continuous dynamic display mode, and the third continuous dynamic display mode are selected from the continuous dynamic display mode group according to the number of times set by the transition set number setting unit. Either one is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. This makes it possible to easily set a display mode that is continuous with the display mode of the previous lottery game. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a dynamic display mode of a plurality of lottery games as if it were a dynamic display mode of a single lottery game. Therefore, even when the lottery game as the result of the misappropriation determination that the game is missed is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to show the player as if the missed lottery game was performed once, and the player is disappointed with the game. There is an effect that the number of times can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, before the number of lottery games set by the number-of-transitions setting means is executed, based on the determination made by the second hit and the success / failure determination means. A gaming machine E4 comprising reset means for resetting the number of times set by the number-of-transitions setting means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3. That is, before the lottery game of the number set by the number-of-transitions setting means is executed, the number set by the number-of-transitions setting means is used by the resetting means based on the result determined by the second hit and the success / failure determination means. Reset. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a problem that the continuous dynamic display mode is continuously executed even after the jackpot game is started before the lottery game set by the number-of-transitions setting unit is performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the number of times up to the jackpot lottery game, and it is possible to show the player a plurality of changes as if it were a single change which becomes a jackpot.

<Feature F>
Main control means for performing control of the game; and sub-control means for performing control of the game based on a control signal from the main control means. Acquiring means for acquiring the first information, and a first win in which a first privilege game which is advantageous to the player is given based on establishment of a lottery condition from the first information acquired by the acquiring means. A hit / fail judgment means for judging at least a second hit to which a second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is given, and a hit / fail judgment result of the hit / judgment determining means to the slave control means, Applicability judgment information generating means for generating applicability judgment information for notifying the user of the identifiability, judgment information storage means for storing the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and before the lottery condition is satisfied, In the first information A different dynamic display information group composed of prior information generating means for generating the prior information to be generated and notifying the slave control means and dynamic display information for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. A plurality of stored dynamic display information storage means, and one dynamic display information group among the plurality of dynamic display information groups is determined by the dynamic display information storage means based on the satisfaction of the lottery condition. A dynamic display information determining unit that determines one of the dynamic display information from the determined dynamic display information group according to the result of the determination of the validity and the first information; Dynamic display notification information generating means for generating dynamic display notification information for notifying the dynamic control information determined by the sub control means to the sub control means. Pass / fail judgment output from control means Display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination based on the information, display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and display means corresponding to the dynamic display information of the main control means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information is displayed on the basis of the dynamic display notification information output from the main control unit and the dynamic display mode of the identification information. Dynamic display mode selection means selected from the mode storage means, and prior information storage means for storing prior information each time the starting condition is satisfied, based on prior information received from the main control means, In the gaming machine on which the lottery game is executed based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the plurality of dynamic display information groups may include the plurality of dynamic display information groups, the timing being determined by the success / failure judging means to be a winning in the first hit. dynamic The specific dynamic display information group including the specific dynamic display information determined by the display information determining means is included. The dynamic display mode storage means of the slave control means stores the specific dynamic display information Corresponding to the display information, a specific dynamic display mode capable of displaying a specific display mode on the display unit based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition is stored. The number of transitions for setting the number of lottery games that determines the dynamic display mode of the lottery game to be continuously executed after the lottery game from the specific dynamic display information group based on the determination of the first hit. Setting means, wherein the slave control means sets the number of times set by the number-of-transitions setting means of the main control means based on the first hit determined by the hit / fail determination means of the main control means. Transition times to determine Discriminating means, and each of the specific dynamic displays determined from the specific dynamic display information group according to the prior information stored in the prior information storage means corresponding to the number of times determined by the number-of-transitions determining means A pre-specified dynamic display mode that determines information before the lottery condition is satisfied and determines the specific dynamic display mode selected by the dynamic display mode selection unit according to the determined specific dynamic display information. Determining means, and remaining time determining means for determining the remaining time until the specific dynamic display mode selected in the last lottery game is completed in dynamic display among the times determined by the shift number determining means; And determining an upper limit number of times to display the specific display mode through all the specific dynamic display modes selected in accordance with the number of lottery games determined by the transfer number determination unit. Fixed display number determination means, alternative dynamic display mode storage means storing an alternative dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information in place of the specific dynamic display mode, and the specific display number determination section An alternative dynamic display mode that selects the alternative dynamic display mode based on the fact that the remaining time determined by the remaining time determination means is equal to or longer than a predetermined time when the specific display mode is displayed up to the set upper limit number of times A gaming machine F1 comprising: display mode selecting means.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in the main control means for controlling the game, the first information is obtained by the obtaining means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition based on the first information obtained by the obtaining means, a first win in which a first privilege game which is advantageous to the player is provided and a second win which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The second hit to which the bonus game is awarded is determined at least by the hit determination unit. Based on the control signal from the main control unit, the result of the determination by the determination unit is determined based on a control signal from the main control unit. Generated. Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the first information is stored by the determination information storage means. Prior to the lottery condition being established, prior information based on the first information is generated by the prior information generating means and notified to the slave control means. A plurality of different dynamic display information groups each including dynamic display information for dynamically displaying identification information on the display unit are stored by the dynamic display information storage unit. Based on the lottery condition being satisfied, one of the plurality of dynamic display information groups is determined from the dynamic display information group by the dynamic display information storage means. One of the dynamic display information is determined by the dynamic display information determining means according to the determination result and the first information. Dynamic display notification information for notifying the secondary control unit of the dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining unit is generated by the dynamic display notification information generating unit. On the other hand, in the slave control means, the display means displays identification information indicating the result of the judgment based on the judgment information output from the main control means. The display information is displayed and controlled by the display control means on the display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information corresponding to the dynamic display information of the main control unit is stored by the dynamic display mode storage unit. The dynamic display mode of the identification information is selected by the dynamic display mode selection unit from the dynamic display mode storage unit based on the dynamic display notification information output from the main control unit. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means every time the starting condition is satisfied based on the prior information received from the main control means. The specific dynamic display information group composed of the specific dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means triggered by the determination of the first win by the hit / fail determination means is a plurality of dynamic display information. Included in the group. A specific dynamic display mode corresponding to the specific dynamic display information and capable of displaying the specific display mode on the display unit based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition is stored in the dynamic display mode storage unit of the slave control unit. The main control means determines a dynamic display mode of the lottery game to be continuously executed after the lottery game from the specific dynamic display information group based on the determination of the first hit by the hit / fail determination means. The number of games is set by the transition number setting means. In the sub-control means, the number of times set by the number-of-transitions setting means of the main control means is determined by the number-of-transitions determination means based on the first hit determined by the hit / fail determination means of the main control means. Each specific dynamic display information determined from the specific dynamic display information group according to the advance information stored in the advance information storage means corresponding to the number of times determined by the number-of-transitions determination means is determined before the lottery condition is satisfied. Then, the specific dynamic display mode selected by the dynamic display mode selection unit according to the determined specific dynamic display information is determined by the pre-specific dynamic display mode determination unit. The remaining time until the specific dynamic display mode selected in the final lottery game is completed in the dynamic display is determined by the remaining time determining means. The upper limit number of times of displaying the specific display mode through all the specific dynamic display modes selected in accordance with the number of lottery games determined by the number-of-transitions determination section is determined by the specific display number determination section. An alternative dynamic display mode storing means for dynamically displaying the identification information instead of the specific dynamic display mode is stored by the alternative dynamic display mode storage means. When the specific display mode is displayed up to the upper limit number determined by the specific display number determination unit, the alternative dynamic display mode is replaced based on the fact that the remaining time determined by the remaining time determination unit is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. It is selected by the dynamic display mode selection means. Thus, after the specific display mode up to the upper limit number of times is displayed, the dynamic display mode can be changed to a display mode that matches the remaining time. Therefore, it is possible to provide a dynamic display mode that is different depending on the timing at which the specific display is performed up to the upper limit number of times to the player, and it is possible to diversify the dynamic display mode provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine F1, the number-of-transitions setting means is configured to be able to set the number of transitions equal to or more than the number of the first information stored in the determination information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the number of transitions equal to or more than the number of the first information stored in the determination information storage means can be set by the number-of-transitions setting means. It is possible to cause the player to perform a lottery game in a specific dynamic display mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine F1 or the gaming machine F2, the alternative dynamic display mode storage unit stores a plurality of alternative dynamic display modes having different dynamic display times, and the alternative dynamic display mode selection unit stores the plurality of alternative dynamic display mode selection units. The gaming machine F3, wherein the alternative dynamic display mode is selected from among the alternative dynamic display modes, which is configured with the dynamic display time closest to the remaining time.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F1 or the gaming machine F2. That is, a plurality of alternative dynamic display modes having different dynamic display times are stored by the alternative dynamic display mode storage unit. Among the plurality of alternative dynamic display modes, the alternative dynamic display mode configured with the dynamic display time closest to the remaining time is selected by the alternative dynamic display mode selection means. Therefore, since the dynamic display mode is displayed in accordance with the remaining time, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the identification information is composed of a plurality of identification symbols, and the alternative dynamic display mode includes the remaining one of the identification information indicating the second hit. A gaming machine F4 including a device that displays a reach display mode in which only a dynamic display is performed.

  According to the gaming machine F4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3. That is, the identification information is composed of a plurality of identification symbols. Among the identification information indicating the second hit, information indicating a reach display mode in which only the remaining one identification symbol is dynamically displayed is included in the alternative dynamic display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can expect the second hit to be achieved by displaying the alternative dynamic display mode.

  In the gaming machine F4, the alternative dynamic display mode starts the dynamic display of the identification information from the state of the reach display mode.

<Feature G>
A variable winning device that can be changed between a first state in which game media can be won and a second state in which game media are more difficult to win than the first state, and the start of a lottery game based on the game medium winning. A start winning device that satisfies a condition, and a first win in which a first privilege game that is advantageous to a player is given by changing the variable winning device to the first state based on the satisfaction of the start condition. A right / left determination unit that determines at least whether or not a second win in which a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first win is awarded is provided, and a display unit that displays identification information indicating a result of the determination by the right / left determination unit. And performing variable processing for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state based on the display of the identification information indicating the first hit or the second hit. Variable After the variable process is executed by the control unit and the variable control executing unit in the case of the first hit, before the variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state. And a restricting means for restricting the variable winning device from changing to the first state.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the variable winning device changes the first state in which the game medium can be won and the second state in which the game medium is more difficult to win than the first state. The starting condition of the lottery game is established based on the winning of the game medium to the variable winning device. Based on the establishment of the starting condition, the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the first bonus game which is advantageous to the player is given, and the second win which is more advantageous to the player than the first win is given. The second hit to which the bonus game is awarded is determined at least by the hit determination unit. The identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the display unit. Based on the display of the identification information indicating the first hit or the second hit, the variable control executing means executes variable processing for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state. In the case of the first hit, after the variable processing is executed by the variable control executing means, before the variable winning device changes from the second state to the first state, the variable winning device changes to the first state. Is regulated by the regulation means. This restricts the variable winning device from changing to the first state in the case of the first hit, so that it is possible to suppress a disadvantage that the first privilege game is more advantageous than the second privilege game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the second privilege game, and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine G1, the variable winning device includes: a winning opening in which a game medium wins; a regulation position in which the gaming medium wins in the winning opening in the second state; A movable piece movable to a guiding position for guiding a game medium to the winning opening; and a movable means for moving the movable piece after a predetermined time of operation after the variable processing is performed by the variable control performing means. The gaming machine G2, wherein the regulation means executes a regulation process within the predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in the second state, the regulation position for restricting the game medium from winning to the winning opening of the variable winning device in which the game medium wins, and in the first state, the game medium is guided to the winning opening. The movable piece of the movable winning device that is movable at the guidance position to be provided is provided. Further, the movable piece is moved by the movable means after a predetermined time operation from the execution of the variable processing by the variable control executing means. The process of regulating within a predetermined time is executed by the regulating means. Therefore, in the first hit, the movable piece can be restricted from moving before the variable winning device enters the first state, so that the first privilege game is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game. This has the effect of preventing inconvenience.

  In the gaming machine G1, the variable winning device includes: a winning opening in which a game medium wins; a regulation position in which the gaming medium wins in the winning opening in the second state; A movable piece movable to a guiding position for guiding the game medium to the winning opening; a movable means for moving the movable piece based on execution of the variable processing by the variable control executing means; and A gaming machine G3 comprising: a regulating member movable unit that moves the regulating member to a position that regulates the movement of the movable piece based on the execution of the regulating process.

  According to the gaming machine G3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1. That is, in the variable winning device, in the second state, the regulation position for restricting the game medium from winning to the winning opening where the game medium wins, and in the first state, the guiding position for guiding the game medium to the winning opening. The movable piece is moved. The movable piece is moved by the movable means based on the execution of the variable processing by the variable control execution means. Based on the execution of the restricting process from the restricting means, the restricting member is moved to the position for restricting the movement of the movable piece by the restricting member moving means. Thus, before the variable winning device enters the first state, the movement of the movable piece can be regulated by the regulating member. Therefore, there is an effect that the disadvantage that the first privilege game is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game can be prevented more reliably.

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through a winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Sound ramp control device (part of slave control means)
114 Display control device (part of display control means)
202 ROM (dynamic display information storage means)
203a Special symbol holding ball storage area (judgment information storage means)
222 ROM (dynamic display mode storage unit, alternative dynamic display mode storage unit)
223a Prior information storage means S306 Applicability determination means S327, S331, S333 Dynamic display information determination means S329 Transfer count setting means S338 Dynamic display notification information generation means S312 Applicability determination information generation means S406 Acquisition means S432, S434, S436, S437 Pass / fail determination information generation means S1611 specific display number determination means S2074 transition number determination means S2251 advance specific dynamic display mode determination means S2262 remaining time determination section S2264 specific display number determination means S2268 alternative dynamic display mode selection means S2301 dynamic display mode selection means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, it performs a lottery with the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the change production and directing those of or in accordance with the lottery result, pachinko machine to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen is known. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. .

In such a pachinko machine or the like , a gaming machine has been proposed that, in advance of a plurality of fluctuations, performs a continuous announcement display to notify in advance that a specific effect such as a reach fluctuation effect is to be performed in a subsequent fluctuation effect. I have.

JP 2010-279560 A

In this kind of pachinko machine and the like , there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further enhances interest in the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine that can be improved interest in the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein an acquisition unit for acquiring first information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, and a determination that the first information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored. Information storage means, determination means for determining the first information stored in the determination information storage means, and the first information stored in the determination information storage means before being determined by the determination means A pre-determination unit that performs a pre-determination based on the pre-determination unit; a prior-information storage unit that stores prior information indicating a pre-determination result by the pre-determination unit each time the acquisition condition is satisfied; Display means for displaying the identification information; display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and a plurality of dynamic display modes for a judgment game for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. Dynamic display mode storage means for storing a dynamic display mode; dynamic display mode determination means for determining one dynamic display mode based on the determination result from the dynamic display mode storage means; Based on the prior information stored in the previous information storage means, a specific display number determining means for determining the number of times the specific display mode is displayed on the display means, and determining whether or not to display the specific display mode. Specific determination means for executing based on the prior information, the specific display number determination means, when it is determined by the specific determination means to display the specific display mode, the prior information storage means Determining the number of times that the specific display mode is displayed on the display means less than the number of times the acquisition condition corresponding to the advance information stored in the display unit is satisfied. When the number is determined by the above, the identification information is displayed over two consecutive dynamic display modes displayed corresponding to the respective first information stored in the determination information storage means. The special display information corresponding to the identification information is displayed in a display mode different from the identification information during a period in which the specific display mode is displayed. The specific display mode is configured to be able to be displayed in an area where the specific display mode is not displayed in a smaller size .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, an acquisition unit that acquires first information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, and a determination information storage unit that stores the first information acquired by the acquisition unit; Determining means for determining the first information stored in the determination information storage means; and performing a preliminary determination based on the first information stored in the determination information storage means before the determination by the determination means. A prior determination unit to be executed, a prior information storage unit that stores prior information indicating a result of the preliminary determination by the prior determination unit each time the acquisition condition is satisfied, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination unit are displayed. Display means, display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a plurality of dynamic display modes as a dynamic display mode for a determination game for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. Dynamic display mode storing means, a dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode based on the determination result from the dynamic display mode storing means, and storing in the prior information storing means Based on the obtained prior information, a specific display number determining unit that determines the number of times the specific display mode is displayed on the display unit, and determine whether or not to display the specific display mode based on the prior information. The specific display number determining means is configured to execute the specific display mode when the specific display mode is determined to be displayed by the specific determining means. The number of times that the specific display mode is displayed on the display means is determined less than the number of times the acquisition condition corresponding to the previous information is satisfied. A display area in which the identification information is displayed over two continuous dynamic display modes displayed in correspondence with the respective first information stored in the determination information storage means when the identification information is set. The special identification information corresponding to the identification information is displayed in a display mode different from the identification information in a period smaller than the identification information during a period in which the specific display mode is displayed. The specific display mode is configured to be displayed in an area where the specific display mode is not displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter C2 and a big hit type in a special symbol, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a second hit random number counter C4 and a hit in a normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship typically, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the look-ahead effect lottery table 1, and (d) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the look-ahead effect lottery table 2. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a look-ahead count lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a look-ahead effect selection table, and (c) is an effect content command selection table. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the preview data table 1, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the preview data table 2, and (c) is a schematic diagram of the preview data table 2. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a data table 3. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of the pre-reading notice 1 displayed on the third symbol display device, and (b) is a view of a display mode of the pre-reading notice 2 displayed on the third symbol display device. It is a figure showing an example, and (c) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of pre-reading notice 3 displayed on a 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a timing chart showing the timing at which the prefetching advance notice display mode is displayed when the number of prefetching advance notices is four, and (b) is a timing chart showing the timing when the prefetching advance notice mode is three. 5 is a timing chart showing the displayed timing. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the look-ahead effect selection process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the look-ahead effect lottery process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display prefetch command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a notice frequency selection table according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a SW scenario table according to the second embodiment. It is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the effect selection table 1 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the effect selection table 2 in the second embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special figure variation 1 which is an example of a variation pattern in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation pattern in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the contents of figure fluctuation 2, and (c) is the figure which showed typically the contents of special figure fluctuation 3 which is an example of the fluctuation pattern in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of the special figure fluctuation | variation 4 which is an example of the fluctuation pattern in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a special figure which is an example of the fluctuation pattern in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a fluctuation 5. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a preview data table 1 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a preview data table 2 in the second embodiment. FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a preview data table 3 according to the second embodiment. It is the model which showed typically an example of the notice data table 4 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows start winning processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect selection process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a notice frequency selection table 2 in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the SW scenario table 2 in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the effect selection table 3 in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production lottery process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed command judgment processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect selection processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect selection process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a status selection table in the fifth embodiment. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of status information according to the fifth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a small hit exclusive change pattern in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a small hit exclusive change pattern selection table (status B) in the fifth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example, and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the small hit only fluctuation pattern selection table (status C) in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a small hit-only variation pattern selection table (status D) in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a small hit-only variation pattern selection in the fifth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the table (status E) typically. It is a timing chart of the fluctuation display when the number of transition fluctuations in the fifth embodiment is three. (A1) and (a2) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of variation 1 when the number of transition variations in the fifth embodiment is three, and (b1) and (b2) are diagrams of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a variation 2 when the number of transition variations in is three, and (c1- (A)) and (c1- (B)) show that the number of transition variations in the fifth embodiment is FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of a fluctuation 3 in the case of three times. (C2) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a variation 3 when the number of transition variations is three in the fifth embodiment, where (d1- (A)), (d1- (B)), and (d1). d2) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a variation 3 when the number of transition variations is three in the fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the status shift processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed variable display setting processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart of variable display in the case of no alternative variable display in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart of variable display in the case of alternative variable display in the sixth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a small hit-only variation pattern table in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a small hit-only variation pattern selection table (status B) in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the small hit variation pattern selection table (status C) according to the sixth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a small hit exclusive change pattern selection table (status D) in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a small hit exclusive change pattern selection in the sixth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the table (status E) typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of an effect time setting table according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a maximum effect number determination table according to the sixth embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram, (c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically an example of an alternative variation pattern table in a 6th embodiment, and (d) is a mimetic diagram of an example of an alternative production lottery table in a 6th embodiment. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows start winning processing 3 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch lottery process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed main processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the prefetching effect lottery process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed a status command receiving processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed alternative production lottery processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a sectional view of a variable winning device in a 7th embodiment. It is a top view showing a part of the inside of the variable winning device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 3 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the modification of a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a modification of a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric auditors product opening / closing process 3 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 7th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is set to ON, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the distance, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first symbol) is selected when the ball passes through the second entrance 67. Lottery). In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance opening 64, the winning or non-judgment of the special symbol jackpot is performed, and if the special symbol jackpot is determined, the type of the jackpot is determined. Is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) Release and the release is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of jackpot types for special symbols: "jackpot A" and "jackpot B". After the special game state ends, as a value added after the end of the jackpot, a game corresponding to these jackpot types is performed. (Game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the variation of the special symbol, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds), The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed in the first symbol display. This is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. Note that a special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, it is determined whether the symbol is a hit or not. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. State. In other words, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the first entry opening 64, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is increased to the first symbol display device 37. , And also at the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, as the jackpot types of the special symbols, two types of “jackpot A” and “jackpot B” are provided.

  In the case of "big hit A" and "big hit B", both are in the special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit), and then, as the added value after the big hit is "big hit A", the next big hit is Until that time, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a special symbol high probability state (special symbol is being changed). On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", the time of the ordinary symbol is reduced until the lottery is executed (until the change of the special symbol is started) 100 times after the end of the big hit.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (special symbol is being changed). In other words, the special game state (16R jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is referred to as the special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol probability state, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (medium symbol time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state", which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during normal time. .

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the probable change period of the special symbol are common, and according to the type of the jackpot, `` the time reduction of the ordinary symbol '' The period of “state” is changed. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Also, for example, instead of changing the period during which the “normal symbol time saving state” is set according to the type of the jackpot, a time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 or one time The number of times the electric accessory is opened at the time of the normal symbol may be changed. Also, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol time reduction state” are set, but after the “special symbol high probability state” ends, the “normal symbol time reduction state” ".

  In the pachinko machine 10, when an initial setting is performed by turning on a power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “low probability state of special symbol”. Thereafter, when the special symbol hits, the state shifts to the “special symbol high probability state” and to the “normal symbol time reduction state”.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by displaying a lighting state to indicate whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64, is performed, or the variation is performed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a change is not executed among the balls inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the first entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four times, but three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) if the jackpot is a jackpot. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), the display of the special symbol (first symbol) is changed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with the trigger as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the special symbol lottery result is "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. In the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each retained ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when a ball passes through the second entrance 67, is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (a second symbol) according to a lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67, a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" are alternately lit as the second symbol. A variable display is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 for a predetermined time. It is configured so as to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball easily enters the first entrance hole 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the plurality of lamps on and off in the second symbol display device 83, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of passing balls at the second entrance 67 is three or less, or five or more. (For example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Pre-reading production>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entrance 64 and various counters have been acquired for the reserved ball of the special symbol, various types of information (whether or not, type of stop, , Fluctuation patterns) are determined (read ahead) in advance. When the pre-reading is completed, a prize information command (big hit prize command or out-of-prize prize command) including various information (acceptance, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-read is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute a prefetch effect.

  Here, the pre-reading effect will be described. As shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), the pre-reading effect is a notice effect that is executed across the fluctuation of the special symbol (third symbol). As the contents of the notice effect, characters indicating the number of prefetch effects are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIGS. At that time, the background color of the character is selected and displayed by lottery (one of blue, yellow, and red).

  Specifically, a case where four times are selected in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 13A will be described as an example. A look-ahead is executed for a reserved ball stored in the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the MPU 201 of the MPU 201, and a prefetch effect is provided for a winning information command based on the look-ahead. When it is determined to execute, when the prefetching effect is determined four times, a prefetching effect as shown in FIG. 13A is executed across the variation from the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the prefetching effect in which the number of prefetching effects is four, variation 1 (fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved first area) and variation 2 (fluctuation in the reserved second area) 12 (a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a prefetch effect of the first notice, which is the first prefetch effect. This notice display is displayed before the fluctuation of the special symbol (third symbol) in the fluctuation of the fluctuation 1 stops (while it is fluctuating). During this period (in this embodiment, the notice display time is 3 seconds).

  Next, between the fluctuation 2 and the fluctuation 3 (the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved third area), the "second time" shown in FIG. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This notice display is displayed before the change of the special symbol (third symbol) of the change 2 stops (while changing), and the special symbol of the change 3 starts to change as in the first notice display. Even if the timing comes, it is displayed for a while (in this embodiment, the notice display time is 3 seconds).

  After that, between the fluctuation 3 and the fluctuation 4 (the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved fourth area), as the look-ahead effect of the notice 3 which is the third look-ahead effect, the “third time” shown in FIG. The character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This notice display is displayed before the change of the special symbol of the variation 3 (the third symbol) stops (while it is changing), and the special symbol of the variation 4 is displayed in the same manner as the first and second notice displays. Even when the timing to start the fluctuation is displayed, the display is performed for a while (in this embodiment, the notice display time is 3 seconds). At the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, if the special symbol is hidden by the display of the notice effect, a small “小 さ い” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a substitute for the special symbol (the third symbol). It is displayed and blinks, for example, green and white during the change, and when the special symbol stops, it is stopped and displayed in white to indicate the departure.

  In this way, in the look-ahead effect, the stop display of the special symbol is hidden by the notice until the final number of the look-ahead effect, and the next variable display is started. You can make it appear as if you are continuing. Therefore, it is possible to show the fluctuation effect without clearly showing the change of the deviation to the player, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is disappointed by the deviation.

  Further, the specific notice display mode (corresponding to notices 1 to 3) displayed in the look-ahead effect is, as shown in the detailed view of FIG. The display is started when or shortly before switching from the state of the high-speed fluctuation period in which the symbols are variably displayed to the state of the low-speed fluctuation period in which the symbols are displayed at a low speed. Then, the period during which the symbol is fixed and stopped is also displayed, and the next fluctuation display is started, and is continuously displayed during the low-speed fluctuation period of the fluctuation. Notice 2 and notice 3 have the same configuration.

  This allows a plurality of variations to appear as if one variation were being displayed much faster. Therefore, it is possible to make a plurality of changes appear as one change.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol is hidden in the specific notice display mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The third symbol is displayed in one corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 during the period in which the specific notice display mode is displayed. For example, the design may be configured such that the design is reduced to a small size or the design is fluctuated and displayed as a temporary design (for example, “「 ”,“ × ”, etc.).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the third symbol is configured to be hidden during the period in which the specific notice display mode is displayed, but the start timing of the variable display of the third symbol may be delayed. . In this case, the fluctuation display of the third symbol may be started at a high speed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load for controlling the display of the third symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the details will be described later, since the last fluctuation of the look-ahead effect is configured to be a super reach or a jackpot reach, a notice effect of the look-ahead effect is displayed to the player. This will increase your expectations for jackpots. Therefore, the player can play the game with expectation that the pre-reading effect will not be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Also, since the look-ahead effect is displayed at a timing before the timing of the stop of the design of the change, the player does not perform the look-ahead effect at the start of the change, as compared with the case where the look-ahead effect is performed at the start of the change. The disadvantage of being disappointed early can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, even when the third symbol is hidden by displaying the notice effect, an alternative symbol (“「 ”in the present embodiment) is displayed. It can be confirmed by the design. Here, since the alternative symbol is configured to be displayed smaller than the normal symbol, it is difficult to identify the alternative special symbol. Therefore, the player who wants to know the stop timing of the special symbol can be informed, and for the player who wants to play according to the production of the game, it is difficult to understand the stop timing of the special symbol as the design effect. Thus, it is possible to show an effect as if one change is performed in all the number of prefetching effects.

  In the present embodiment, the change of the special symbol is hidden by the notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol is stopped at a chance such as “3”, “4” or “1”. May be. Further, the special symbol may be displayed in another symbol different from the normal symbol (for example, a character of a girl character or a character such as a chance).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the pre-reading effect, all the notice effects are configured to straddle two fluctuations. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured. With such a configuration, various announcement effects can be performed. Furthermore, the notice effect may be configured to be different depending on the result of the right / wrong judgment of the last look-ahead effect (for example, when the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the notice effect across fluctuations is likely to be selected). With this configuration, it is possible to easily determine the result of the determination as to whether or not the information is valid based on the mode of the announcement effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of prefetch effects is configured to be selected by lottery. However, when a jackpot winning command is received, a greater number of prefetch effects is configured to be selected. Is also good. By configuring in this way, a larger number of advance notice effects are displayed, so that the player can expect higher jackpots.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

<Electrical configuration of main controller 110>
The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in synchronization with the timing of entering the ball 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to a special value. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the big hit set by the symbol big hit random number table, it decides that it is the big hit of the special design. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used when the special symbol has a low probability (the period when the special symbol is in the low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot from the low probability (the special symbol) ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the special symbol high probability and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the special symbol low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first one The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are three random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value "7, 107, 282" is a special symbol for the low probability. It is stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of the random numbers is three and the total number of the random numbers to be the big hit is three, so the probability of the big hit of the special symbol is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are thirty random numbers which are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the value is “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Is stored in As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300 and the total number of jackpot random numbers is 30, so the probability of the special symbol jackpot is "1/10".

  In this embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, and the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time Therefore, a random number value for each jackpot is set so as not to be a duplicate value. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a big hit is changed depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot to be predicted, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 7A, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 59” is “big hit A”. When the value is “60 to 99”, the big hit type is “big hit B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hits (big hits A and big hits B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random number value for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random number value) is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99) and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., in the range of 90-97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than before and after the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random value) is set in a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of the random number value set for each type of stop according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In this table, the "reach out of front and rear" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front and rear out" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select "reach out of front and rear" or "reach other than front and rear out". In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a small low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, the reach display with a long effect time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-reach reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). It is acquired at the timing when a game ball enters the first entrance hole 64 and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 24) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (not shown) storing a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. I have.

  In the variation pattern table, for example, “variation (for a long time)”, “variation (for a short time)”, “variable normal reach”, “variable super reach”, “variable special reach” as variation patterns for the deviation. Various types are defined, and as the variation patterns of the jackpot A and the jackpot B, various types of “shared normal reach”, various types of “shared super reach”, and various types of “shared special reach” are defined. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being performed, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is set by a random number table per normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the normal symbol. When the value matches the value of the random number which is a win set by the win random number table, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, the random number table per ordinary symbol is used when the ordinary symbol has a low probability (the period in which the ordinary symbol is in the normal state) and when the ordinary symbol has a higher probability of being hit by the ordinary symbol than when the ordinary symbol has a low probability. And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of them are set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 24 out of 240 in the total number of random numbers, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has the low probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 6, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 24), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 23). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When NMI is input to the terminal, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and It has a counter 203e and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Of the vacant areas of the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are changed to the execution area. Is shifted (moved), and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball opening 64, and as soon as the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained in accordance with the starting winning, the original special symbol is obtained. Apart from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the respective counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various types of data obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each counter value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the winning start. Predicting the information will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to pass / fail, stop type, change pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts a winning / failure, a stop type, and a variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

  In addition, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the winning / failing determination result (the result of the pre-reading determination) determined in S407 of the start winning process (S106 in FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 described later is also held. It is stored in each of the first to fourth areas.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding area). Of the vacant areas in the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored as in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases by 1 to a maximum value of four. It is added (see S404 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 17).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 17 and S405 in FIG. 19). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d counts the number of waiting balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. The counter counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S704 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 20).

  If the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67 and the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, the second random number per hit The value of the counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. It is not performed (S703 in FIG. 21: No).

  The time reduction counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203e during time reduction is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203e is set to zero, and the main control device 110 performs a lottery of a special symbol and sets a value according to the type of the big hit each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Is done. In other words, when a special symbol hits, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is newly set regardless of the value of the time-saving medium time counter 203e.

  Specifically, if it is determined that the “big hit B” is set, it is set to 100 (see S214 in FIG. 17). Thereafter, until the value of the counter 203e during working hours is reduced to 0, 1 is subtracted each time the fluctuation effect of the special symbol ends (S217 in FIG. 17).

  When the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter 203e during time saving is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the random number table for the normal symbol for the high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203e during time saving is 0, the lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for the low probability time (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 20).

  The other memory area 203z is an area in which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores various other flags and data necessary for controlling the pachinko machine 10.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the sphere launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the sphere according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the sphere control is instructed by the main control device 110. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores control programs necessary for various controls, various data, and the like. As a part thereof, a prefetching effect lottery table 222a, a prefetching number lottery table 222b, a prefetching effect selection table 222c, and an effect content command selection table 222d are respectively set.

  The prefetch effect lottery table 222a is a data table for determining whether a prefetch effect is present or not. The look-ahead effect lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 7C and the look-ahead effect lottery table 2 shown in FIG. The look-ahead effect lottery table 222a is a data table used for performing a lottery with and without a look-ahead effect. When it is determined that the big hit determination flag 223e is ON in the process of S1603 of the look-ahead effect lottery process (S1412 in FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the look-ahead effect lottery table 2 is selected. A lottery of a pre-reading effect is performed (S1604 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot determination flag 223e is off, the prefetch effect lottery table 1 is selected, and the prefetch effect lottery is performed (S1605 in FIG. 29). In the present embodiment, the value of the effect counter 223h for selecting the presence of the prefetch effect is set larger in the prefetch effect lottery table 2, and the value of the effect of the prefetch effect is set to be easily selected. Therefore, when the jackpot winning command is received, the prefetching effect is easily executed.

  The look-ahead number lottery table 222b is a data table for determining the number of look-ahead effects as shown in FIG. FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the look-ahead count lottery table 222b. In the look-ahead number lottery table 222b, the number of look-ahead effects is selected based on the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the effect counter 223h. Note that the upper limit is set to the value of the number of reserved balls, and the number of times of the pre-reading effect is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the look-ahead effect selection table 222c stores the look-ahead effect of the look-ahead effect on the basis of the variation pattern of the special symbol at the last time of the look-ahead effect (special figure variation 1 to 5) and the value of the look-ahead effect counter. It is a data table for deciding a notice effect (effects 1-3). FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the prefetching effect selection table 222c. In addition, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in which the pre-reading effect is executed is simplified and shown as special figure fluctuations 1 to 5. Actually, one of the effects 1 to 3 is assigned to each variation pattern. Also, the announcement effect is not limited to the effects 1 to 3, but may be set as appropriate.

  As the notice effect of the prefetch effect, effects such as those shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C are respectively displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, in the announcement effect of effect 1, characters indicating the number of times of the look-ahead effect (the value of the look-ahead effect counter) shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C are displayed, and the background color is blue. Is displayed. Similarly, in the announcement effect of effect 2, characters indicating the number of times of the prefetch effect (the value of the prefetch effect counter) shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C are displayed, and the background color is displayed in yellow. You. In the announcement effect of effect 3, characters indicating the number of times of the prefetch effect (the value of the prefetch effect counter) shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C are displayed, and the background color is displayed in red.

  As described above, the notice display modes (effects 1 to 3) selected for each of the number of times of the pre-reading effect are set for the fluctuation pattern. By setting it to be selected, it is possible to give the player the expectation of a jackpot in the background color by setting the red background color so that it is difficult to select it for the variation pattern (super reach) that is out of range. it can.

  In addition, if the number of pre-reading effects is large and the success / failure judgment of the variation pattern is a big hit, a setting is made so that a large red background color is selected. If so, a large number of effects 3 are set, and for an out-of-order fluctuation pattern, when the value of the effect counter is 3, the effect 1 or the effect 2 is set to be selected more than the effect 3). Thus, as the notice of the pre-reading effect increases, the effect of giving the player the expectation of the jackpot can be performed.

  The effect content command selection table 222d is used to select a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the type of the notice effect of the pre-reading effect (no effect or effect 1 to 3) as shown in FIG. It is a data table. Specifically, in the look-ahead effect selection table 222c, if no effect is selected, the command “90h00h” is selected, and if effect 1 is selected, the command “90h01h” is selected, and effect 2 is selected. For example, if the command “90h02h” is selected, and if the effect 3 is selected, the command “90h03h” is selected.

  If the first look-ahead effect is the first look-ahead effect (the value of the look-ahead counter in the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f is 1), the first time of the 90h01h command is added to the 90h11h display look-ahead command. Command is set. At this time, if it is the second time, the command of 90h01h is set as the display look-ahead command of 90h21h. Similarly, if it is the third time, the command of 90h01h is set as the display look-ahead command of 90h31h. The display look-ahead commands for the effects 2 and 3 are set in the same manner.

  In the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a big hit determination flag 223e, and a prefetch effect counter At least a storage area 223f, a prefetch number counter storage area 223g, an effect counter 223h, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. A counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1409 in FIG. 27). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is set to ON when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 27), and when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. It is set to off (see S1702 in FIG. 30). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is set to ON when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 27), and when the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. Is set to off (see S1607 in FIG. 30).

  The jackpot determination flag 223e is a flag indicating that a jackpot winning command whose jackpot determination result is a jackpot has been received from the main control device 110. The big hit determination flag 223e is set to ON in the process of S1411 of the command determination process (S1312 in FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is set to OFF in the process of S1413. When the jackpot winning command is received, the jackpot flag 223e is set to ON, and in the prefetching effect lottery process (S1412 in FIG. 29) to be described later, if the jackpot flag 223e is ON, the prefetching is performed. The look-ahead effect lottery table 222a for which the determination is easy to select is selected. Note that the big hit determination flag 223e is a flag that is set to be off in the initial setting when the power is turned on.

  The prefetch effect counter storage area 223f is a storage area in which the value of the prefetch effect counter is stored. The pre-reading effect counter is incremented by 1 when the pre-reading effect is set in the pre-reading effect selecting process (S1403 in FIG. 28, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the pre-reading effect is added. It is stored in the counter storage area 223f. The look-ahead effect counter is initially set to 0, and is incremented by one up to an upper limit of four.

  The prefetch number counter storage area 223g is a storage area in which the number of prefetch effects is stored. In the process of S1611 of the look-ahead effect lottery process (S1412 in FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the number of times of the look-ahead effect acquired from the look-ahead number lottery table 222b is stored.

  The effect counter 223h is a counter value that is used when an effect of a notice is given, when the presence / absence of a prefetch effect is selected from the prefetch effect lottery table 222a, and when the number of prefetch effects is selected from the prefetch number lottery table 222b. The effect counter 223h is a counter value that is incremented and updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. It is repeatedly updated in the range up to the value 99. The effect counter 223d is a counter value that is set to 0, which is an initial value, when a power failure occurs.

  The RAM 223 further has another storage area 223z for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 30) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Directing). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electrical configuration of display control device 114>
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are read from the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a long time from the address designation to the data output in reading the first page of data, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start up the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 31) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S1801 in FIG. 32) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 13) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  When drawing an image using nonresident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 31).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first to generate a power-on main image (in the present embodiment, Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the “X” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", display the "○" image for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if it is "special symbol loss", display the "x" image after stopping the variable effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user must wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the "O" and "X" images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the power is turned on. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 each time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect stopped. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the received error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and for each sub-area, the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the character ROM 234, image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 to image data required for subsequent image rendering, from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame for the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image of one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the third symbol display device 81 can display the read image of one frame.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect A display data table corresponding to an ending effect and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The ending effect informs the player of the end of the special game state and informs the player of the game value (usually a short period of time of the symbol) given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or the special symbol held. Is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light in the image are defined as one frame of rendering content defined corresponding to each address. For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by this back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. The identification is performed based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the immediately preceding variable effect stopped symbol is switched to the offset information of the variable effect stopped symbol performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numeral of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the numeral. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 10) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is used to add An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

<Notification data table for pre-reading effects>
Next, details of the notice data table will be described with reference to FIG. Notice data tables 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C are notice data tables for displaying the notice effects of the look-ahead effects shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C.

  More specifically, the advance notice data table 1 shown in FIG. 11A displays the “first time” display shown in FIG. It is an advance notice data table instructing to display for 1.5 seconds before the stop of the change of the special symbol during the change (from 3 seconds before the stop). The notice data table 2 shown in FIG. 11B indicates that the “second time” display shown in FIG. 12B is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined number of seconds (in this embodiment, It is an advance notice data table instructing to display during a period of 1.5 seconds before the stop of the change of the special symbol to 3 seconds. The notice data table 3 shown in FIG. 11C indicates that the display of “third time” shown in FIG. It is an advance notice data table instructing to display during a period of 1.5 seconds before the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol (3 seconds).

  In the preview data tables 1 to 3, various data necessary for the preview display are set, similarly to the display data table. The preview data tables 1 to 3 select the preview data tables based on the display prefetch command based on the fact that the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has received the display prefetch command. Actually, the notice data tables 1 to 3 are composed of three kinds of notice data tables 1 to 3 of effects 1 to 3 having different background colors. That is, even in the preview data table 1, the preview data table 1 having a blue background (corresponding to the effect 1), the preview data table 1 having a yellow background (corresponding to the effect 2), and a red background (corresponding to the effect 3). Notice data table 1). The notice data table 2 and the notice data table 3 are similarly set.

  The notice data table selected based on the display prefetch command is set in the notice data table buffer 233k of the display control device 114. Then, the image data designated by the set notice display data table is read from the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 by the image controller 237 and stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Further, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the time data set in the notice display data table, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing set in the notice data table. Note that the notice display mode displayed in the notice data table is set so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in preference to the display mode specified in the display data table.

  As a result, when the notice data table is set, the notice display mode is displayed 1.5 seconds before the stop timing of the change of the special symbol during the change display, and the display data table is set for 3 seconds thereafter. The displayed display mode is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the preview display mode set in the preview data table is displayed. Therefore, the stop display of the special symbol can be hidden in the notice display mode, and even if the start of the change of the special symbol based on the next hold starts, the notice display mode is displayed for 1.5 seconds, so that the next change The display mode of the start of the change can be hidden by the notice display mode, so that the player can see even two changes as one change. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to notice that the notification has been made, and the player can be shown up to the last change of the prefetching effect. As a result, since the last round of the look-ahead effect is configured in a manner of a super-reach or a jackpot variation, the player can enjoy the notice display mode and expect and enjoy the variation of the final round as a jackpot. it can.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 14 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 12 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 14, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to start the transfer at that time is acquired, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display, on the third symbol display device 81, the characters “Initial setting” which is an image at power-on (a main image at power-on and a fluctuation image at power-on). It is a flag. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1805 in FIG. 31). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 41B).

  This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 33B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 33B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 33B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 33 (b) (see S2109). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 38 to 40) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 41A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 41B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later, which describes the contents of an instruction to draw an image, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 15) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 15) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 33 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 40) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 13), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite based on the transfer data table is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol (not shown), notice display 1-3 of prefetching effect) The detailed information corresponding to the sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side. Accordingly, when any of the preview data tables 1 to 3 is set, the corresponding preview display mode in FIGS. Displayed on the front side. Therefore, the notice display mode can be displayed on the entire display area of the third symbol display device 81 so as to hide the special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, an image corresponding to the preview data table is set at the end of the drawing list, so that the preview display mode is displayed on the foreground side. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When an image is set, only the image based on the preview data table may be set in the drawing list. With this configuration, the process of creating the drawing list can be simplified, and the control load can be reduced.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 33B Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3008 in FIG. 38). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 231. Is In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 42). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 42). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter, referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 43).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 33B) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 of FIG. 43).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the second entrance 67 with a through gate. The processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the command of the number of reserved balls is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined in accordance with the value of the first random number counter C1. Is determined to be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S211). If the result of the lottery is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), it is determined what the jackpot type is among the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A and jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type is determined. If is the big hit A, the setting related to the big hit A is executed (S213). In the setting relating to the jackpot A, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the probability change jackpot are set (S213). In the case of the jackpot B, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the number of time savings (100 in the present embodiment) are set (S214). Then, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S215), and the present process ends.

  In the processing of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S216). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203e is equal to or greater than 1 (S216: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203e during the working hours is 0 (S216: No), the process of S221 is skipped, and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the special symbol change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is an execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the first and second symbols, the lottery of the "special symbol jackpot" or "missing the special symbol" is determined (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform the lottery. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (a change effect pattern) of a change effect to be performed.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the current game state is a high probability state (probable change) (S302). If the game is in the high-probability game state (S302: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability (S304).

  In the process of S304, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 30 random number values stored in the special symbol large hit random number table for high probability. As described above, the random number value to be a special symbol jackpot is “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168”. , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the If the random numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S306.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if the gaming state is the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S302: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the low probability probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained is acquired (S305). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with three random number values stored in the special symbol large random number table for low probability. Three random numbers of “7, 107, 282” are set as the random numbers for the special symbol big hit, and when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the random numbers of these hits. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S306.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery of the special symbol obtained by the processing of S304 or S305 is a special symbol jackpot (S306). The display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) (S307). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S308). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of S308, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and a symbol variation such as a normal reach or a super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from a variation pattern table (not shown). Determine the variation pattern (variation time). The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by the variation pattern table.

  For example, as the variation patterns for the departure, “departure”, various types of “normal departure”, various types of “departure of super reach”, and various types of “departure of special reach” are defined. Variation patterns for jackpot A include various types of "probably variable jackpot normal reach", various types of "variable jackpot super reach", and various types of "variable jackpot special reach". , "Normal jackpot super reach" and "Normal jackpot special reach" are specified.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S309). In the processing of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off-design.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined from a variation pattern table (not shown) (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. (Fluctuation time) is determined.

  When the process of S308 or the process of S310 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S308 or S310 is set (S311). A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (stop type at the time of a big hit) is set (S312). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 24). You. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and if there is a start win, it is determined. This is a process for executing a hold process of the values indicated by the various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-balls command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S405, the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process are updated. Each value is stored in the first area of the free symbol storage area 203a of the special symbol storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (first storage area to fourth storage area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. After that, the process of S407 is performed.

  In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in S406 is determined to be a big hit at the start of the change. Whether the game state at the start of the change is the high-probability game state or the low-probability game state is determined from the determination result of the reserved ball stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the determination of the hitting or not is made. This is performed in advance (pre-read determination of the result of the determination of success or failure). In the process of S407, not only the hit / failed determination result but also the stop type and the variation pattern are determined and stored in the corresponding reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  If it is determined in the process of S407 that it is a jackpot (S407: Yes), a jackpot winning command, which is a type of the winning information command, is set based on the stop type and the variation pattern (S408). Here, for example, if the jackpot A is a super reach, a jackpot winning command corresponding thereto is set. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S402 that the pattern is out of range (S407: No), it is determined whether the variation pattern is super reach (S409). In the processing of S409, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is super reach (S409: Yes), an off-reach winning command, which is a type of winning information command, is set (S409). On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is different from the super reach (S409: No), an out-of-prize winning command, which is a type of the winning information command, is set (S411).

  When the winning information command is set, it is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83 and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 are performed. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of suspended display of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the during-hours counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time reduction counter 203e is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203e during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

  When the value of the counter 203e during the working hours is equal to or greater than 1 (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent a ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, the first entrance 64 is prevented from entering the ball during the special symbol jackpot. Many balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 7B).

  In the processing of S608, when the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the processing shifts to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 is Based on the random number table for ordinary symbols for probabilities, a lottery result is determined as to whether or not the symbol is a regular symbol (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 7B).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “と し て” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is hit at this moment. It is determined whether or not it is (S615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory associated with the set 64 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the processing shifts to S619.

  In the processing of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S619). If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The change time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203e during the working hours is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). Note that the variable time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S620 or S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the end, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or S618.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S624). If the result of this lottery is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S624: No), the processing of S625 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 16), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed at the second entrance 67, and if a ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspending it.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display is held in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, referring to FIG. 23, a description will be given of a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 when power is applied to main control device 110. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is set to ON (S904). If the switch is set to ON (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. Move to. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S912.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S912 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. If the data has been backed up in the RAM 203 (S907: Yes), the power-off information is cleared (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command for the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 17) and the start winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the ordinary symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display updating process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the variation symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Also, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the ordinary symbol change start process (see FIG. 20), the process is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20). Display (lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the processing of S1008, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 22 has been executed, the process at S1012 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

<Control Process Executed by MPU 221 of Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 25, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1318 (see FIG. 26). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, when receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 26), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1318. Before the power-off processing is performed, the power-off processing flag is set to ON, and after the power-off processing ends, the power-off processing flag is set to OFF. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1318 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the current startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure and the power-off processing in S1318. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up processing is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1318 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is set to ON (S1208). The power-off flag is set to ON when the power-off process is performed in S1318 (see S1317 in FIG. 26). In other words, the power-off flag is set to on before the power-off processing in S1318 is executed, so that the processing in step S1208 with the power-off flag set to on is the same as that in the current startup processing. This is a case where the process is started after a momentary power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag set to OFF is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, via the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is the case where the process of S1208 has been reached, or the process has been started only without resetting the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process skips S1209, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1210, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1210), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1211), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1209 is skipped is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is performed via the process of S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processes in S1302 to S1310 are mainly related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process in S1312, the command determination process in S1311, and the process of updating the counter values in S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1311 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307), an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect corresponding to. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. Also, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1310), and the flow shifts to the processing in S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process (S1312), a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform the variation effect. . As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1315 (S1313: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1315), and the power-off processing is executed (S1316). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1317), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Also, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1314), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1314: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1311), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is sent from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1401). If the variation pattern command has been received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1402). Next, a prefetch effect selection process is performed (S1403). The look-ahead effect selection process (S1403) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 28. Then, a process of setting a display look-ahead command based on the determination is executed.

  After S1403 is executed, a variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1404), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 30) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 30) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol) Is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409). In the process of S1409, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S1409, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn. Is detected or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol retaining ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S1409 to the special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main controller 110. 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1409 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1408, when the command of the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1408: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning command has been received (S1410). If it is determined that the jackpot winning command has been received (S1410: Yes), the jackpot determination flag 223e is set to ON (S1411). After that, a prefetching effect lottery process is executed (S1412). This prefetching effect lottery process (S1412) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 29. The process of determining whether or not the item is determined by lottery is executed. After the prefetching effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1412) is executed, the big hit determination flag 223e is set to OFF (S1413).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1410, when it is determined that the jackpot winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not the miss reach winning command has been received (S1414). When it is determined that the out-of-reach reach winning command has been received (S1414: Yes), a prefetching effect lottery process is executed (S1412). After that, the process of S1413 is performed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1414, when it is determined that the off-reach prize winning command has not been received (S1414: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is performed. Is executed (S1415), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the pre-reading effect selection process (S1403), which is one process of the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the prefetch effect selection process (S1403).

  In the pre-reading effect selection process (S1403), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern determined to have been received by the sound lamp control device 113 is a large hit variation pattern (S1501). When it is determined that the pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (S1501: Yes), the prefetch effect counter and the prefetch frequency counter are both initialized and set (S1502). Although not shown, when the process of S1502 is executed, the setting is made without a prefetch effect. After that, this processing ends. In this manner, if the change is a jackpot, the look-ahead effect is not set, and the look-ahead effect counter and the look-ahead count counter are set so that the look-ahead effect is not executed until the subsequent change is set to the presence of the look-ahead effect again. Initialized and set without prefetching. Thereby, in the change of the big hit, the notice display mode of the look-ahead effect is displayed from the timing of 1.5 seconds before the special symbol stops changing, and the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the player. It is possible to prevent a problem that is not notified by the special symbol to be notified.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of determining whether the variation pattern received by the voice lamp control device 113 is out of the range (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the prefetch effect is set. Whether or not the prefetch effect is set is determined based on whether the prefetch effect flag is set to ON in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. The look-ahead effect flag is set to ON in the process of S1610 of the look-ahead effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1412) described later.

  In the process of S1503, when it is determined that the prefetch effect is not set (the prefetch effect flag is off) (S1503: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the prefetch effect is set (S1503: Yes), the prefetch effect counter is incremented by 1 and stored in the prefetch effect counter storage area 223f (S1504). The prefetch effect is acquired based on the prefetch effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 8B) and the value of the prefetch counter stored in the prefetch effect counter storage area 223f. Here, for example, if the fluctuation pattern received by the sound lamp control device 113 is the fluctuation pattern indicating the special figure fluctuation 1 and the value of the look-ahead counter is 1, the look-ahead effect of the effect 1 (the background color is blue) is selected. You. Based on the value of the selected pre-reading effect, a display pre-reading command to which the number of times is given is selected (set) from the effect content command selection table 222d (S1506).

  Here, if the look-ahead effect of the effect 1 has been selected in the processing of S1505, and the first look-ahead effect (the value of the look-ahead counter in the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f is 1), the first time of the 90h01h command is added to the 90h01h command. And a display prefetch command of 90h11h is set. At this time, if it is the second time, the command of 90h01h is set as the display look-ahead command of 90h21h. Similarly, if it is the third time, the command of 90h01h is set as the display look-ahead command of 90h31h. The display look-ahead commands for the effects 2 and 3 are set in the same manner.

  Therefore, when the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives the display prefetch command from the sound lamp control device 113, the notice display mode of the prefetch effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display prefetch command is the number of times. It is possible to determine whether or not the display is an advance notice display, and select and set an advance notice data table corresponding to the background colors of the effects 1 to 3.

  After the processing of S1506 is performed, it is determined whether the value of the look-ahead counter in the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f is the same as the value of the look-ahead counter stored (set) in the look-ahead counter storage area 223g. (S1507). When it is determined that the value of the look-ahead effect counter and the value of the look-ahead counter are the same (S1507: Yes), the look-ahead effect flag in the other storage area 223z is set to off, and the look-ahead effect is set to no. The initial value 0 is set in the prefetch number counter storage area 223g (the prefetch number counter is initialized). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the prefetch effect counter is different from the value of the prefetch number counter (S1507: No), the process ends.

  As described above, when the execution of the prefetch effect is set, the display prefetch command is set so that a notice display (number display) of the prefetch effect based on the number of times is displayed. Further, the background color is selected from the look-ahead effect selection table 222c according to the selected variation pattern. Here, from the look-ahead effect selection table 222c, the content of the effect selected according to the type of the variation pattern of the last look-ahead effect is configured to change. More specifically, the effect 3 having a red background color is more easily selected as the variation pattern has a longer variation time. Further, the shorter the fluctuation time is, the easier it is to select a blue or yellow background color. Further, when a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected, the effect 3 with a red background color is easily selected even when the number of prefetch effects is small (the value of the prefetch effect counter is small). .

  Note that the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time has a lot of success / failure determination results set to the winning special reach or the like. Therefore, when the effect 3 with the red background color is displayed, the player is in an early stage (the first time or the second time). The game can be played in expectation that the special reach of the winning will be executed from the notice of the second look-ahead effect). In the look-ahead effect selection table 222c, as the number of times of the look-ahead effect is larger (the value of the look-ahead effect counter is larger), the effect 3 having a red background color is more likely to be selected, and conversely, the number of times of the look-ahead effect is smaller. The effect 1 and the effect 2 which are blue or yellow background colors are more easily selected as the value of the look-ahead effect counter is smaller. Therefore, the player can easily identify the number of prefetch effects.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a description will be given of a prefetch effect lottery process (S1412), which is one of the command determination processes (S1312 in FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the prefetching effect lottery process (S1412).

  In the pre-reading effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1312), the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 is first stored in the reserved first to fourth reserved areas. It is determined whether there is a change in the jackpot or out-of-reach super reach (S1601). Here, in the winning information storage area 223a, based on the winning information command received from the main control device 110, the information of the pre-read success / failure determination, the stop type, and the variation pattern are individually stored corresponding to the number of suspensions. Therefore, it is determined based on the information.

  In the processing of S1601, if it is determined that there is no change in the jackpot or the out-of-reach super reach (S1601: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation that causes the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot or out-of-reach super reach is suspended (S1601: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set to the variable N (S1602). It is determined whether the value of the look-ahead counter stored in the look-ahead counter storage area 223g is greater than 0 (S1603). If it is determined that the value of the prefetch number counter is greater than 0 (S1603: Yes), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the prefetch number counter is 0 (S1603: No), it is determined whether the big hit determination flag 223e is off. When it is determined that the big hit determination flag 223e is off (S1604: Yes), the prefetching effect lottery table 1 (see FIG. 7C) is set as the lottery table (S1605). On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit determination flag 223e is ON (S1604: No), the pre-reading effect lottery table 2 (see FIG. 7D) is set as the lottery table (S1606).

  The lottery result is acquired based on the look-ahead effect lottery table set in the processing of S1605 or S1606 and the value of N (the number of reserved balls) set in S1602 (S1607). Specifically, for example, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is “3” and the prefetching effect lottery table 1 (see FIG. 7C) is selected, the effect counter 223h If a value is obtained and the value is any of 0 to 69, it is determined that there is no prefetch effect, and if it is any of 70 to 99, it is determined that there is a prefetch effect.

  It is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S1607 indicates a prefetch effect (S1608). If it is determined that there is no prefetch effect (S1608: No), the prefetch effect counter is initialized (set to 0), set in the prefetch effect counter storage area 223f, and the prefetch number counter is initialized (to 0). (S1609).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1608 that the lottery result indicates that there is a prefetch effect (S1608: Yes), the prefetch effect flag indicating that there is a prefetch effect is set to ON, and the value of the prefetch effect counter is initialized. (Set to 0) and stored in the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f (S1610). The number of pre-reads is determined based on the value of N (the value of the special reserved ball number counter 223b) and the effect counter 223h from the pre-fetch number lottery table 222b (see FIG. 8A) and stored in the pre-read effect number storage area 223g. (S1611). The determination of the number of prefetches will be specifically described. For example, when the value of N (the value of the special reserved ball number counter) is “3”, the effect is produced from the prefetch number lottery table 222b (see FIG. 8A). If the value of the counter 223h is any one of 0 to 29, the number of prefetches “1” is obtained. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any of 30 to 59, the number of prefetches “2” is obtained. If the value of the counter 223h is any one of 60 to 99, the prefetch number “3” is obtained.

  It is determined whether or not the change corresponding to the last number of the prefetch times acquired in S1611 is a change in the jackpot or out-of-reach super reach (S1612). This determination is made based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the last number. If it is determined that the change of the last number of the prefetching is the change pattern of the jackpot or out-of-reach super reach (S1612: Yes), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change of the last number is a change other than the jackpot or the out-of-reach super reach (S1612: No), the pre-reading is performed so that the last change in the pre-reading effect is the change in the jack-in-out or out-of-reach super reach. The number of times is set (S1613).

  In this way, the number of prefetching effects is determined by lottery so as to be random, but by configuring so that the last change is always a jackpot or out-of-reach change, the notice of the prefetching effect is made Even if the display is displayed, it is possible to prevent a problem in which an effect in which the player has a bigger expectation of the jackpot than usual is not displayed. Therefore, when the notice display of the pre-reading effect is displayed, the player can have a greater expectation of the jackpot, and can play the game by expecting that the pre-reading effect will not be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). The variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1701). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then, in the process of S1404 of the command determination process (see FIG. 27), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707). The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  In the processing of S1709, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. Here, the display control device 114 is notified of the stop type corresponding to the exact stop type (complete loss, front / rear reach, big hit (big hit A, big hit B), etc.).

  In the process of S1710, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1710). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Control processing executed by MPU 231 of display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great deal of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start up the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, a boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing in S1902, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 31). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing to be performed (see S1802 in FIG. 31) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process (S1801) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 32, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S1902 and S1902, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

  Thereby, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set in the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed by detecting the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a ends based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). The image controller 237 sends the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1804, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1805). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 41A) described later, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 41A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 33B), the simple command determination processing is performed so that a power-on image (not shown) (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) is drawn. (See S2108 in FIG. 33B) and simple display setting processing (see S2109 in FIG. 33B).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. When the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the display change pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is displayed immediately during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the transfer takes a long time, and therefore, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on after power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S1806, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 33B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 15) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In the V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 33B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the contents of the command from the sound ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2103), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S2104). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the display setting processing (S2103) or the simple display setting processing (S2109). The type of sprite (display object) is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process (S2105), while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 to the image controller 237. Set the transfer instruction to transfer. The details of the transfer setting process (S2105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2104), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S2105) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As the counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2104.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, details of the above-described command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 34, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), and returns to the process of S2201.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing (S2205) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing (S2205), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2301, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the process of S2301 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2306).

  Thereafter, the variation pattern command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing. By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, and complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 33B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (S2403).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402. In the above-described task processing (S2105), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2403, and the specified stop is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, but before the drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main controller 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S2402.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2206, when it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), it is determined whether a display prefetch command has been received (S2208). If it is determined that the display prefetch command has been received (S2208: Yes), the display prefetch command processing is executed (S2209), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the display prefetch command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the display prefetch command processing (S2209).

  In the display look-ahead command processing (S2209), first, a notice data table corresponding to the received display look-ahead command is determined and set in the notice data table buffer (S2501). Here, the display look-ahead command is set so that the effect contents of the look-ahead effect and the number of times of the look-ahead can be identified. Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 selects a notice data table corresponding to the number of prefetch effects and the effect contents indicated by the display prefetch command. For example, if the display look-ahead command is the first look-ahead effect number and the effect is “90h11h” indicating the effect 1, the notice data table 1 of the effect 1 is selected.

  An advance transfer data table corresponding to the advance data table set in the process of S2501 is determined and set in the advance transfer data table buffer set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). The notice transfer data table has the same configuration as that of the display data table shown in FIG. 14, and its illustration and description are omitted.

  Based on the advance notice data table set in the process of S2501, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer is initialized (S2504).

  Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. In the process of S2208, when it is determined that the display prefetch command has not been received (S2208: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2210). If there is a command (S2210: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2211), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the error command processing (S2211) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing (S2211) executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio ramp control device 114.

  In the error command processing (S2211 in FIG. 37), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2902). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the processing of S2901, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the processing of S2902 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2210 that there is no error command (S2210: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2212), and the process returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes) ), And execute the processing of steps S2202 to S2212 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S2201 to S2212 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extraction and execution of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 35A) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 35B), which are processing corresponding to each command, are performed. A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 35A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 38, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S3002), and then S3003 to S3004. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, a pointer update process is performed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In the pointer update process (FIG. 40, S3005), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S2802). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2803 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting processing is ended and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S3009: Yes), the effect of the confirmed display has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2104), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3015 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S3009: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, so that the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The content of the drawing can be set.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3017: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is completed, and this means that the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 33B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, for a predetermined time, the image of the power-on fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3402). In the process of S3402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3402 (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3301, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3403, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 33B), the command determination processing (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 38 to 40) are performed instead of the simple command determination processing and the simple display setting processing. ) Is executed, so that the normal image drawing is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 42) (see S3301: No in FIG. 41A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In the normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 42, S3303), first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer update process (S3005) of the previously executed display setting process (S2103) is performed. The information described at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is obtained (S3501). Here, information indicated by pointers of the transfer data table of the display data table and the notice transfer data table of the notice data table is obtained. Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

  Also, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3505). If the transfer has been completed (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3406, after setting a transfer instruction of image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in step S3506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the processing of S3505, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S3505: No), the processing shifts to the processing of S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S3508),
In the processing of S3517, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3517 (S3517: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3517, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3418). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S3518, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3519), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is ON (S3513). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S3516), and the flow shifts to the process of S3517.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, details of the above-described drawing processing (S2106), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2105) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, the type of storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2105). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the head address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In the present embodiment, the notice display mode of the pre-reading effect is set such that the display order is the foreground as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the display mode of the pre-reading notice is displayed at a timing that straddles each variation (for example, variation 1 and variation 2), thereby stopping the variation of the special symbol. It can be hidden to make it difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, it is possible to show the player as if the change in the jackpot executed in the last round of the prefetching effect or the super reach was performed in one cycle.

  In the present embodiment, the preview display mode of the pre-reading effect is set at the end of the drawing list (see FIG. 15) so as to be displayed in the foreground (on the front side of the special symbol (third symbol)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the data set in the notice data table is transferred, other display data may not be set in the drawing list. With this configuration, when the notice display mode of the pre-reading effect is set, the process of setting other display information in the drawing list does not need to be performed, so that the control load of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Can be reduced.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3502). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image rendered on one frame buffer is developed, so that the rendering process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process in S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 33B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  Note that the look-ahead notice display mode is longer (or the same period) than the low-speed variable display period displayed for about 3 seconds when the special symbol (third symbol) variable display is started. It is displayed so as to hide the symbol (without displaying the third symbol). Accordingly, it is possible to make the display of the third symbol at high speed appear to be continuously continued, and thus it is possible to make the continuous fluctuation of a plurality of lottery games look like the fluctuation of one lottery game.

  Further, as shown in the detailed diagram of the notice 1 in FIG. 13A, the fluctuation of the special symbol (third symbol) is displayed at a low speed for a certain period from the start of the fluctuation (dynamic display). After the variable display is performed at a high speed, the variable display is performed again at a low speed. The look-ahead notice display mode is such that, of the two variable displays of the continuous lottery game, the fluctuation period of the special symbol at a low speed displayed after the high speed fluctuation and the fluctuation at a low speed of the special symbol at the start of the next lottery game It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over the period. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the display at the high-speed change continues over the continuous change, and it is possible to make the display look like one change.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific notice display of the pre-reading effect has a fixed display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display time may be changed according to a lottery or the like, display contents, or the like. Further, in addition to the one displayed over the fluctuation, the display may be performed only during the fluctuation of one special symbol.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case has been described in which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the prefetching and performs the prefetching effect across a plurality of fluctuations based on the result of the prefetching.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a variation pattern of a SW (switch) effect for executing a specific notice effect is set in advance in the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is set in advance by the variation pattern. When the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing, the specific notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the specific notice effect is configured in a notice display mode for notifying the player of the number of notice displays as in the prefetch effect of the first embodiment. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Main Control Device 110 in Second Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Second Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment is different from the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the first embodiment in that the look-ahead effect lottery table 222a of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 includes: The look-ahead number lottery table 222b, the look-ahead effect selection table 222c, and the effect content command selection table 222d have been deleted, and the notice number selection table 222e, a SW (switch) scenario table 223f, and an effect selection table 222g have been added.

The notice number selection table 222e is a data table for determining the specific notice number shown in FIG. More specifically, the SW received in the process of S1412 of the announcement effect selection process (S1420 in FIG. 54), which is one of the command determination processes 2 (S1420 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The number of notices set for the change pattern is selected based on the change pattern of the effect (in the notice number selection table, simply indicated by special figure changes 1 to 5).

  As shown in FIG. 45 (b), the SW scenario table 222f is set next each time the effective time for which the selected SW effect variation pattern frame button 22 is pressed and processed as effective is passed. 5 is a data table in which the valid time of the frame button 22 and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed are set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (c) and FIGS. 48 (a) to 48 (b), the SW effective time is predetermined in the variation pattern of each SW effect. This period is set in the SW scenario table 222f. Each of the SW effect variation patterns is set, and when the effective time elapses, the next effective time and the number of presses are set with reference to the SW scenario table 222f. It should be noted that it is set to be the same as the selected number of notices, and when the effect of the number of notices is set, END data indicating the end of the next data is set. This SW scenario table 222f is executed based on the fact that the SW valid time counter 223j is 0 in the processing of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307 in FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. It is referred to in the processing of S1324.

  The effect selection table 222g is a data table for determining the background color of the specific notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIGS. The effect selection table 222g includes an effect selection table 1 and an effect selection table 2. The effect selection table 1 and the effect selection table 2 are configured such that the effect selection table 2 is easier to select the yellow, green, and red background colors than the effect selection table 1.

  The effect selection table 222g indicates that the frame button 22 is depressed within the effective time in the process of S1334 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307 in FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, If the remaining time is less than 1.5 seconds, the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46A) is selected, and if the remaining time of the effective time is longer than 1.5 seconds, the effect selection table 2 is selected. Is done.

  Therefore, the type of the effect selection table 222g to be selected can be changed according to the difference in timing (early timing or late timing) when the player presses the frame button 22, and the same SW effect variation pattern is selected. Even in this case, different announcement effects can be displayed. Therefore, the announcement effect displayed to the player has a fixed pattern, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  In this embodiment, in the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46A) and the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46B), the effect of the background color is added to the variation pattern of the selected SW effect in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) in a state where the remaining time of the effective time of the frame button 22 is longer than a predetermined time, that is, after the frame button 22 becomes effective When the button is pressed at an early timing, the red or green background color is easily selected when the result of the determination is a hit based on the result of the determination of the special symbol, and when the result of the determination is off, the color is blue. Alternatively, the setting may be made so that a background color of yellow or yellow is easily selected. In detail, in the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46 (b)), many effects of red or green background colors are set for the fluctuation pattern in which the hit / failure determination result is a hit, and Or an effect with a yellow background color can be easily selected (may be the same as the effect selection table 1).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect selection table 222g has a configuration in which the background color is set in advance in accordance with the variation pattern and the value of the notice counter 223i. May be configured to acquire a counter value based on the counter value and select an effect pattern of the background color based on the counter value. At this time, a plurality of selection tables in which the counter values are assigned corresponding to the advance notice counter 223i may be set in advance, and the table may be selected based on the hit / fail judgment and the timing of pressing the frame button 22. In such a case, the frame button 22 is depressed with good timing in the SW effect by configuring so that the red or green background color is more easily selected when the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is short due to the determination of success or failure. By doing so, the player can see the effect based on the right / wrong determination earlier, and the motivation for the game can be increased.

  Returning to FIG. 44, the description will be continued. In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the prize information storage area 223a, the big hit determination flag 223e, the prefetch effect counter storage area 223f, and the prefetch effect number storage area 223g are different from the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. , The effect counter 223h is deleted, and a notice counter 223i, a SW (switch) valid time counter 223j, and a SW (switch) press count counter 223k are respectively added.

  The notice counter 223i is a counter for counting the number of specific notice displays in the variation pattern of the SW effect. As the display of the specific notice display, characters indicating the number of notice displays are displayed in the background color selected from the effect selection table 222g as shown in FIGS. .

  The notice counter 223i is updated by being incremented by one in the process of S1336 of the frame button input monitoring / producing process (S1307 in FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. When the number of notices is selected from the notice number selection table 222e, the notice counter 223i is initialized to 0, which is the initial value.

  The SW valid time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the valid time of the frame button 22. The SW valid time counter 223j is set with a preset SW valid time period based on the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect set in the SW scenario table 222f. When the valid time elapses, the next valid time is set based on the SW scenario table 222f.

  The SW press counter 223k is a counter that counts the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed within the SW valid time. In the present embodiment, the number of times the SW is pressed set in the SW scenario table 222f is set in the SW number-of-times counter 223k. If the number of times the switch is pressed within the valid time is reduced, the number is reduced (see S1331 in FIG. 52).

  In the present embodiment, the number of times the SW is pressed in the SW scenario table 222f is set to “1”. Therefore, when the switch is pressed once, the value of the SW number-of-times counter 223k becomes 0, and a display advance notice command is set. . Here, if the number of times the SW is pressed is set to a plurality of times, for example, five times in the SW scenario table 222f, the display advance notice command is set unless the frame button 22 is pressed a plurality of times within the valid time. In this case, the specific notice display may not be displayed. Therefore, if the number of times the SW is pressed in the SW scenario table 222f is variously set, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed until the notice display is displayed can be made different every time. Can be provided.

  Furthermore, by making the number of presses set in the SW scenario table different based on the result of determining whether or not the selected variation pattern is correct, the player can expect a big hit by the number of presses until the notice display is displayed. Can be made. Specifically, it can be realized by a configuration in which a relatively large number of presses is set when the hit / failure determination result is a hit, and a relatively small number of presses is set when the result is wrong. In addition, even in the case of a miss, by configuring so that a large number of presses are set with a low probability, even if the result of the determination is incorrect, a large number of presses is set, so that a big hit is expected. To play the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114 in Second Embodiment>
The notice data table of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment is different from the notice data table of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 11A to 11C) in FIGS. Notice data tables 1 to 4 shown in FIG. This is mainly a change due to an increase in the types of background colors, and there is no change in the detailed configuration and the like from the first embodiment, so a detailed description will be omitted. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Second Embodiment>
The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is different from the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment in one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 16). Has been changed to the start winning process 2 (S120 in FIG. 51).

  The start winning process 2 (S120) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S120). In the start winning process 2 (S120 in FIG. 51) in the second embodiment, the processes in S407 to S411 are deleted from the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 19) in the first embodiment. Since each processing from S401 to S406 is the same as each processing from S401 to S406 in the first embodiment, detailed description will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Second Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 52, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring / producing process (S1307), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307). In the frame button input monitoring / producing process (S1307) in the first embodiment, since only input monitoring of the frame button 22 is controlled in the same manner as in the related art, detailed description is omitted. In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307 in FIG. 52) in the second embodiment, when the variation pattern of the SW effect is selected, the SW valid time (see FIG. 45 (b)) is obtained from the SW scenario table 222f (see FIG. 45 (b)). SW effective period) is set, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) within the effective time, and if it has been pressed, processing for setting a corresponding display advance notice command is executed. This is different from the first embodiment.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 52, S1307), first, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is 0 (S1321). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is 0 (S1321: Yes), the SW press counter 223k is set to 0, which is the initial value (S1322). The SW scenario counter is incremented by 1 (S1323). The SW scenario counter is a counter value set in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, and is incremented by 1 in order from 0 which is the initial value. Is added. The SW scenario counter is set to 0, which is the initial value, based on the fact that it has been determined that the SW effect variation pattern command has been received in the processing of S1424 of the notice effect selecting process (FIG. 54, S1420) described later. Is done.

  The SW scenario is acquired based on the fluctuation pattern and the SW scenario counter received from the SW scenario table 222f (see FIG. 45B) (S1324). Specifically, when the SW effect variation pattern is received and the SW effect is executed, the SW scenario counter is set to 1, which is the initial value, and 1 is added in the processing of S1323, and the SW scenario counter is incremented. The value is 2. For example, assuming that the variation pattern of the received SW effect is the special figure variation 2, the No. 2 is determined from the SW scenario table 222f shown in FIG. The SW scenario of special figure variation 2 corresponding to 2 (valid time: 3 seconds, number of times the SW is pressed once) is selected. Here, the set valid time is a detailed valid period, and a detailed period of 3 seconds from 5 seconds to 8 seconds in the special symbol fluctuation time is set. In the special figure change 2, two specific notice effects are executed.

  In the processing of S1325, it is determined whether the SW scenario acquired in the processing of S1324 is END data (S1325). If it is determined that the SW scenario acquired in the processing of S1324 is END data (S1325: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW scenario is not the END data (S1326: No), the SW valid time and the number of times the SW is pressed are acquired from the SW scenario. As described above, the SW valid time acquired here is the SW valid period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is set to be valid next in the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect.

  The period during which the next frame button 22 acquired in the processing of S1326 is valid is set in the SW valid time counter 223j (S1327). The number of times of SW pressing acquired in the process of S1326 is set to the number of times of SW pressing counter 223k (S1328).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1321 that the SW valid time counter 223j is greater than 0 (S1321: No), the SW valid time counter 223j is decremented by 1 (S1329). Next, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1330). In the process of S1330, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1330: Yes), the value of the SW press counter 223k is decremented by 1 (S1331). It is determined whether the value of the SW press counter 223k is greater than 0 (S1332). Here, in the present embodiment, the number of times of pressing set in the SW scenario table is set to one by executing the determination of the SW pressing number counter 223k, but the number of times is set to three, five, etc. When the value is set to, the processing in the case of being pressed is not executed until the value of the SW pressed number counter 223k becomes 0 in the processing of S1332, and the SW effect is specified by pressing the game button 22 a plurality of times. A notice display can be configured to be displayed.

  If it is determined in the process of S1332 that the SW press counter 223k is greater than 0 (S1332: Yes), it is determined whether the remaining valid time of the SW valid time counter 223j is 1.5 seconds or less. (S1333). When it is determined that the remaining valid time of the SW valid time counter 223j is 1.5 seconds or less (S1333: Yes), the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46A) is set (S1334). On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining valid time of the SW valid time counter 223j is longer than 1.5 seconds (S1333: No), the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46B) is set (S1335). ).

  As a result, after the SW effective time is set and it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid, the frame button 22 is pressed at an early timing (early time elapses) (that is, the remaining time of the valid time). And the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46B) are selected, so that the effect 3 having a red background color can be easily selected. If the frame button 22 is pressed at a late timing (that is, the remaining time of the effective time is short), the effect selection table 1 is selected, and it is difficult to select the effect 3 which is a red background color. Therefore, the effect selected according to the timing of pressing the game button 22 can be made different, and various effects can be provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, only the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the result of determining whether the variation pattern is correct is hit when the button is pressed at an early timing, the red effect 3 is selected. Set easily. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game button 22 is pressed is late, even if the result of the determination of the success or failure of the fluctuation pattern is a big hit, the selection is more difficult than when the red background color is pressed earlier. If the result is incorrect, the earlier the button is pressed, the easier it is to select the red background color. Set so that the background color is not likely to be selected. With this configuration, the player can quickly know advantageous information by pressing the frame button 22 early (before the special symbol stops changing), and predict the hit / fail judgment result to some extent. You can enjoy the game. Therefore, it is possible to greatly expect a jackpot in the specific notice display mode, and it is possible to increase a player's willingness to play a game.

  Description of FIG. 52 will be continued. The notice counter 223i is updated by adding 1 to it, and a background color is selected from the effect selection table 222g selected in S1334 or S1335 based on the value of the notice counter 223i (S1336). A display announcement command is set based on the background color selected in the processing of S1336 and the value of the announcement counter 223i (S1337). The display notice command is generated by a command that can identify the background color in the specific notice display of what time. The MPU 231 of the display control device 114, based on the display notice command, outputs notice data corresponding to the background color and the number of specific notice effects from the notice data table shown in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) and FIG. Select a table. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1330 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1330: No), the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is decremented by 1 (S1337).

  Next, a command determination process 2 (S2020) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S2020). Steps S1401 to S1402, S1404 to S1409, and S1415 in the command determination process 2 (S2020 in FIG. 53) in the second embodiment are performed in steps S1401 to S1402 and S1404 in the command determination process (S1312 in FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those of steps S1409 and S1415 are executed. Detailed description of the same processing is omitted.

  In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 53, S2020), first, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1401). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is set to ON (S1402), and the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1404). It is determined whether the variation pattern extracted in the process of S1404 is a variation pattern in which a SW effect is executed (S1419).

  Here, the variation pattern in which the SW effect is executed is set in the present embodiment to a variation pattern in which the hit / fail determination result is a big hit and a variation pattern in which a super reach is obtained. With this configuration, when the specific notice display mode of the SW effect is displayed, the effect is always a jackpot or a missed super reach, and the specific notice display mode is an effect that gives the player the expectation of the jackpot. be able to. Therefore, the player can play the game with expectation that the specific notice display will not be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the process of S1419, when it is determined that the pattern is a variation pattern of the SW effect (S1419: Yes), a notice effect selection process is executed (S1420). The details of the announcement effect selection process (S1420) will be described later with reference to FIG. 54, but a process of setting the SW effective time and the number of times the SW is pressed for executing the SW effect is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pattern is not the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1419: No), the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a description will be given of the announcement effect selection process (S1420), which is one of the command determination processes 2 (FIG. 53, S2020) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this announcement effect selection process (S1420).

  In the notice effect selection process (FIG. 54, S1420), first, the number of notices is selected based on the type of the variation pattern received from the notice number selection table 222e (see FIG. 45A) (S1421). The SW scenario is acquired based on the fluctuation pattern selected from the SW scenario table 222f (see FIG. 45A) and the SW scenario counter (S1423).

  The value of the SW scenario counter is initialized to 1 which is an initial value (S1424). The SW valid time and the number of times the SW is pressed are acquired from the SW scenario based on the SW scenario counter (S1425). Here, as the acquired SW valid time, a period in which the game button 22 is valid for the first time (first time) within the fluctuation time is set. The valid time acquired in the process of S1425 is set in the SW valid time counter 223j. The number of times of SW pressing acquired in the process of S1425 is set in the number-of-SW-presses counter 223k (S1427).

  In the present embodiment, a variation pattern for performing the SW effect is set in advance, and when the variation pattern is selected, various settings of the SW effect are performed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. When a pattern command is received, a lottery may be performed to determine whether to execute the SW effect. In this case, this lottery may be performed for all the fluctuation patterns. However, if the SW effect is always executed by limiting the fluctuation pattern to reach, for example, the reach effect is performed. And the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the specific notice display is displayed by using the frame button 22, and the specific notice display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player does not press the frame button 22. Do not show. In addition, when the number of times of notice of the specific notice set in advance in the variation pattern is less than the number of notices of the SW because the player has not pressed the SW effective time, the display corresponding to the number of notices is displayed. It is configured. Specifically, in the notice frequency selection table 222e (see FIG. 45A), the number of notices corresponding to the special figure variation 4 is selected, and as shown in FIG. Even if it is configured to be set, the player does not press the frame button 22 during the first and second SW valid times, but presses the frame button 22 for the first time during the SW valid time corresponding to the third time. However, the first display shown in FIG. When the frame button 22 is pressed again at the next SW valid time, a second display shown in FIG. 12B is displayed. Then, reach display such as super reach is started.

  Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in accordance with the operation of the player. Therefore, when the player does not need the specific notice display, the game is not displayed unless the game button 22 is operated, and the game can be performed according to the player's preference.

  In the present embodiment, when the SW valid time is reached, a character, an icon, a character, or the like indicating that the SW valid time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or a sound, or a sound indicating that the SW valid time is reached. Is output. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which an LED or the like is built in the frame button 22 or the like, and the frame button 22 itself is turned on when the SW valid time is reached to notify the user. With such a configuration, the player can be notified of the SW effective time in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the variation pattern of the SW effect, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the SW valid time and the display notice command is output, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 indicates the display notice command. In addition to setting the advance notice data table, the variation mode after the specific advance notice display is displayed is randomly selected from the remaining time and displayed (corresponding to the switching means). Specifically, before the frame button 22 is pressed by the SW effect, the special symbol fluctuates at high speed on the background screen in the mountain, and after the specific notice is displayed, the special symbol is displayed on the riverside background screen. Change to a fast-changing display. As described above, when the specific notice display is performed, the contents of the subsequent effects on the third symbol display device 81 are also changed, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the background is changed after the frame button 22 is pressed in the SW effect and the specific notice is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the design of the design may be changed, It may be configured to be in a reach display mode or to start displaying super reach. Note that this display may be configured to perform a lottery based on the fact that the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has received the display notice command.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the case has been described in which the period of the SW effective time is set in advance in the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the maximum number of specific notice displays (the number of SW effects) is set in the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect, but the period is not set. The difference is that the specific notice display is displayed up to the maximum number of times by operating the game button of the player. Note that the same components as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Third Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment.

<Electrical Configuration of Main Controller 110 in Third Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Third Embodiment>
In the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 MPU 221 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the notice frequency selection table 222 e, the SW scenario table 222 f, and the performance selection table 222 g are respectively deleted from the second embodiment, 2 (222h), SW scenario table 2 (222i), and effect selection table 3 (222j).

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the notice number selection table 2 (222h) indicates the maximum number of the specific notice display for the variation pattern of the SW effect (in this case, it is simplified by special figure variations 1 to 5). It is a data table in which the number of notices was set. The difference is that the number of notices is changed to the maximum value with respect to the notice number selection table 222e of the second embodiment. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  In the SW scenario table 2 (222i), as shown in FIG. 56B, the number of times the SW is pressed is set based on the variation pattern and the value of the SW scenario counter. The difference is that the SW valid time is not set for the SW scenario table 222f (see FIG. 45B) in the second embodiment. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the effect selection table 3 (222j) displays the effect color displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the background color when the specific notice display is selected and the specific notice display are displayed. It is a data table for selection. Based on the value of the notice counter 223i and the value of the effect counter (same as that described in the first embodiment), each effect from effect 1 to effect 4 shown in FIG. 57 is selected. The effects 1 to 4 are for determining the background color of the specific notice display and the effect time after the specific notice display is displayed, as in the second embodiment. In the third embodiment, after the specific notice display for three seconds is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 of the display control device 81 displays the third symbol display on the third symbol display device 81 based on the selected effect time. The pattern is changed by selecting the pattern change mode.

  Specifically, in the effect selection table 3 shown in FIG. 57, if the value of the notice counter 223i is 2 and the value of the effect counter is 15, the specific notice display of the effect 2 is selected, and the notice for display based on it is displayed. Command is set. The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 selects the advance notice data table 2 (see FIG. 49 (b)) set with a yellow background color based on the advance notice command for display, and executes the “second time” for 3 seconds. The specific notice display as a character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a yellow background color. Then, as an effect for the set effect time of 4 seconds, a special symbol (third symbol) design is displayed by lottery, for example, by changing a wooden box to a car. During the effect time, the effect is displayed by the character, and the effect continues until the next display notice command is received. In the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special symbol (third symbol) dedicated to reach, which is not normally displayed, may be displayed by using the effect time, and a character or the like may be used. May be executed. As a special symbol for reach, the same symbol is displayed on the left and right in normal times to inform the player of reach, but the special symbol for reach selected in this production time is a larger symbol than normal Only one reel is displayed, and a notification (for example, a character or the like) indicating reach is displayed on the symbol.

  With this configuration, it is possible to entertain the player by displaying a specific notice display which is a different effect from the normal state, and to enjoy the game without getting tired. During this effect time, the frame button 22 is not activated, and the player can show the effect at least during this effect time. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly presses the frame button 22 continuously, it is possible to suppress a problem that the effect is skipped and the next effect is displayed before watching the effect.

  In contrast to the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46A) and the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46B) of the second embodiment, the effect selection table 3 of the present embodiment (see FIG. 57) The difference is that the background color is randomly selected without depending on the fluctuation pattern.

  The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment differs from the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the second embodiment in that the SW effective time counter 223j is deleted, the SW effect time counter 223m, and the reach. A previous second counter 223n is added. The other points are the same as those of the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The SW effect time counter 223m is a counter for counting the effect time after the specific notice display selected from the effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 57). The SW effect time counter 223m is decremented by 1 in the process of S1357 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. 58, S2610) described later. When the SW effect time counter 223m is determined to be 0 (S1343 in FIG. 58: Yes), if the number of seconds before reach is 10 seconds or more, the frame button 22 is set to valid.

  As described above, the SW effect time counter 223m is also a counter value for counting a prohibition period for prohibiting the operation of the frame button 22 during the effect time. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the effect from being skipped due to the pressing of the frame button 22 during the effect time.

  In the present embodiment, the SW effect time counter 223m is provided to ensure that the effect is displayed to the player during the effect time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is configured to be able to do so, the SW effect time counter 223m may not be provided. By doing so, the effect can be skipped by the player's intention, and the effect can be efficiently shown to the player.

  The before-reach seconds counter 223n is a counter for counting the time until the fluctuation pattern of the selected SW effect becomes reach and the reach display mode effect predetermined in the fluctuation pattern is started. The pre-reach seconds counter 223n stores the pre-reach seconds acquired in the process of S1434 of the announcement effect selection process 2 (FIG. 61, S1430) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be described later. In addition, the value is decremented by 1 in the processing of S1358 of the frame button input monitoring / production processing 2 (S2610 in FIG. 58). Also, it is determined whether the number of seconds before reach is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of seconds (10 seconds in this embodiment) (see S1344), and if it is equal to or greater than 10 seconds, the frame button 22 is enabled. On the other hand, if the time is less than 10 seconds, the specific advance display of the effect 5 which is the advance display that develops into the reach effect is selected. The pre-reach seconds counter 223n is set to 0, which is an initial value, in an initial state such as when the power is turned on.

  Thus, when the number of seconds before the reach is equal to or less than the predetermined number of seconds, the third symbol display device 81 can display an effect for notifying the player that the reach effect is started. Therefore, the start of the reach effect can be accurately notified to the player, and the player can be prevented from overlooking the reach effect.

  Other electrical configurations of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment are the same as those of the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Third Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 58, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (FIG. S2610), which is one of the main processing (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. .

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (FIG. 58, S2610), first, it is determined whether the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is a value larger than 0 (S1341). When it is determined that the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is greater than 0 (S1341: Yes), the pre-reach second counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S1342). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number-of-seconds-before-reach counter is equal to or smaller than 0, that is, it is 0 (S1341: No), the processing of S1343 is executed. In the process of S 1343, it is determined whether the value of the SW effect time counter 223 m is 0 (S 1343). When it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1343: Yes), it is determined whether or not the reach second counter 223n is less than 10 seconds (S1344). If it is determined that the before-reach seconds counter 223n is shorter than 10 seconds (S1344: Yes), a display announcement command of the effect 5 for notifying that the reach effect is to be performed is set (S1345). Thereafter, the SW press counter 223k is initialized to 0 as an initial value (S1346), the SW scenario counter is initialized to 0 as an initial value (S1347), and the before-reach seconds counter 223n is initialized to 0 as an initial value. (S1348).

  As described above, when the number of seconds before the reach is less than the predetermined number of seconds (less than 10 seconds in the present embodiment), a display announcement command of the effect 5 which is an advance notice for notifying that the reach effect is to be executed is set. . As the notice display content corresponding to the effect 5, a display mode in which the background rotates in a spiral at high speed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the time when the reach starts.

  In the present embodiment, the effect 5 is set as an effect to notify that the reach effect is started. However, the effect is not limited to this, and a display indicating the number of specific notice displays may be performed based on the value of the notice counter 223i. Good. With this configuration, it is possible to execute more specific notice displays.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is equal to or longer than 10 seconds (S1344: No), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1349). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1349: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1349: Yes), the value is set by subtracting 1 from the SW press counter 223k. It is determined that the number of times of SW depression counter 223k is 0. When it is determined that the SW press counter 223k is 0 (S1351: Yes), an effect lottery process is executed (S1352). The effect lottery process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 59. However, the effect content and the effect time of the background color are determined from the effect selection table 3, and a display notice command based on the determined content is set. Is performed.

  The effect time selected in the process of S1651 in the effect lottery process (S1352 in FIG. 59) is stored in the SW effect time counter (S1353). The SW scenario counter is incremented by 1 (S1354), and the next SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) based on the variation pattern and the SW scenario counter (S1355). It is determined whether the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1355 is END information. If it is determined that the information is the END information (S1356: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information is not END information (S1356: No), the number of times of SW pressing is obtained from the SW scenario obtained in the process of S1355 (S1357). The number of times of SW pressing obtained in the process of S1357 is set in the number of times of SW pressing counter 233k (S1358). On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effect press counter is not 0 (S1351: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S 1343, when it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223 m is not 0 (S 1343: No), the value of the SW effect time counter is decremented by 1 (S 1357), and the pre-reach second counter 223 n is set. One is subtracted (S1358), and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, only when the SW effect time counter 223m is not 0, the number of seconds before reach is subtracted and updated by one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 ( A configuration may be adopted that is always updated each time step S2610 of FIG. 58 is executed.

  Next, the effect lottery process (S1352), which is one of the frame button input monitoring and effect processes 2 (S2610 in FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. . FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the effect lottery process (S1352).

  In the effect lottery process (FIG. 59, S1352), first, the effect and the effect time are selected from the effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 57) based on the values of the effect counter 223h and the notice counter 223i (S1651). A display notice command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect and the effect time selected in S1651 and the notice counter 223i is set (S1652).

  Next, a command determination process 3 (S2030) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S2030 in FIG. 60). The command determination process 3 (S2030 in FIG. 60) according to the third embodiment is different from the command determination process 2 (S2020 in FIG. 53) in the second embodiment in that the preview effect selection process (S1420) is the preview effect selection process 2 ( S1430). As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the second embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S1419, when it is determined that the extracted variation pattern is the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1419: Yes), the announcement effect selection process 2 is executed (S1430).

  This notice effect selection process 2 (S1430) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the announcement effect selection process 2 (S1430). In the notice effect selection process 2 (FIG. 61, S1430), first, the maximum number of notices is obtained from the notice number selection table 2 (see FIG. 56 (a)) based on the variation pattern (S1431). Next, the notice counter 223i is initialized to 0, which is the initial value (S1432). An SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario table 2 based on the values of the fluctuation pattern and the SW scenario counter (S1433). The SW scenario is the number of times the SW is pressed or the END information indicated in the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) using the SW scenario counters (No. 1 to 7) and the variation patterns.

  The number of seconds before reach is acquired based on the fluctuation pattern from the notice number selection table 2 (see FIG. 56A), and is set in the before-reach seconds counter 223n (S1434). The SW scenario counter is set to an initial value of 1 (indicating No. 1) (S1435), the number of times of SW pressing is obtained from the SW scenario obtained in the process of S1432 (S1436), and the number of times of SW pressing is set to the number of times of SW pressing counter 223k. The number of times of SW pressing acquired in the process of S1435 is set (S1438).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the variation pattern of the SW effect is selected, the maximum number of the specific notice display (SW effect) is set, and if the number is the number, the player can arbitrarily select By pressing the frame button 22 at the time (except during the production time), the specific notice display can be displayed. In the variation pattern of the SW effect, a notification mode for notifying that the frame button 22 is in a valid period is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as in the second embodiment. As a result, the player cannot predict how many times the specific notice display is to be displayed, and can operate the frame button 22 in anticipation that the specific notice display will still be displayed. After the specific notice display (for 3 seconds) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined effect (effect of the effect time selected in the effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 57)) is executed. Since this effect is selected from a plurality of effects preset in the display control device 114 in accordance with the effect time, various effects are provided, and a different effect is displayed each time the specific notice display is displayed. Further, if the effect is set to an effect that matches the effect time (for example, a character is displayed and the character talks for the effect time), the player can be notified that the effect time has elapsed. . The player can operate the frame button 22, thinking that the specific notice display may be displayed again after the end of the series of effects. Therefore, the game operation of the player can be easily understood.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the case has been described where the specific notice display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the operation of the player by pressing the frame button 22. However, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that, based on the number of histories of the player pressing the frame button 22, whether or not to display the specific notice display is determined based on the number of histories. Is different from the pachinko machine 10. The same elements as those in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Fourth Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Embodiment>
The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that a SW holding number counter 223o and a SW history number counter 223p are added.

  The SW holding number counter 223o is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed within a valid time (within a period in which pressing of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid). It should be noted that the SW holding number counter 223o is a counter that counts the number of times the button is pressed within the effective time of the variation pattern when the variation pattern of the SW effect is received. Initial processing is initialized to 0 in S1447 of the announcement effect selection process 3 (S1440 in FIG. 65) executed when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command. In addition, in the process of S1381 of the frame button input monitoring / producing process 3 (S2620 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, one is added based on the determination that the frame button 22 is pressed. Is done. In the process of S1375 of the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S2620 in FIG. 63), the counted value is saved and stored in a SW history counter 223p described later. The SW holding number counter 223o is set to an initial value of 0 in an initial state such as when the power is turned on.

  The SW history number counter 223p is a counter for counting the number of times that the frame button 22 is pressed during a valid period in one SW effect variation pattern. As described above, in the SW history counter, the value of the SW holding counter 223o is saved and stored in the process of S1375 of the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S2620 in FIG. 63), and the value of the frame button 22 The number of presses is stored.

  In the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect, when the frame button 22 is pressed within the valid period, the next SW scenario (see FIG. 56 (b)) is set, which is a setting as to whether the next specific notice display is displayed. When the lottery is performed, the value of the SW history counter is used. As will be described in detail later, if the value of the SW history counter is not equal to or more than the predetermined number, the next SW scenario is set.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 63, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S2620) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S2620). The frame button input monitoring / producing process 3 (S2620) in the fourth embodiment is a process executed in place of the process of the frame button input monitoring / producing process 2 (S2610 in FIG. 58) of the third embodiment.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 63, S2620), first, it is determined whether the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is greater than 0 (S1371). When it is determined that the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is greater than 0 (S1371: Yes), the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S1372). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is equal to or smaller than 0, that is, it is 0 (S1371: No), the process of S1373 is executed. In the processing of S1373, it is determined whether or not the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1373). When it is determined that the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1373: Yes), it is determined whether the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is less than 3 seconds (S1374). If it is determined that the before-reach second counter 223n is shorter than 3 seconds (S1374: Yes), the value of the SW holding number counter 223o is saved (stored) in the SW history number counter 223p (S1375). The SW depression counter 223k is initialized to 0 as an initial value (S1376), the SW scenario counter is initialized to 1 as an initial value (S1377), and the before-reach seconds counter 223n is initialized to 0 as an initial value. (S1378).

  In the process of S1374, when it is determined that the before-reach seconds counter 223n is 3 seconds or longer (S1374: No), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S1379). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1379: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1379: Yes), the SW pressing counter 223k is decremented by 1 (S1380), and 1 is added to the SW holding counter 223o (S1381). It is determined whether the number of times of SW depression counter 223k is 0 (S1382). If it is determined that the value of the SW press counter 223k is not 0 (S1382: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of times of SW depression counter 223k is 0 (S1382: Yes), an effect lottery process is executed (S1352). This effect lottery process (FIG. 59, S1352) is the same process as that already described in the third embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the effect lottery process (FIG. 59, S1352) is performed, the effect time of the SW scenario is set in the SW effect time counter 223m (S1383). One is added to the SW scenario counter (S1384). The SW scenario is obtained from the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) based on the variation pattern and the SW scenario counter (S1385). It is determined whether the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1385 is END information (S1386). If it is determined that the SW scenario is the END information (S1386: Yes), each process from S1375 to S1378 is executed, and then this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW scenario is not the END information in the process of S1386 (S1386: No), the value of the variable T is set to 0 (S1387). A value obtained by adding the value of the SW history number counter 223p to the variable T and the maximum number of notices in the notice number selection table is acquired (S1388). The calculation (lottery) of T / 6 is executed (S1389). It is determined whether the calculation result (lottery result) of S1389 is 1 or more (S1390). When it is determined that the calculation result is 1 or more (S1390: Yes), the number of times of SW pressing is obtained from the SW scenario obtained in the process of S1385 (S1389). The number of times of pressing the SW scenario is set in the number-of-SW-buttons counter 223k (S1390). On the other hand, in the process of S1390, when it is determined that the calculation result of S1389 is less than 1 (S1390: No), the processes of S1375 to S1378 are executed, and then the process ends.

  In the process of S1373, when it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is not 0 (S1373: No), the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S1393).

  As described above, even when the data of the SW scenario selected from the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) is not END information, if the value of the SW history frequency counter 223p is small, the next SW scenario is executed. Based on the above, the number of times the SW is pressed is not set in the SW number counter 223k. Therefore, even if the frame button 22 is pressed next, the specific notice display is not displayed. Next, the next specific notice display is not displayed until the value of the SW history number counter 223p becomes equal to or more than a predetermined value. Therefore, even if the same maximum notice number is selected, the player who presses the frame button 22 many times is displayed. The number of times that the specific notice display is displayed increases, and the number of times of the specific notice display can be reduced for a player who does not press the frame button 22 very much, and the effect can be changed depending on the player. As a result, various effects can be executed for the player.

  Also, by adding the maximum number of notices and the value of the SW history number counter 223p and dividing by the maximum notice number "6" in the notice number selection table 2 (see FIG. 56 (a)). When the maximum number of notices in the notice number selection table 2 (see FIG. 56 (a)) is selected, the calculation result is always 1 or more, and the specific notice display can be displayed up to the maximum number. Therefore, each time the specific notice display is not displayed up to the maximum number of times even when the frame button 22 is pressed, when the specific change pattern is selected, the specific notice display is displayed regardless of the number of history times. , Can give the player unexpectedness.

  Next, a command determination process 4 (S2040) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 4. The command determination process 4 (FIG. 64, S2040) in the fourth embodiment is different from the command determination process 3 (FIG. 60, S1312) in the third embodiment in that a preview effect selection process 2 (FIG. 61, S1430) is performed. The selection process has been changed to selection process 3 (S1440 in FIG. 65). As for the other processing, the same processing as the command determination processing 3 (S1312 in FIG. 60) in the third embodiment is executed, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, notice effect selection process 3 (S1440) which is one of the command determination processes 4 (S1440 in FIG. 64) executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the announcement effect selection process 3. In the preview effect selection process 3 (FIG. 65, S1440) in the fourth embodiment, the process of S1448 is added to the preview effect selection process 2 (FIG. 61, S1430) in the third embodiment. In each process from S1441 to S1447 in the fourth embodiment, the same process as each process in S1431 to S1437 in the third embodiment is executed. Detailed description of the same processing is omitted. In the processing of S147, when the number of times of pressing acquired in the processing of S1446 is set in the SW number-of-times counter 223k (S147), the processing of S1448 is executed. In the processing of S1448, the value of the SW holding counter 223o is initialized to “0” which is the initial value (S1448). After that, this processing ends.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the prefetching and performs the prefetching effect across a plurality of fluctuations based on the result of the prefetching. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, when the small hits different from the big hits are won, the fluctuation pattern exclusive for the post-small hits different from the normal time is selected for the held lottery game. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in that the effect of performing a variable display a plurality of times as if it were one lottery game is executed. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Fifth Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

<Electrical Configuration of Main Controller 110 in Fifth Embodiment>
In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. A table 202e is set.

  The big hit random number table 202a sets the value of the first hit random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 is “7,107,282” in the normal probability gaming state (low probability gaming state), and “4,11,28,38,” in the high probability gaming state. 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285 299 "is set as a jackpot determination value determined to be a jackpot (the same as in the first embodiment). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is any of “0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12”, a small hit determination value determined as a small hit Is set as Note that the small hit is set as being included in the one determined to be out of place in the determination of success or failure, and is set as a kind of out of place. In the present embodiment, the small hit determination value is set from the outlier determination values. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The small hit may be set as one of the big hits and set from the big hit determination value. Further, it may be set to be determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2 from the one determined to be a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, when a small win is won, the variable winning device 65 is opened twice for 0.5 second. In the gaming state after the small hit (low probability gaming state or high probability gaming state), the same gaming state as the gaming state before the small winning is set.

  The variation pattern selection table 202b is a selection table for determining a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) for variably displaying the first symbol and the third symbol. In the variation pattern selection table 202b, each variation pattern table is set for a low-probability game state, a high-probability game state, a time-short game state, and a small hit only (including the number of shift changes after the small hit).

  Since the variation pattern other than the small hit only is selected in the same manner as in the first embodiment, a detailed illustration and description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 68 (a), for the small hit only variation pattern, a small hit only variation pattern that is selected when the result of determination is out of place and when the hit is a hit is set. Details of each variation pattern will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 68 (b) to 68 (c) and FIGS. 69 (a) to 69 (b), the small hitting only variation pattern selection tables 202e are set.

  FIG. 68B is a selection table 202e dedicated to small hits selected when the status flag B is determined at the time of the small hit winning. In this selection table, a normal small hit variation pattern is selected for all variation type counters CS1. In this normal small hit variation pattern, after the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a chance like "341", the variable winning device 65 is operated for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds). During ()), the small jackpot that is opened is executed twice.

  FIG. 68 (c) is a fluctuation pattern selection table 202e dedicated to the small hit which is selected when the status flag C is determined at the time of winning the small hit. When this selection table is selected, the selection table is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 based on the value of the fluctuation counter 203g. When the value of the fluctuation counter 203g is 0, that is, at the time of the small hit winning, the special small hit fluctuation pattern is selected so as to correspond to the values of all the fluctuation type counters CS1. Here, the fluctuation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of transition fluctuations after the small hit, which will be described later in detail. Note that the small hit is determined to be a small hit determination value when the result of the hit determination is out of order, and thus the fluctuation pattern for the hit is not set.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a1), after the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 71 (a2), the special small hit variation pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device. , The first symbol is displayed, the third symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right, and is stopped and displayed at "341" indicating a small hit. In the present embodiment, the stop symbol indicating the small hit is “341”. However, the stop symbol is not limited thereto, and another stop symbol may be used, or a temporary symbol different from a normal symbol (for example, a musical note or the like). Symbol combination).

  Next, when the held lottery game starts to fluctuate, the fluctuation counter 203g is updated to 1, so if the result of the determination as to whether or not the lottery game is off, corresponding to all the fluctuation type counters CS1, The out-of-reach start / end fluctuation pattern is set. After the display shown in FIG. 71 (a2), the out-of-reach reach start / end fluctuation pattern is displayed from the state where the third symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 71 (b1), as shown in FIG. 71 (b2). After the same symbol is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol in the reach display mode in which the symbols are stopped, after a predetermined time, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the reach symbol. Is reported to have been missed.

  On the other hand, when the lottery game held next is a win, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 170, the hit reach start / end variation pattern 1 is selected, and the value of the variation type count CS1 is changed. If it is 171-199, the winning reach end variation pattern 2 is selected. Note that the hit reach start / end variation pattern 1 and the hit reach start / end variation pattern 2 differ from the above-described out-of-reach reach start / end variation pattern in that the hit reach start / end variation pattern is stopped with a symbol indicating a hit.

  FIG. 69 (a) is a fluctuation pattern selection table selected when the status flag D is determined at the time of winning a small hit. When the fluctuation counter 203g is 0, the special small hit fluctuation pattern is set corresponding to all the fluctuation type counters CS1. If the fluctuation counter 203g is 1, and if the result of determination is out of range, the out-of-reach start fluctuation pattern 1 is set according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponding to 0 to 160, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. The off-reach start variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to the values 161 to 199.

  The off-reach start variation pattern 1 and the off-reach start variation pattern 2 are displayed in a state where the third symbol fluctuates, as shown in FIG. 71 (b1), and as shown in FIG. 71 (b2), In the state of the reach display mode, the fluctuation display of the middle symbol is continuously displayed until the fluctuation time ends.

  On the other hand, when the result of the determination on the success or failure of the lottery game held next is a hit, the hit type start / end change pattern 1 is set in the change type counter CS1 corresponding to the value of 0 to 170, and the change A hit reach start / end variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to the type counter CS1 of the values of 171 to 199.

  As described above, when the status flag C is determined, the variation pattern selection table dedicated to the small hit is selected from the small hit winning until the lottery game is executed twice. Even if the result of the determination is a hit due to a change in the middle, the result of the determination is correctly notified.

  Further, at the start of the fluctuation of the next held lottery game, the fluctuation counter 203g is updated to 2 so that if the result of determination is incorrect, the fluctuation counter 203g is changed to 0 to 50. Correspondingly, the out-of-reach variation pattern 1 is set, and the out-of-reach reach variation pattern 2 is set in accordance with 51 to 180 of the variation type counter CS1. Reach fluctuation pattern is set.

  Here, in the off-reach variation pattern 1 and the off-reach variation pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (A)), the character "second time" is displayed, and the display of the third symbol is reduced and started. You. At this time, the third symbol whose display is reduced and started to be displayed is displayed in the reach display mode as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (A)). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (b2), the reach display mode is displayed, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, a symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the out-of-reach reach variation pattern 1 and the out-of-reach reach variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 72 (c2), an effect is displayed around the middle symbol during the change of the middle symbol, and a reach display mode different from that in the normal state is displayed. Is notified to the player.

  When the out-of-SP reach variation pattern is selected, as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (B)), the word "development" is displayed, and the display of the third symbol is reduced and started. The third symbol whose display is started to be reduced is displayed in the reach display mode. Thereafter, a display mode is displayed to notify the player that the special reach "next notice crane reach" as shown in FIG. 72 (d1- (B)) is displayed. Thereafter, the display mode of the crane reach as shown in FIG. 72 (d2) is displayed, and the crane lifts the middle symbol, which is a hit symbol, but does not lift the entire symbol but drops it, and a symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped and displayed. A display mode indicating the departure is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the value of the fluctuation counter 203g is 2, when the lottery game in which the hit / failure determination result is a win is started, the hit reach fluctuation pattern 1 is set corresponding to 0 to 20 of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the hit reach variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to 21 to 150 of the variation type counter CS1, and the hit SP reach variation pattern is set corresponding to 151 to 199 of the variation type counter CS1. The hit reach fluctuation pattern 1, the hit reach fluctuation pattern 2, and the hit SP reach fluctuation pattern are reported as hits of the out-reach reach change pattern 1, the out-reach reach change pattern 2, and the out-of-SP reach reach fluctuation pattern. Are different.

  FIG. 69 (b) is a fluctuation pattern selection table 202e selected when the status flag E is determined at the time of the small hit winning. Until the value of the fluctuation counter 203g is up to 1, it is the same as the selection table 202e (see FIG. 69 (a)) selected in the case of the status flag D, and therefore the description is omitted.

  If the value of the fluctuation counter 203g at which the number of transition fluctuations is the second time is 2 and the result of the determination as to whether or not it is out of range, the out-of-reach reach fluctuation pattern 1 is set in accordance with 0 to 165 of the fluctuation type counter CS1. , And the variation pattern 2 during the out-of-reach state is set corresponding to the variation type counters 166 to 199.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 72 (d1- (A)), the character “third time” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern 1 during out-of-reach reach and the variation pattern 2 during out-of-reach reach. At the lower right of the display area of the three-symbol display device 81, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the reach display mode, and the display is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (c2), a reach display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a display mode in which the middle symbol continues to fluctuate until the fluctuation time has elapsed is displayed.

  On the other hand, if the result is a hit, a hit reach variation pattern 1 is set corresponding to 0 to 20 of the variation type counter CS1, and a hit reach variation pattern is set corresponding to 21 to 150 of the variation type counter CS1. Pattern 2 is set, and a hit SP reach variation pattern is set corresponding to 151 to 199 of the variation type counter CS1. Here, the hit reach variation pattern 1 and the hit reach variation pattern 2 are set so that the character "3rd time" is displayed at the start of the variation. Other display modes are the same as those already described above.

  Next, when the value of the fluctuation counter 203g, at which the number of transition fluctuations is the third, is 3, and the result of the validity determination is out of range, the out-of-way fluctuation pattern 1 corresponds to the fluctuation type counter CS1 from 0 to 140. The deviation reach variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to the variation type counter CS1 141 to 170, and the deviation SP reach variation pattern is set corresponding to the variation type counter CS1 171 to 199. Here, when the out-of-reach reach variation pattern 1 and the out-of-reach reach variation pattern 2 start to fluctuate, the character "4th time" is displayed. Other display modes are the same as those already described above.

  On the other hand, if the result is a hit, a hit reach variation pattern 1 is set corresponding to 0 to 20 of the variation type counter CS1, and a hit reach variation pattern is set corresponding to 21 to 150 of the variation type counter CS1. 2 is set, and the hit SP reach variation pattern is set corresponding to 151 to 199 of the variation type counter CS1. Here, when the hit reach variation pattern 1 and the hit reach variation pattern 2 start to fluctuate, the characters “fourth time” are displayed. Other display modes are the same as those already described above.

  As described above, in the configuration of the fifth embodiment, the plurality of changes in the number of transition changes set in the status flag determined at the time of the small hit winning are set to the change pattern so that the player sees the change as one change mode. Is selected. Further, at the start of the change, a display mode such as “first time” or “second time” is displayed, and a related notification mode that makes it seem that the fluctuation is continuing is displayed. As if it were one variation. Further, in the display mode displayed at the start of the change, the display area of the third symbol is reduced and displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to notice that the third symbol has started to change, and the previous change is still continued. You can make it seem as if you are.

  In addition, with the occasion of the small hit, the actual number of changes for continuously displaying the plurality of changes to appear as one change within the range of the number of items being held at that time is determined by determining the status flag. In the meantime, since the exclusive variation pattern selection table 203e is configured to be selected during this time, it is possible to easily perform an effect that makes a plurality of variations appear as one variation.

  Furthermore, it is set so that the fluctuation pattern selected according to the number of transition fluctuations after the small hits winning time is changed, and in the final fluctuation, since the display form showing the lottery result is set from the reach display form, When the small hit is won, the reach display mode can be easily made to remind the player.

  In the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment, a status flag storage area 203f, a fluctuation counter 203g, and a selection counter 203h are added to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment.

  The status flag storage area 203f is a storage area for storing a status flag for determining whether or not it is a period for selecting a dedicated fluctuation pattern after a small hit in a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As the status flags, five types of flags A to E are set in advance as shown in FIG. 67 (c).

  The status flag A is a flag indicating that a period during which a normal fluctuation pattern is selected. The status flag B is a flag indicating that it is a period during which the small hit only variation pattern is selected once. Similarly, the status flag C selects the small hit-only variation pattern twice, the status flag D selects the small hit-only variation pattern three times, and the status flag D selects the small hit-only variation pattern four times. This is a flag indicating that this is a period of time.

  It should be noted that the status flag is determined by lottery in the process of S421 of the status transition process (FIG. 76, S329) which is one of the special symbol change start processes (FIG. 75, S220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Is selected from the status selection table 202c (see FIG. 67 (b)).

  Here, when the status flag is selected, it is stored in the status flag storage area 203f of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. When the power is turned off, the status flag storage area 203f is backed up and stored by being supplied with power from a backup power supply. Then, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to return to the state immediately before the power was turned off. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the status flag A, which is a default setting, is set in the status flag storage area 203f.

The fluctuation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of transition fluctuations after the small hit. The fluctuation counter 203g is incremented and updated by 1 in the processing of S335 in the special symbol fluctuation start processing (S220 in FIG. 75) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the special symbol variation start process (S220 in FIG. 75, S220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and in the process in S221 in the special symbol variation process 2 (S140 in FIG. 74), the initial value is reset to 0. The selection counter 203h is a counter that is sequentially updated one by one within a range from an initial value of 0 to an upper limit value of 99. In the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. After updating to the upper limit of 99, if it is further updated, it is updated to the initial value of 0. Although not shown, the selection counter 203h is incremented by one and updated in the process of S1011 of the main process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, in the process of S421 of the status transition process (S329 in FIG. 76) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the status flag (status) is determined from the status selection table 202c, the value of the selection counter 203h is obtained. You.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
A sub fluctuation counter 223r and a sub status flag storage area 223s are respectively added to the RAM 223 of the first embodiment of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113.

  The sub fluctuation counter 223r is a counter for counting the number of transition fluctuations in synchronization with a fluctuation counter 203g provided in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the value is incremented and updated by 1 in S1712. In the process of S1714, the initial value is reset to 0. In this embodiment, although not shown, the initial value is reset to 0 based on the reception of the opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot game output from the main control device 110.

  The sub status flag storage area 223s is a storage area for storing a status flag based on a status command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of a status flag determined by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. . The status flag based on the status command received in the process of S1451 in the command determination process (S2050 in FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is stored (set) in the sub status flag storage area 223s.

<Variation display mode when the number of transition fluctuations according to the present embodiment is set>
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, an example of a variation display mode in the number of transition variations set in response to a small hit winning in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example of a case where a small win is won and the status flag E is determined when three or more pieces are held.

  In the variation 1, it is determined that the small hit is won, the status flag E is determined, and the special small hit variation pattern is selected. During the period indicated by a1, after the high-speed variable display of the third symbol continues (see FIG. 71 (a1)), as shown in FIG. The third symbol is displayed on the three symbol display device 81, and the third symbol is reduced to the lower right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and out of the out of symbol “341” (a symbol different from the big hit symbol), a specific chance eye Is displayed.

  Next, the fluctuation 2 shows a case where the out-of-reach reach start fluctuation pattern 1 or the out-of-reach reach start fluctuation pattern 2 is selected. As shown in FIG. 71 (b1), after the high-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol is displayed for a predetermined period within the period of b1, the display is switched to the low-speed display, and as shown in FIG. 71 (b2), the left symbol column is displayed. The reach display mode is stopped at "7" symbol, then the right symbol column is similarly stopped at "7" symbol, the left and right symbols are displayed with the same symbol, and the variation display of the middle symbol is continued at b2. Displayed for the indicated period.

  Thereafter, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation 3 is started. The variation 3 shows a case where the variation pattern 1 during out-of-reach reach and the variation pattern 2 during out-of-reach reach are selected. A notice period c1 is set in the period indicated by c1, a SW valid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 for three seconds is valid is set, and when the frame button 22 is operated within that time, FIG. As shown in c1- (A)), the character "second time" is displayed until the notice period c1 ends. If the frame button 22 is not operated even after the SW valid period has elapsed, a cut-in display mode in which the word “development” is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (B)) is displayed. .

  In this way, by making the display mode displayed when the player operates the frame button 22 different from the display mode displayed when the player does not operate the frame button 22, the player sets the frame button 22 by the player. The pleasure of operating can be increased.

  After the notice period c1 ends, as shown in FIG. 71 (c2), the reach display mode displayed with the same symbol as the reach symbol displayed with the fluctuation 2 is displayed. Here, in the reach display mode displayed by the variation 3, an effect or the like is displayed on the middle symbol, and an effect different from the variation 2 is executed.

  After the fluctuation time of fluctuation 2 has elapsed, the fluctuation display mode indicated by fluctuation 4 is displayed. Variation 4 shows a case where either the out-of-SP reach variation pattern or the hit SP reach variation pattern is selected. Three seconds out of the period indicated by d1 is set as the SW valid period. Then, when the frame button 22 is operated within the SW valid period, as shown in FIG. 72 (d1- (A)), the characters "third" are displayed until the notice period ends. On the other hand, if the frame button 22 has not been operated during the SW valid period, a cut-in display mode in which characters “next notice crane reach” is displayed as shown in FIG. 72 (d1- (B)) is displayed. Is done. Thereafter, during a period d2, a special reach display mode (SP reach display mode) in which a display mode in which a jackpot symbol is lifted by a crane as shown in FIG. 72 (d2) is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hit is won, the number of transition fluctuations is determined, and a dedicated selection table is set so that the fluctuation pattern selected by the number is different from the normal fluctuation pattern. Configured to set. Therefore, it is possible to show by combining a plurality of variable display modes as if a plurality of variable displays (lottery game) set to the number of transition changes from the small hit variable display mode are one variable display mode. .

  In addition, since the variation pattern of the display mode having continuity with the previously displayed variation display is selected in accordance with the number of transition variations, a plurality of variations are more likely to be presented to the player as one variation. Can be shown. Therefore, even in the case of a lottery game that is actually out of the way, it is possible to play the game while maintaining the expectation to the big hit.

  In addition, at the time of winning a small hit, a variable display mode different from the normal time can be easily displayed, and the small hit to the player can give a greater sense of expectation to the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game by the next big hit game.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Fifth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 73 to FIG. 76, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment will be described only with respect to changes, and illustration and description of the same process will be omitted.

  FIG. 73 illustrates a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 17, S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140). Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a special symbol variation process 2 (S140), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S140). The special symbol change process 2 (FIG. 74, S140) in the fifth embodiment is different from the special symbol change process (FIG. 17, S104) in the first embodiment in that the special symbol change start process (FIG. 18, S208) is special. In the symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 75, S220), the process of S215 is changed to the process of S221, respectively, and the processes of S222 to S223 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the processing of S213 or S214 is performed, the processing of S221 is performed. In the process of S221, the start of the jackpot game is set (similar to the first embodiment), the fluctuation counter 203g is reset to 0, which is the initial value, and the status flag A is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f. .

  Further, in the process of S211, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of order (S211: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S222). Here, the determination as to whether or not the small hit is made by determining whether the value of the first random number counter C1 is the same as the small hit determination value described above. In the process of S222, when it is determined that the small hit is won (S222: Yes), the start of the small hit game in the small hit is set. Here, the operation of moving (opening) the variable winning device 65 for a predetermined period (0.5 s in the present embodiment) is set twice. On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that there is a non-small hit (S222: No), the process of S216 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, a special symbol variation start process 2 (S220), which is one of the special symbol variation processes 2 (FIG. 74, S140) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process 2 (S220). The special symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 75, S220) in the fifth embodiment is different from the special symbol change start process (FIG. 18, S208) in the first embodiment in each of S328 to S331 and S334 to S337. Processing has been added. Note that the processes in S321 to S327, S332 to S333, and S338 to S339 are the same processes as the processes in S301 to S312, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S325, if it is determined that the result of the hit determination is out of order (S325: No), it is determined whether the result of the hit determination is a small hit (S328). When it is determined that the result is the small hit (S328: Yes), the status transition processing is executed. (S329).

  Here, the status transition processing (S329) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the status transition processing (S329).

  In the status transition processing (FIG. 76, S329), first, a status flag (status) is determined based on the current hold number and the value of the selection counter 203h from the status selection table (see FIG. 67 (b)) (S421). . It is determined whether or not the lottery result is the status flag B (S422). If the result is the status flag B (S422: Yes), the status flag B is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f (S423).

  On the other hand, in the process of S422, when it is determined that the lottery result is not the status flag B (S422: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is the status flag C (S424). When it is determined that the lottery result is the status flag C (S424: Yes), the status flag C is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f (S425).

  On the other hand, in the process of S424, when it is determined that the lottery result is not the status flag C (S424: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is the status flag D (S426). When it is determined that the lottery result is the status flag D (S426: Yes), the status flag D is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f (S427). On the other hand, in the process of S426, when it is determined that the lottery result is not the status flag D, that is, when it is determined that the status flag is E (S426: No), the status flag E is set in the status flag storage area 203f. (Storing) (S428). After that, the status command indicating the status flag set in any of the processes of S423, S425, S427, and S428 is set to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 (S429).

  Here, returning to FIG. 75, the description will be continued. After the status transition processing (FIG. 76, S329) is executed, the display mode displayed on the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the small hit is set (S330). Thereafter, based on the status flag stored in the status flag storage area 203f and the value of the variation type counter CS1, a small hit variation pattern is determined from the small hit dedicated variation pattern selection table 202e.

  Next, after any one of S327, S331, and S333 is performed, the process of S334 is performed. In the process of S334, it is determined whether the status flag 203f stored in the status flag storage area 203f is a status flag other than the status flag A (that is, any one of the status flags B, C, D, and E). In the process of S334, when it is determined that the status flag is other than the status flag A (S334: Yes), the value of the variation counter 203g is updated by adding 1 to the value of the variation counter 203g (S335), and the updated value of the variation counter 203g is set. It is determined whether the value is equal to or greater than the number of transition changes set in the status flag (see FIG. 67 (c)) (S336). When it is determined that the value of the variation counter 203g is equal to or greater than the number of transition variations (S336: Yes), the value of the variation counter 203g is reset to 0, which is the initial value, and the status flag A is stored in the status flag storage area 203f. It is set (S337). After that, the process of S338 is performed. Further, in the process of S336, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 203g is less than the number of transition variations (S336), and when it is determined that the status flag is A in the process of S334 (S334: No), the process of S338 is performed.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fifth Embodiment>
A control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that only changes are shown in the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and illustration and description of the same processing is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 77, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The main process (FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is different from the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment by a frame. The button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307) is displayed in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (FIG. 80, S2630), and the command determination processing (FIG. 27, S1311) is displayed in the command determination processing 5 (FIG. 78, S2050). The setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed from the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060). The other processing is the same as the processing in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a command determination process 5 (S2050) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 5 (S2050). In the command determination process 5 (S2050 in FIG. 78) according to the fifth embodiment, the processes from S1410 to S1414 are deleted from the command determination process (S1311 in FIG. 27) according to the first embodiment, and S1450 to S1451 are performed. Each process up to has been added. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the processing of S1408, when it is determined that the hold command has not been received (S1408: No), it is determined whether the status command output from the main control device 110 has been received (S1450). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S1450: Yes), the status flag indicated by the status command is set in the sub status flag storage area 223s (S1451). On the other hand, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1450: No), the process of S1415 is executed.

  Next, a variable display setting process 2 (S2060) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S2060). In the variable display setting process 2 (S2060 in FIG. 79) according to the fifth embodiment, the respective processes from S1711 to S1714 are respectively added to the variable display setting process (S1312 in FIG. 30) in the first embodiment. I have. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S1706, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is off (S1706: No) or after the process of S1710 is performed, the process of S1711 is performed. In the processing of S1711, it is determined whether the status flag stored in the sub status flag storage area 223s is other than the status flag A, that is, any of the status flags B, C, D, and E (S1711). . If it is determined that the status flag is other than the status flag A (S1711: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the sub fluctuation counter 223r and updated (S1712).

  It is determined whether the value of the sub fluctuation counter 223r is equal to or greater than the number of transition fluctuations set in the status flag (S1713). If it is determined that the value of the sub fluctuation counter 223r is equal to or greater than the number of transition fluctuations (S1713: Yes), the value of the sub fluctuation counter 223r is reset to 0, which is the initial value, and the status is stored in the sub status flag storage area 223s. The flag A is set (S1714). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1713 that the value of the sub fluctuation counter 223r is less than the number of transition fluctuations, the processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (FIG. 80, S2630) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (S2630).

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (FIG. 80, S2630), first, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is 0 (S1521). When a change pattern command is received, a predetermined SW valid time effective counter 223j is set in accordance with the change pattern. When it is determined that the SW valid time counter 223j is 0 (S1521: Yes), it is determined whether the SW press count counter 223k is a value larger than 0. It should be noted that the SW press counter 223k is set to 1 based on the setting of the valid time counter 223j.

  When it is determined that the number of times of pressing the switch 233k is greater than 0 (S1522: Yes), the value of the number of times of pressing the switch 233k is set to 0 (S1523), and based on the value of the sub fluctuation counter 223r. Then, a display cut-in command to be output to the display control device 114 is set (S1524). Based on this display cut-in command, for example, a cut-in display mode as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (B)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this cut-in display mode, a plurality of display modes are set in addition to the display mode as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (B)). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1523 that the value of the SW press counter 223k is equal to or smaller than 0 (S1522: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S1521, if it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is a value other than 0 (S1521: No), the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is updated by subtracting 1 (S1525). . It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (S1526). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1526: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW press counter 223k is greater than 0 (S1527). When it is determined that the value of the SW detour number counter 223k is greater than 0 (S1527: Yes), the value of the SW press number counter 223k is decremented by 1 (S1528), and the value of the sub fluctuation counter 223r. , A display notice command to be output to the display control device 11 is set (S1529). On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed in the processing of S1526 (S1526: No), or in the processing of S1527 in the processing of S1527, it is determined that the value of the SW press counter 223k is 0 or less. If the processing has been performed (S1527: No), this processing ends.

<Control Process Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Fifth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 81, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that only changes are shown in the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment, and illustration and description of the same processing is omitted.

  The command determination process 2 (S2120) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 2 (S2120). Command determination processing 2 (S2120 in FIG. 81) according to the fifth embodiment is different from command determination processing (S2102 in FIG. 34) according to the first embodiment in that the processing from S2208 to S2209 is deleted, and S2121 to S2124. Each process up to has been added. The other processing is the same as the processing in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S2121, when it is determined that the display cut-in command has not been received (S2121: No), it is determined whether the display advance command has been received (S2123). In the process of S2123, when it is determined that the display advance notice command has been received (S2123: Yes), the advance notice display data corresponding to the received display advance notice command is set in the display data table buffer ( S2124). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2123 that the display advance notice command has not been received (S2123: No), the processing of S2210 is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol change pattern (at the time of the jackpot winning (at the time of executing the time-saving game state, at the time of starting the high-probability game, at the time of starting the normal game (low-probability game start)) and at the time of the winning of the small hit) (Variable time) is configured to be switched. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that the selection table of the variation pattern is frequently switched, the variation time and the like are frequently changed, and the gambling of the game becomes unstable.

  Then, in such a configuration, when a small hit is won, a change pattern is selected from a change pattern selection table dedicated to a small hit until a predetermined number of changes. A changed effect can be provided.

  Further, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, the effect is configured to be set so as to be continuous with the effect of the preceding and following change patterns so that a plurality of changes including the small hits appear to be one change. A plurality of variation patterns are set in advance, and a variation pattern selection table dedicated to small hits is set so that each variation pattern can be combined and sequentially selected so as to be continuous. It can appear as if it were a single change.

  Furthermore, in the variation pattern selection table dedicated to small hits selected at the time of the small hit winning, the variation pattern is selected in a variation pattern that is easy to be selected when the result of the determination of the special reach or super reach is a big hit in the last variation. Since the same effect as that described above is configured to be executed, the player can increase the degree of expectation of the jackpot.

  Also, in the present embodiment, a plurality of transition fluctuation times are set at the time of winning a small hit, and if a lottery game that becomes a big hit in the middle of the number is included, the big hit is executed. Since the number of transition fluctuations is configured to be reset, a series of fluctuations is completed by a jackpot, and then, when an effect is performed to make a plurality of fluctuations appear to be one fluctuation. Can be expected to be a big hit. Further, even after the jackpot, a continuous effect (for example, an effect of starting a change from the reach state) is continuously selected, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that gives a sense of incongruity to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hit is won, a plurality of subsequent fluctuations in the special symbol are displayed to the player as if they were a single special symbol. Are configured to be combined, so that even a plurality of out-of-place fluctuations can be seen as if they were one out-of-place fluctuations. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a chance that the player is disappointed that he / she is out. Further, since it is possible to make a plurality of fluctuations including a change that causes a jackpot to appear as if it were a single change, the fluctuation judgment result displayed before the jackpot is out of order. Even in this case, it is possible to make it appear as if it were one variation in combination with the variation of the jackpot, so that a variation that is out of the range can be used effectively.

  In addition, in this embodiment, at the time of winning a small hit, it is configured such that the number of transition fluctuations is determined within the number of reserved balls of the lottery game that is being reserved, so that a plurality of fluctuations is more than one fluctuation. It was configured to be able to look like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the number of transition fluctuations equal to or greater than the number of reserved balls is set, so that a plurality of fluctuations appear to be continuing. In such a configuration, all fluctuations are in a reach state, and by performing an effect such as performing a chance effect to determine whether or not a lottery game that can be a big hit can be started, the player can more participate in the game. Motivation can be increased.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the prefetching and performs the prefetching effect across a plurality of fluctuations based on the result of the prefetching. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the number of transition changes is determined in response to the winning of the small hit, and when the maximum number of production executions determined within the number of transition changes is executed, the remaining The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in that the reach display mode of the variable time corresponding to the time is selected. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

<Display Mode of Pachinko Machine 10 in Sixth Embodiment>
A display mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 (a) is a time chart showing the variable display mode when the status flag E is set at the time of the small hit winning when the alternative display mode is not set. In the sixth embodiment, at the time of winning a small hit, the status flag is determined and the number of transition fluctuations is set as in the fifth embodiment. The example shown in FIG. 82A shows a case where the status flag E is set and the number of transition changes is set to three.

  In the sixth embodiment, the special reach display mode set by the final change in the number of transition changes (in the example shown in FIG. 82A, the change 4 corresponds to the start of the change 2) is the change display start. The period until the effect is set as the production possible time. In addition, the maximum number of productions is set based on the result of the win / fail determination and the value of the selection counter 203h at the time of the small win. The maximum number of productions is set by the player operating the frame button 22 during the production possible time, and the maximum number of productions is set to one production displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . As the effect contents, characters such as “second time” and “third time” as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (A)) and FIG. 72 (d1- (A)) are displayed based on the number of effects. You. At that time, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right display area.

  In the example shown in FIG. 82 (a), the maximum number of effects is set to three, but the notice effect is executed only up to two times, and the maximum number of effects has not been reached. As described above, when the maximum number of productions has not been reached, the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is waited until the available production time elapses, and then the reach display mode of the display mode of the preset fluctuation 4 is set. (In the present embodiment, a special reach display mode (SP reach display mode)) is displayed.

  As described above, the notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 up to the maximum effect number based on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22. Here, when the maximum number of effects is a hit or a negative result of the fluctuation 4, a larger number of effects is selected, and the player operates the frame button 22 to determine the right or wrong earlier. The result can be predicted from the number of executions of the notice effect. Therefore, the pleasure of pressing the frame button 22 can be given to the player more.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82 (b), a display mode in the case of FIG. 82 (a) when the notice effect is executed up to the maximum number of effects will be described. FIG. 82 (b) is a time chart showing a case where a notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 up to the maximum number of effects. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 82 (b), the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the fluctuation time of the fluctuation 3, and the third notice effect which is the maximum number of effects is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is what was displayed. In this case, an alternative variation display mode closer to the remaining time is selected based on the remaining time until the variation 4 ends. Although the details of this alternative fluctuation display mode will be described later, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are set in advance for each of the pass / fail judgment results, and the fluctuation patterns closer to the remaining time are set. An alternative variation pattern for the variation time is selected. The alternative variation pattern is configured in a special reach display mode in which a specific reach display mode is set, as shown in FIG. 72 (d2).

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Sixth Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment.

<Electrical Configuration of Main Controller 110 in Sixth Embodiment>
In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, a big hit random number table 202a, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, a status selection table 202c, status information 202d, and a small hit dedicated fluctuation pattern selection table 202e are respectively set.

  The jackpot random number table 202a, the variation pattern selection table 202b, the status selection table 202c, and the status information 202d are the same as those already described in the fifth embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  FIGS. 84 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 85 (a) and (b) show the small hit-only variation pattern selection table 202e in the sixth embodiment. Note that the normal small hit variation pattern and the special small hit variation pattern in the small hit only variation pattern in the sixth embodiment are the normal small hit variation pattern and the special small hit variation pattern configured in the same display manner as in the fifth embodiment. Each is composed of a fluctuation pattern. The off-going fluctuation patterns 1 to 3 are configured in a non-reach display mode from the start of the change to the stop of the change in the third symbol, and the change times are different from each other. Off-SP reach variation patterns 1 and 2 are configured in a special reach display mode including a reach display mode such as a crane reach display mode as shown in FIG. 72 (d2) described in the fifth embodiment. Further, the winning SP reach variation patterns 1 and 2 are different from the out-of-SP reach reach variation patterns 1 and 2 in that the result of the determination is displayed as a hit.

  The variation pattern selection table 202e only for small hits shown in FIG. 84B is a table selected when the status flag B is selected, and similarly, the variation pattern selection table 202e only for small hits shown in FIG. 85e is a status flag C, a variation pattern selection table dedicated to small hits shown in FIG. 85 (a) is a status flag D, and a variation pattern selection table dedicated to small hits shown in FIG. 85 (b). A table 202e is selected when the status flag E is selected. The method of selecting each variation pattern is the same as the method described in the fifth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, a status flag storage area 203f, a fluctuation counter 203g, and a selection counter 203h are respectively added to the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. Have been. Note that each of them has the same configuration as that already described in the fifth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Sixth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 83, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described.

  In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment, the effect time setting table 222k, the maximum number of times determination table 222m, the substitute variation pattern are stored in the ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. A table 222n and an alternate effect lottery table 222p are added. Although not shown, the selection table of each variation pattern set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is also set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can determine the fluctuation pattern selected by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 from the winning command output from the main control device 110. Note that, even when the selection table of the variation pattern is switched according to the number of reservations, by fixing the variation pattern that becomes a reach or a super-reach according to the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the number of reservations, the voice lamp can be read in advance. The MPU 221 of the control device 113 can determine a change that causes a reach or a super reach.

  The effect time setting table 222k is data for setting the effect time (display time) of the notice display displayed in the small hit variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG. 86 (a). It is a table. The effect time is set longer as the number of times increases. In addition, when the lottery game corresponding to the number of transition fluctuations includes a lottery game that is a big hit, a larger number of production times is configured to be easily selected than when the lottery game is not included. Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict the success / failure determination result based on the number of productions, and when a large number of productions are selected, the player can play the game with more expectation of a big hit. Note that, as described in the fifth embodiment, a display mode for notifying the number of effects as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (A)) is displayed in the preview effect displayed here. In the present embodiment, the display mode is to notify the number of productions of the notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a tentative third design or the like is displayed, and a pseudo reach effect or the tentative third design is stopped and displayed. Such a display may be performed to make it appear that more lottery games have been performed, or an effect in which a character or the like is displayed may be performed.

  The maximum effect number determination table 222m is a data table for determining the maximum number of announcement effects displayed during the display of the small hit exclusive change pattern in which the number of shift changes is set on the third symbol display device 81. The maximum notice number determination table 222m is determined by the lottery corresponding to the set number of transition fluctuations in the processing of S2264 in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 (S2060 in FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The maximum number of productions is determined based on the result of the game success / failure determination and the value of the production counter 223h. Thereby, the maximum number of productions is determined which is larger when the winning lottery game is included in the lottery game executed during the number of transition changes. Therefore, by executing many announcement effects, it is possible to make the player expect the big hit.

  The alternative variation pattern table 222n is a data table in which the variation time of the alternative variation pattern is set, as shown in FIG. 86 (c). As an example of the alternative variation pattern, a missed SP reach variation pattern 1, a missed SP reach variation pattern 2, a per-SP reach variation pattern 1, and a per-SP reach variation pattern 2 are set.

  The alternative effect lottery table 222p is a data table for determining whether or not to set an alternative variation pattern when the notice effect is executed a maximum number of times. In the alternative effect lottery table 222p, the value of the effect counter 223h is set such that the alternative change pattern is more easily set when the lottery game that wins during the transition change count is included than when it is not included. Is allocated.

  The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment has a SW press counter 223k, a sub status flag storage area 223s, a total time storage area 223t, an effectable time storage area 223u, and a reach fluctuation time storage area 223v. , Effect number counter 223w is added.

  The SW press counter 223k has the same configuration as that described in the second embodiment, and the sub status flag storage area 223s has the same configuration as that described in the fifth embodiment. Detailed description is omitted.

  The total time storage area 223t is a storage area in which, when the number of transition fluctuations is set, the total of the fluctuation time of the lottery game for the number of transition fluctuations is stored. This total time storage area 223t stores the fluctuation of each fluctuation pattern corresponding to the number of transition fluctuations (the value of the prefetch frequency counter) in the processing of S2253 of the effect setting processing (S2075 in FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The total time is set.

  The effect possible time storage area 223u is a storage area for storing a time during which a notice effect can be displayed when the number of transition changes is set. The effectable time storage area 223u is the value set in the total time storage area 223t in the processing of S2261 in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 (S2060 in FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The value obtained by subtracting the number of reach seconds of the final change in the number of transition changes is stored. In the process of S2276, the effect possible time is subtracted and updated based on the elapsed time.

  The reach variation time storage area 223v is a storage area for storing the reach variation time of the final variation in which the number of transition variations (the number of prefetches) is set. The reach variation time storage area 223v stores the number of reach seconds in the processing of S2252 in the effect setting processing (S2075 in FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113.

  The effect number counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of notice effects. When the maximum number of productions is determined from the maximum production number determination table (see FIG. 86 (b)), the maximum number of productions is set in the production number counter 223w. In the frame button input monitoring / producing process 5 (S2060 in FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the value is decremented and updated by 1 in S2275, and reset to the initial value of 0 in the process of S2269. Is done.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Sixth Embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 87 to 89, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment will be described only with respect to changes, and illustration and description of the same process will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. The special symbol change process (FIG. 17, S104) is changed to the special symbol change process 2 (FIG. 74, S140), and the starting winning process (FIG. 19, S105) is changed to the starting winning process 3 (FIG. 88, S150). ing. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. The special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140) has the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 88, start winning processing 3 (S150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 3 (S150). The start winning process 3 (S150 in FIG. 88) according to the sixth embodiment is different from the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 19) in the first embodiment in that the processes from S407 to S411 are deleted, and the prefetch lottery process is performed. (FIG. 89, S430) has been added. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 89, the prefetch lottery process (S430), which is one process in the start winning process 3 (FIG. 88, S150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the prefetch lottery process (S430).

  In the prefetch lottery process (FIG. 89, S430), first, it is determined whether or not it is determined to be a big hit at the start of the fluctuation based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in S406 in the start winning process 3 (S150 in FIG. 88). Is performed (S431). If it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S431: Yes), a jackpot winning command that can determine the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S406 is set to be output to the audio lamp control device 113. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S431 that it is out (S431: No), it is determined whether it is a small hit (S433). If it is determined that the win is a small hit (S433: Yes), a small hit prize winning command that can determine the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S406 is set to be output to the audio lamp control device 113. Is performed (S434).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S433 that it is not a small hit, it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that becomes a super reach (S435). If it is determined that the variation pattern is a super-reach variation pattern (S435: Yes), an out-of-reach prize winning command that can determine the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S406 is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. Output is enabled (S436). On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern does not become a super-reach variation pattern (S435: No), an out-of-prize winning command indicating the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S406 is set (S437).

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that only changes are shown in the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and illustration and description of the same processing is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 90, a description will be given of a main process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment is different from the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The frame button input monitoring / producing process (S1307) corresponds to the frame button input monitoring / producing process 5 (FIG. 96, S2640), the command determining process (FIG. 27, S1311) corresponds to the command determining process 6 (FIG. 91, S2070), The variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed to the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060). Note that the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060) is the same process as that already described in the fifth embodiment, and the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 91, a description is given of the command determination process 6 (S2070) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 6 (S2070). The command determination process 6 (FIG. 91, S2070) in the sixth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 27, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment in S1410 to S1414. Are deleted, and the processes from S2071 to S2075 are added. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the processing of S1408, when it is determined that the hold command has not been received (S1408: No), it is determined whether the winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2071). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S2071: Yes), a winning command receiving process is executed (S2072).

  The winning command receiving process (S2072) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the winning command receiving process (S2072). In the winning command reception processing (FIG. 92, S2072), first, the winning command indicating the value of the received variation type counter CS1 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2081).

  It is determined whether the received winning command is a jackpot winning command (S2082). If it is determined that the jackpot winning command has been received (S2082: Yes), the jackpot determination flag 223e is set to ON (S2083). After that, the process of S2085 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning command is not the jackpot winning command (S2082: No), it is determined whether the received winning command is a miss reach winning command (S2084). When it is determined that the command is the out-of-reach prize winning command (S2084: Yes), the prefetching effect lottery process 2 is executed (S2085). This prefetching effect lottery process 2 (S2085) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After the prefetching effect lottery process 2 (S2072 in FIG. 93) is executed, the big hit determination flag 223e is set to OFF (S2086). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2084 that the command is not a missed reach winning command (S2084: No), this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the prefetching effect lottery process 2 (S2085) which is one of the winning command receiving processes (S2072 in FIG. 92) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the prefetching effect lottery process 2 (S2085). In S2222 to S2234 in the pre-reading effect lottery process 2 (S2085 in FIG. 93) in the sixth embodiment, the same processes as those in S1601 to S1613 in S1412 in FIG. The processing of S2221 is added to the processing of the first embodiment.

  In the process of S2221, it is determined whether or not the winning information storage area 223a (reserved area) stores a small lottery game, ie, a small hit winning command. If it is determined that the small hit winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2221: Yes), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2221 that the small hit winning command is not stored (S2221: No), the processing of S2222 is added.

  Returning to FIG. 91, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2071 that no winning command has been received (S2071: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2073). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S2073: Yes), a status command receiving process is executed (S2074).

  The status command reception processing (S2074) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the status command receiving process (S2074).

  In the status command processing (S2074 in FIG. 94), first, it is determined whether the received status command is a status command indicating the status flag B (S2241). If it is determined that the status flag is B (S2241: Yes), the status flag B is set in the sub status flag storage area 223f, and the prefetch count counter is set to 0 (S2242). No pre-reading is set (S2243), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the status flag indicated by the received status command is other than the status flag B (S2241: No), it is determined whether the received status command is the status command indicating the status flag C. (S2244). If it is determined that the status flag is the status flag C (S2244: Yes), the status flag C is set in the sub status flag storage area 223f, and the prefetch count counter is set to 1 (S2242). Although illustration is omitted, it is set to “read ahead”, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the status flag indicated by the received status command is other than the status flag C (S2244: No), it is determined whether the received status command is the status command indicating the status flag D. (S2246). If it is determined that the status flag is the status flag D (S2246: Yes), the status flag D is set in the sub status flag storage area 223f, and the prefetch counter is set to 2 (S2247). Although illustration is omitted, it is set to “read ahead”, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the status flag indicated by the received status command is other than the status flag D, that is, the status flag E (S2246: No), the status flag E is set in the sub status flag storage area 223f, The prefetch frequency counter is set to 3 (S2248). Although illustration is omitted, it is set to “read ahead”, and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 91, the description will be continued. After the status command receiving process (FIG. 94, S2074) is executed, the effect setting process is executed (S2075). After that, this processing ends. The effect setting process (S2075) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this effect setting process (S2075). In the effect setting process (FIG. 95, S2075), first, the small hits exclusive use is performed based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the value of the prefetch number counter set in the prefetch number counter storage area 223g. The fluctuation pattern information is acquired again from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222 (S2251). As a result, when the small hit is won, the information read in advance can be updated in correspondence with the small hit dedicated fluctuation pattern selected by the main control device 110.

  When the process of S2251 is executed, the reach time of the final change corresponding to the value of the prefetch number counter is set in the reach change time storage area 223v (S2252). The total of the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern selected by each lottery game corresponding to the look-ahead counter is set as the total fluctuation time in the total time storage area 223t (S2253).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 (S2640) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (FIG. 96, S2640).

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process 5 (FIG. 96, S2640), first, as the production possible time in the production possible time storage area 223u, the total fluctuation time stored in the total time storage area 223t is stored in the reach fluctuation time storage area 223v. A value obtained by subtracting the stored reach seconds is set (S2261). It is determined whether the effectable time set in S2261 is a value larger than 0 (S2262). When it is determined that the possible production time is a value greater than 0 (S2262: Yes), it is determined whether or not the production number of the production number counter 223w is set (S2263).

  When it is determined that the number of effects has been set (S2263: Yes), the process of S2265 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of effects has not been set (S2263: No), the maximum number of effects is stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the number of prefetches set in the maximum effect number determination table 222m. The maximum number of productions is determined based on the validity determination information and the value of the production counter 223h, and is set in the production number counter 223w (S2264).

  In the process of S2265, it is determined whether the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S2265). When it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is a value other than 0, the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is updated by subtracting 1 (S2266), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S2265: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the effect number counter 223w is 0 (S2267). When it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223w is not 0 (S2267: Yes), an alternative effect lottery process is executed (S2268). Here, the alternative effect lottery process (S2268) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this alternative effect lottery process (S2268). In the alternative effect lottery process (FIG. 97, S2268), first, it is determined whether the total fluctuation time is longer than 25 seconds (S2281). If it is determined that the total fluctuation time is longer than 25 seconds (S2281: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is obtained, and the lottery result is obtained from the alternative effect lottery table 222p (see FIG. 86 (d)). I do.

  It is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained in the processing of S2282 is an alternative (win) (S2283). When it is determined that the lottery result has the alternative (S2283: Yes), it is determined whether the total fluctuation time is longer than 30 seconds (S2284). If it is determined that the total variation time is longer than 30 seconds (S2284: Yes), the out-of-SP reach variation pattern 2 or the per-SP reach variation pattern 2 is determined based on the determination result, and the corresponding display command is determined. Is set (S2285). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2284, when it is determined that the total variation time is 30 seconds or less (S2284: No), the out-of-SP reach variation pattern 1 or the per-SP reach variation pattern 1 is determined based on the determination result. Then, a corresponding display command is set (S2286). After that, this processing ends.

  As described above, when the notice effect is displayed up to the set maximum number of effects on the third symbol display device 81, the remaining total change time at that time is determined, and the change display of the alternative change pattern is possible. If it is time, it is determined whether to display the alternative variation pattern by lottery. Here, the lottery for displaying the alternative variation pattern is executed based on the result of the determination of the variation of the lottery game, and if the result of the determination is a hit, the alternative variation pattern is more likely than the case of the deviation. Since the display is set so as to be easily displayed, the player can expect a bigger hit by displaying the alternative variation pattern. Further, when the remaining time of the total fluctuation time is long, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player has to wait for a long time until the reach display mode of the final fluctuation is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

  In the present embodiment, after the alternative variation display mode is displayed, if there is a remaining time until the variation time further elapses, in a state where all the third symbols have fluctuated while the variation display is stopped, It waits until the fluctuation time elapses. Thereafter, based on the elapse of the fluctuation time, a fixed stop is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the display until stopping is a more natural display mode.

  Returning to FIG. 96, the description will be continued. After the alternative effect lottery process (FIG. 97, S2268) is executed, the effect number counter 223w is reset to the initial value of 0 (S2269). The value of the effectable time storage area 223u is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S2270). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2267, when it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223w is not 0 (S2267: No), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S2271). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2271: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW press counter 223k is greater than 0 (S2272). When it is determined that the value of the SW press frequency counter 223k is greater than 0 (S2272: Yes), the value of the SW press frequency count 223k is decremented by 1 (S2273), and the value of the effect frequency counter 223w. Is set (S2274). The value of the effect number counter 223w is decremented by 1 (S2275), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed in the processing of S2271 (S2271: No), or if the value of the SW press counter 223k is equal to or less than 0 in the processing of S2272 (S2272: No), this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of special symbol changes are made to appear to the player as if the special symbol change were a single special symbol change at the time of the small hit winning. Since the variation patterns are configured to be combined, it is possible to make it appear as if it were a single variation even if the variation was multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a chance that the player is disappointed that he / she is out. Further, since it is possible to make a plurality of fluctuations including a change that causes a jackpot to appear as if it were a single change, the fluctuation judgment result displayed before the jackpot is out of order. Even in this case, it is possible to make it appear as if it were one variation in combination with the variation of the jackpot, so that a variation that is out of the range can be used effectively.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of advance notice displays (display of the first time, the second time, etc.) are displayed on the frame button 22 of the player during the effect of making the plurality of changes appear as one change. Since the display is performed based on the operation, it is possible to configure so that different effects are given to the respective players according to the operation timings of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing the game with the same effect.

  In addition, the maximum number of times the notice display is displayed is configured such that a larger number of times is selected in the case of a jackpot based on the result of the determination of success or failure. The result of the success / failure determination can be predicted in advance, and the enjoyment of the game can be further increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the notice display of the maximum number of times is displayed, an alternative variation pattern that is close to that time is selected and displayed based on the remaining time until the final variation is completed. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the player from getting bored, and to give the player an effect that matches the fluctuation time.

  In addition, the alternative variation pattern is not always selected, but is randomly selected based on the result of the determination of success or failure, and in the case of a jackpot, the alternative variation pattern is configured to be easily selected, so that the alternative variation pattern is displayed. It is possible to make the player expect a big hit.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the notice display is configured to display the first and second characters, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, after displaying the first character, a predetermined time or the like is displayed. A special symbol (a symbol dedicated to reach, a symbol with a different symbol pattern, etc.) may be displayed in a variable manner, or a character or the like may be displayed. With this configuration, the player can enjoy the notice display.

  In the present embodiment, the number of transition fluctuations is determined within the number of reserved balls at the time of winning a small hit, and a plurality of special symbol changes including the small hit are made to appear as one change within the number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the number of transition fluctuations equal to or greater than the number of reserved balls is set, and a fluctuation effect is performed in a continuous fluctuation pattern within the number. In such a case, for example, every time within the number of transition fluctuations, as a chance effect that the fluctuation pattern starts to fluctuate from the reach state, it is configured to perform an effect of whether the player can start a big hit fluctuation. May be.

  In such a configuration, each time the variation pattern dedicated to small hits that starts to change in the reach state starts to change, the number of times the variation pattern dedicated to small hits starts to change continuously is notified to the player. Is also good. With this configuration, the player wants to start a jackpot lottery game while the chance effect is being executed, and can continue the game.

  In the present embodiment, the status command determined by the main control device 110 is output. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be configured to execute the same processing as the processing to be performed. With this configuration, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to determine the result of determination of success or failure and the type of jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110. In such a case, by setting a dedicated variation pattern command for each of the types such as the jackpot A and the jackpot B, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can easily determine the jackpot type from the variation pattern command. Can be. Therefore, the number of commands output by main controller 110 can be reduced.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the prefetching and performs the prefetching effect across a plurality of fluctuations based on the result of the prefetching. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, after the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs the opening processing of the variable winning device 65 after the small win, before the variable winning device 65 opens, This is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that processing for hindering the operation is performed. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 98 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of the variable winning device 65 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. The variable prize device 65 has a rotating door 620 for rotating the front surface of the game board 13 by about 90 degrees to receive a game ball falling on the game board surface and taking the game ball into the variable prize device 65. And a plunger link 610 for rotating the rotating door 620 forward based on the operation of the solenoid 600 (209). The plunger link 610 has a shaft portion 610b, and is rotatably fixed inside the variable winning device 65.

  One end of the plunger link is fixed to the tip of the plunger 600a of the solenoid 600, and when the solenoid 600 is electrically operated and the plunger 600a is sucked, the plunger link 610 is rotated about the shaft 610b. . The plunger link 610 is provided with a locking portion 610a protruding toward the rotating door, and the rotation of the plunger link 610 releases the locking between the locking portion 610a and the rotating door 620. The pivot door 620 pivots 90 degrees toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by its own weight.

  As shown in the top view of a part of the inside of the variable winning device 65 in FIG. 99, the regulating solenoid 640 (209) is orthogonal to the solenoid 600 inside the variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment. It is provided as follows. The restricting solenoid 640 is a push-type solenoid, and has a configuration in which the plunger 640a projects forward when electrically operated. When the regulating solenoid 640 operates and the plunger 640a projects, it comes into contact with the plunger link 610 and regulates rotation of the plunger link 610.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 98, when the plunger link 610 rotates, the tip of the locking portion 610a is at the top of the locking recess 620b with the locking portion 610a provided on the back side of the rotating door 620. By rotating the rotating door 620 slightly toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in contact with the wall, the center of gravity of the rotating door 620 is shifted and the rotation of the rotating door 620 is started by its own weight. The time t required for the locking portion 610a to contact the upper wall of the locking recess 620b of the rotating door 620 is 50 ms.

  As will be described in detail later, at the time of the small win, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the small win and activates the solenoid 600 to execute the opening process of the variable winning device 65, and then, less than 50 ms. The control for operating the regulating solenoid 640 is executed. Thereby, when the variable winning device 65 is opened at the time of winning a small hit, it is possible to prevent a problem that the player can easily determine that the determined result of the winning is a small hit.

  In addition, in the case of setting the number of transition fluctuations at the time of winning a small hit, and performing an effect that makes a plurality of changes appear as one change, the opening operation of the variable entry saving device 65 by the small hitting wins, It is possible to suppress a problem that the player easily determines a plurality of fluctuations.

<Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment will be described only with respect to changes, and illustration and description of the same process will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 100, a description will be given of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment in that a special symbol change process (FIG. 17, S104) is special. It has been changed to the symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 101, S160). As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, a special symbol variation process 3 (S160), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. I do. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 3 (S160). In the special symbol change process 3 (FIG. 101, S160) in the seventh embodiment, the processes of S222 to S223 are added to the special symbol change process (FIG. 17, S104) in the first embodiment. The start process (FIG. 18, S208) is changed to the special symbol change start process 3 (FIG. 102, S240). Note that these processes from S222 to S223 are the same processes as S222 to S223 of the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140) in the fifth embodiment, and thus detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 102, a special symbol variation start process 3 (FIG. 101, S160) which is one of the special symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 101, S160) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 102, S240) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process 3 (S240). In the special symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 102, S240) in the seventh embodiment, each process from S340 to S342 is added to the special symbol variation process (FIG. 18, S208) in the first embodiment. . Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the lottery result of S304 or S305 is not a big hit (S306: No), the process of S340 is executed. In the process of S340, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the small hit determination value (S340). If it is determined that the small hit has occurred (S340: Yes), the display mode at the time of the small hit displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S341). Then, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit is determined (S342), and the process of S311 is executed.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In the main process (FIG. 103) according to the seventh embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1003) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 104, S1020) in comparison with the main process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. The object opening / closing process (S1005) has been changed to electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (S1040 in FIG. 106). As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 104, the jackpot control process 2 (S1020), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 103) in the seventh embodiment, will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1020).

  In the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 104, S1020), first, it is determined whether the start of the jackpot has been set in the process of S215 in the special symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 101, S160) (S1021). If it is determined that the start of the jackpot has been set (S1021: Yes), an opening command for notifying the sound ramp control device 113 of the start of the jackpot game is set (S1022).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the start of the jackpot has not been set (S1021: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being played (S1023). If it is determined that the game is not in the jackpot game (S1023: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit game is being played (S1023: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting a new round (S1024). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round game (S1024: Yes), the opening of the large opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is set (S1025).

  A round number command for outputting the number of newly opened rounds (the number of rounds of the jackpot game) to the audio ramp control device 113 is set (S1026). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1024 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1024: No), it is determined whether the condition for closing the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1027). In the present embodiment, in the big hit game, when ten game balls are won in the large opening 65a or when 30 seconds elapse after being opened, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1027: Yes), the closing of the large opening 65a is set (S1028).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1027, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65a is not satisfied (S1027: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1029). The ending effect is an effect of notifying the player of the end of the big hit game by voice or a display mode of the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing (S1029: Yes), an ending command for notifying the end of the big hit game is set to the audio ramp control device 113 (S1030).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1029, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1029: No), the small hit process is executed (S1031). After that, this processing ends.

  The small hit processing (S1031) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the small hit processing.

  In the small hit processing (FIG. 105, S1031), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit start is set in the processing of S223 in the special symbol change processing 3 (FIG. 101, S160) (S1101). If it is determined that the start of the small hit is set (S1101: Yes), and if it is determined that the start of the small hit is set (S1101: Yes), the start of the small hit game is indicated by an audio lamp. An opening command for notifying control device 113 is set (S1102).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the start of the small hit is not set (S1102: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit is being played (S1103). When it is determined that the small hitting game is not being performed (S1103: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit game is being performed (S1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting a new round (S1104). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round game (S1104: Yes), the opening of the large opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is set (S1105). Thereafter, the operation of the regulating solenoid 640 is set (S1106).

  As described above, after the solenoid 600 is set to open, the restricting solenoid is also set to operate, so that the restricting solenoid operates before the large opening port 65a is opened, and the plunger 640a rotates the plunger link 610. By moving to the restricting position, the opening of the large opening 65a is restricted. Therefore, even if the execution of the small hit is set, the turning door 620 does not turn, and the player can be less likely to notice that the small hit has been won than the operation of the turning door.

  A round number command for outputting the number of newly opened rounds (the number of rounds of the small hit game) to the sound ramp control device 113 is set (S1107). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1108). In the present embodiment, in the small hitting game, when ten game balls are won in the large opening 65a or when 0.5 second has passed since the opening, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the closing of the large opening 65a is set (S1109).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1108, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65a is not satisfied (S1108: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1111). The ending effect is an effect of notifying the player of the end of the small hitting game by voice or a display mode of the third symbol display device 81. Here, in the case of the small hitting game, the player is not notified of the small hitting, and a display such as a letter “notice effect display (in this embodiment,“ first time ”) is executed.

  If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1111: Yes), an ending command for notifying the end of the big hit game is set to the audio lamp control device 113 (S1112). After that, this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S1111 that it is not the ending effect start timing (S1111: No), the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, a description will be given of the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (S1040), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. . FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (S1040).

  In the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (FIG. 106, S1040), first, it is determined whether the large opening 65a is set to be opened (S1041). The setting for opening the large opening 65a is set in the processing of S1025 in the big hit control processing 2 (S1020 in FIG. 104) and the processing in S1106 in the small hit processing (S1031 in FIG. 105).

  When it is determined that the opening of the large opening 65a is set (S1041: Yes), the solenoid 600 of the large opening 65a is set to ON (S1042). On the other hand, it is determined whether the operation of the regulating solenoid 640 is set (S1043). The operation of the regulating solenoid 640 is set in the process of S1106 in the small hit process (FIG. 105, S1031). When it is determined that the operation of the regulating solenoid 640 is set (S1043: Yes), the regulating solenoid 640 is set to ON (S1044). Thereafter, this processing is ended.

  In the processing of S1041, when it is determined that the opening of the large opening 65a is not set (S1041: No), it is determined whether the closing of the large opening 65a is set (S1045). The closing of the large opening 65a is set in the process of S1028 in the big hit control process 2 (S1020 in FIG. 104) and the process in S1109 in the small hit process (S1031 in FIG. 105). When it is determined that the large opening 65a is closed (S1045: Yes), the solenoid 600 is set to off (S1046). Then, the control solenoid 640 is set to off (S1047), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1045 that the closing of the large opening 65a has not been set (S1045: No), this processing ends.

  As described above, when a small win is achieved, the regulating solenoid 640 is set to be turned on immediately after the process of turning on the solenoid 600 whose large opening 65a is opened. Here, it takes 50 ms from the start of the operation of the solenoid 600 to the start of the turning of the turning door 620, so that the turning of the turning door 620 is started. Before the plunger link 610 rotates, the tip of the plunger 640a of the restricting solenoid 640 can be moved to a position where the rotation of the plunger link 610 is restricted before the plunger link 610 rotates. Therefore, at the time of the small hit, although the large opening 65a is set to be opened, the large opening 65a is not opened, and it is difficult to recognize that the player has hit the small opening.

  Here, as shown in the fifth embodiment to the sixth embodiment, when an effect is made to show a plurality of fluctuations as if they are one fluctuation at the time of a small win, a plurality of fluctuations are preferably set. I want to make it difficult for the player to understand each break. Here, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, when a small hit is won, a small hit is set, but by restricting the rotation of the rotating door 620 so as not to rotate, the fluctuation of the small hit can be reduced. This can make it difficult for the player to understand something. Therefore, it is possible to make a plurality of fluctuations including the small hit appear as one fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, the round in which the large opening port 65a is opened is executed twice for the small hit for 0.5 second. By setting a big hit (two round big hit) of the same action and setting the type of the big hit which sets the probability of the success / failure judgment in the high probability game state (probable change game) in the subsequent game, the third symbol display By giving the same information (displayed in the same symbol) for the two rounds as the big hit and the small hit with the device 81, the player cannot distinguish between the small hit and the two round big hit. Here, furthermore, based on the two rounds of big hits, as in the case of the winning of the small hits, by performing the effect of causing a plurality of changes including the two rounds to appear as one change, the player can change the plurality of changes by one. By performing the effect shown, it is possible to have a higher expectation of the jackpot.

<Modification of Pachinko Machine 10 in Seventh Embodiment>
A modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the seventh embodiment, a regulating solenoid 640 is provided to prevent the opening operation of the turning door 620 of the variable winning device 65, thereby restricting the turning of the turning door 620. On the other hand, in the modification of the seventh embodiment, the variable winning device 65 does not have the regulating solenoid 640, and after the solenoid 600 of the variable winning device 65 is operated, the plunger link 610 opens the turning door 620. The seventh embodiment is different from the seventh embodiment in that the solenoid is de-energized and a process for restricting the opening is executed by the time until the operation is started (50 ms in the present embodiment). The other configuration is the same, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A small hit opening counter 203i is added to the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modification of the seventh embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the seventh embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The small hit opening counter 203i is a counter for measuring the time from the start of the opening operation of the solenoid 600 of the variable winning device 65 to the start of the closing operation of the variable winning device 65 based on the small hit winning. is there. In the small hit opening counter 203i, a counter value corresponding to a time of 20 ms is set in the processing of S1056 in the small hit processing 2 (S1050 in FIG. 108) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In addition, it is updated by being subtracted by 1 in the process of S1074 in the electric accessory opening / closing process 3 (FIG. 109, S1070) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

<Control Process of Main Control Device 110 in Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. A detailed description of the same processes as in the seventh embodiment will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 108, the small hitting process 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. The small hitting process 2 (FIG. 108, S1050) is a process executed instead of the small hitting process (FIG. 105, S1031) in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the small hit processing. The small hitting process 2 (S1050 in FIG. 108) according to the seventh embodiment is different from the small hitting process (S1031 in FIG. 105) in that the processes in S1105 and S1110 are deleted, and the process in S1056 is omitted. Has been added.

  When the processing of S1055 is executed, a counter value (5 in this embodiment) indicating 20 ms is set to the small hit release counter 203i (S1056). After that, the process of S1057 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a description will be given of the electric auditors product opening / closing process 3 (S1070) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modification of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening / closing process 3 (S1070).

  In the electric accessory opening / closing process 3 (FIG. 109, S1070), first, it is determined whether or not the large opening of the variable winning device 65 is set to be opened (S1071). If it is determined that opening of the large opening is set (S1071: Yes), the solenoid 600 with the large opening is set to ON (S1072). On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening of the large opening is not set (S1071: No), it is determined whether the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is greater than 0 (S1073). When it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is greater than 0 (S1073: Yes), the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is decremented by 1 (S1074). It is determined whether the value of the small hit release counter 203i is 0 (S1075).

  When it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is 0 (S1075: Yes), the solenoid 600 having the large opening is set to off (non-excitation) (S1076), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is 0 or less (S1073: No), or when it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is not 0 (S1075: No), The process of S1077 is executed.

  In the process of S1077, it is determined whether the large opening is set to be closed (S1077). When it is determined that the large opening is set to be closed (S1077: Yes), the solenoid 600 having the large opening is set to off (S1078).

  In this manner, when the small opening wins the large opening of the variable winning device 65, the opening is set to be opened twice for 0.5 seconds, but any opening causes the large opening to be opened. Before the door 620 starts rotating, the solenoid 600 is set to be non-excited, so that the opening of the large opening at the time of a small hit can be forcibly restricted.

  As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that the small hit has been won at the time of the small hit because the open mouth is opened to the player. Therefore, at the time of winning a small hit, by displaying the same combination of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 as in the case of the small hit, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit has been won.

  In addition, as described in the fifth and sixth embodiments, in a production in which a plurality of fluctuations including a small hit are made to appear as one change display mode, it is difficult to understand that the small hit has been won. , A plurality of variations can be shown to the player as if they were one variation.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. The command to be performed is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

  In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (ie, in use). ) May be provided in the image controller 237 so that the MPU 231 checks the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and the state of the resident It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when ending the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 checks the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether the scanning is in the blank period. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 to determine whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  In this case, in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since the image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. The image data not required to reside in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Note that the process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a main process loop executed by the MPU 231. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and Can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the respective video RAMs using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In a given address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM and each video RAM may be managed. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when specifying the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is sufficient to simply specify the address set in the common address system. The configuration of the instruction for performing the designation can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected between the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is by the NAND flash memory 234a. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Note that even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low readout speed, but by using the configuration described in the above embodiment of the display control device 114, an image can be displayed at a desired display time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The present invention is not limited to this. A first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. May be stored in the boot program. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored in an internal bus (bus line 240). , A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided therein. May store a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, it is determined whether the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Since the character ROM 234 is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be.

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified for the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b determines that the address is specified by the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from and read out to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thus, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. (Line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, each having image data corresponding to an image corresponding to various modes, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the character ROM 234 while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn. The process of writing the image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the possibility that drawing processing is delayed due to writing of image data can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM may be used as a resident area and a normal area. The area may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write processing. It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

  The type of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other external input, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is made resident. Preferably, it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten during power-on and the contents thereof are continuously held has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from the user, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion. Good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept stored in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave. Also, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and reads the read image data into the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during the unused period (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer instruction). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and is transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not being used (that is, during a period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three symbol display device 81. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receiving the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read out image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal at the time of power failure is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, before starting the transfer of the main image data at the time of power supply from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is checked. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. May be configured. In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the MPU 231 starts execution of the display main process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. In this case, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to reduce the time required to recover from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to an instantaneous stop or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be reduced, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently, and may be configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) that exchanges many data signals is provided. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the data transfer.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period (blank period) during which a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where an actual image is displayed, is scanned (blank period). The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. Thus, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while one area stores the image data read from the character ROM 234, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. And the time required for the processing can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. can do. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are turned on. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the power-on image from the character ROM 234 while displaying the power-on image. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying the main image, the reading of the image data from the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. Although the case of transferring the image data to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 235 is used. , The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a back image change command or a frame button operation command is generated by the audio lamp control device 113, and the back image change command or the frame button operation command is generated by the display control device 114. The case has been described where the back image or the super-reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed based on the operation command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with a change in the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thus, the display control device 114 can change the effect of the rear image or the super reach in accordance with the game state based on the rear image change command or the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image or the super-reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the combined data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image data of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error generation flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 38). The warning image setting process (refer to FIG. 39) may be executed when it is determined that the warning image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since the transmission and reception of the error command from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 are not required, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described. Is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of the magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command notifying an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When the display control device 113 receives an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when the display control device 114 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 Alternatively, the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and turning on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error. Thereby, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image which notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used as the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, an error message image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to immediately notify the magnetic field error. Can be deterred.

  When the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change a part or all of the color tones in one effect, the additional data table or the display data table uses the 1st symbol in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of the sprite after the change in the sprite are associated with the address corresponding to the address in which the time during which the image for the frame is displayed (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is defined as one unit. Color information specifying a color tone may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of the sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the changed color tone in the sprite. When the color information is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing content in the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  When the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying an image to be displayed in one effect is defined by a display data table, the display data table includes an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in correspondence with an address expressed as a unit (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds), and at that time, a sprite type to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed, and a new sprite type to be displayed. The drawing information of the sprite to be displayed may be defined. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 stores, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list instead of the sprite to be replaced. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table includes transfer data information of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be specified together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. When the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. May be configured.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used in accordance with the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing image drawing based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, The case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is described has been described.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in an additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined not only to include the additional drawing content but also to include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the additional drawing content. Good. With this, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed by using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be specified. In comparison with the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified, the load of the processing required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "change start-up", "high-speed change", "announcement effect", "normal reach", and "super reach". After specifying the elements required for the fluctuation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified fluctuation effect are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, a display common to each of the fluctuation patterns is performed for “change start”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like. Therefore, by making the fluctuation effects into elements and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, a case will be described in which the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for which the rendering process is completed (in the above embodiment, every 20 milliseconds). However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that an image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer on which the rendered image is to be rendered based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information developed first from the other frame buffer. Has been described, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, May be alternately selected, the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer, and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller 237 outputs a frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81. Frame buffer to be replaced.

  In the above embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 transmits the sound display control device 113 via the sound lamp controller 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, this may be configured so that the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, until one of the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, the final display effect is performed. Each time the process is completed, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue to display the final display effect until a fluctuation pattern command or a demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the back image and stop and display the third symbol including the main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first stores the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b and displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Can be immediately confirmed that the operation has started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. , A simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is desirably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the fluctuation display using the power-on fluctuation image can be performed more quickly.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the transfer at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  Also, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated by the sprite type itself, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be specified. The display control device 114 reads out the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Manage the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. It is no longer necessary to manage both the information specifying the character string and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233 instead. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and It is determined whether or not is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When a transfer instruction for image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. It is described whether the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is determined whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. The sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is necessary, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “back A” of the plurality of back images is made to reside in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of a rear image used in a part of the super reach may be made to reside in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the rear image of the super reach having high or expected appearance frequency resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Times can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data designated by the character string from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The MPU 231 describes information relating to the required sprite type in the table, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally read from the character ROM 234 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the image data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above embodiment, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled so fast that the player cannot visually recognize them is displayed. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise image y image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 performs the main control of the reserved ball number command each time the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is updated (that is, when the value is increased or decreased). Although the case where the signal is transmitted from the device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases in the main control device 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Thereby, the number of times that main control device 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the winning in the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Instead, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is changed by a number in the part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four by the reserved ball number. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81; The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined direction or a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, and a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and is not provided with a handle for launching a ball. Things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Also, some or all of the above-described embodiments and modifications may be combined and implemented.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described.

<Feature A group>
Main control means for performing game control, and slave control means for performing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, wherein the main control means Acquiring means for acquiring the first information, determining whether or not the first information obtained by the obtaining means determines whether or not the lottery game is appropriate based on the establishment of a lottery condition; A determination signal generation unit that generates a determination signal for notifying the slave control unit, a determination information storage unit that stores the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and a determination information storage unit that stores the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied. And a pre-authorization determination signal generation means for generating a pre-authorization determination signal based on the first information and notifying the sub-controlling means, wherein the sub-controlling means outputs an output from the main control means. Pass / fail judgment signal Display means for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the determination based on the determination, display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and establishment of the start condition based on the preliminary determination signal. A prior information storage means for storing prior information for each of the game machines, wherein the main control means dynamically stores a plurality of pieces of dynamic display information for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. Information storage means, dynamic display information determining means for determining one piece of dynamic display information based on the validity / non-permission determination result from the dynamic display information storage means, and the dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means. Dynamic display information signal generating means for generating a dynamic display information signal for notifying the secondary control means of dynamic display information, wherein the secondary control means outputs the dynamic display information signal output from the main control means. Information display A dynamic display mode selecting means for selecting a dynamic display mode, and a number of times the specific display mode relating to a game effect is displayed on the display module, based on the reception of the advance right / wrong determination signal. A gaming machine A1 comprising: a specific display count determining unit, wherein the specific display mode is displayed on the display unit over the dynamic display mode of the continuous lottery game.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in the main control unit that executes the control of the game, the first information is obtained by the obtaining unit based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition based on the first information acquired by the acquisition means, the success / failure determination means determines the success / failure of the lottery game. A hit / fail judgment signal for notifying the slave control means of the hit / fail judgment result of the hit / fail judgment means is generated by the hit / fail judgment signal generating means. Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the first information is stored in the determination information storage means. Before the lottery condition is satisfied, a preliminary success / failure determination signal based on the first information is generated by the preliminary success / failure determination signal generation means, and is notified to the slave control means. In the slave control unit that receives the control signal from the main control unit and controls the game, based on the match determination signal output from the main control unit, the identification information indicating the match determination result is displayed on the display unit. . The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means every time the starting condition is satisfied, based on the prior appropriateness determination signal. In the main control means, a plurality of dynamic display information for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means is stored in the dynamic display information storage means. One dynamic display information is determined by the dynamic display information determining means from the dynamic display information storage means based on the result of the determination. A dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control unit of the dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining unit is generated by the dynamic display information signal generating unit. In the slave control unit, the dynamic display mode is selected by the dynamic display mode selection unit based on the dynamic display information signal output from the main control unit. The number of times the specific display mode relating to the game is displayed on the display means is determined by the specific display number determination means based on the reception of the preliminary success / failure determination signal. The specific display mode is displayed on the display means over the dynamic display mode of the continuous lottery game. Thereby, the awareness of the identification information is reduced by the specific display mode, and it is possible to make a plurality of dynamic display modes appear as one dynamic display mode. Therefore, a novel effect can be shown to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that a disadvantage that the player gets tired of the game early can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub control means has a specific lottery means for executing a lottery of whether or not to display the specific display mode based on the reception of the preliminary success / failure determination signal, and The determining unit displays the specific display mode on the display unit when the determination of the specific display mode is determined by the specific lottery unit is less than the number of times the starting condition stored in the advance information storage unit is satisfied. The specific display mode corresponds to each of the first information stored in the advance information storage unit when the specific display number determination unit determines the number of times. The gaming machine A2, which is displayed once each time over the two consecutive dynamic display modes displayed by the game machine A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. In other words, in the secondary control means, the lottery of whether or not to display the specific display mode is executed by the specific lottery means based on the reception of the preliminary success / failure determination signal. When it is determined that the specific display mode is to be displayed by the specific lottery means, the number of times the specific display mode is displayed on the display means less than the number of times the start condition stored in the advance information storage means is satisfied is determined by the specific display number determination means. Is done. When the number of times is determined by the specific display number determination unit, the specific display mode is performed once over two consecutive dynamic display modes displayed in correspondence with the first information stored in the advance information storage unit. Is displayed. As a result, the dynamic display mode of the first information stored in the determination information storage means is displayed in a specific display mode from the end to the start of the dynamic display, and the plurality of dynamic display modes are displayed in one dynamic display mode. It can be shown to the player as if it were a target display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel effect can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine A2, the specific lottery means determines that the advance information indicated by the received advance right / wrong determination signal is determined to be a hit or is determined to be a hit in the prior information stored in the prior information storage means. Is stored, the probability of deciding to display the specific display mode is set high.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2. In other words, when the advance information indicated by the received advance / non-permission determination signal is determined to be a hit, or when the information determined to be a hit is stored in the advance information stored in the advance information storage unit, the specific display mode is changed. The probability of deciding to display is set higher by the specific lottery means. Thereby, when the specific display mode is displayed, it can be configured to easily become a big hit, and by displaying the specific display mode, the player can expect the big hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the number of times of displaying the specific display mode is determined by the specific display number determining means, and the dynamic display mode is started while the final specific display is being displayed. If the result of the determination as to whether or not the prior information is to be performed is out of date, and if there is the prior information determined to be a hit in the prior information storage means, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the prior information indicates the dynamic display. A gaming machine A4 comprising a number changing means for changing the number determined by the specific number-of-displays determining means so that the last specific display is displayed during the start.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A2 or A3. That is, the number of times the specific display mode is displayed is determined by the specific display number determination means, and the dynamic display is started while the final specific display is being displayed. If the result is out of order and there is prior information that is determined to be a hit in the prior information storage means, the specific display of the last time is not performed while the dynamic display mode corresponding to the prior information starts dynamic display. The number of times determined by the specific number-of-displays determining means is changed by the number changing means so as to be displayed. Thereby, when a game to be won is stored in the information stored in the advance information storage means, the dynamic display mode started while the last specific display mode is displayed is a hit. Since the number of times of the specific display mode is changed so as to achieve the dynamic display mode, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation of the jackpot by displaying the specific display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine A2 or the gaming machine A3, the main control unit acquires dynamic display determination information for determining the dynamic display information based on the establishment of the starting condition. Pre-dynamic display for generating a pre-dynamic display signal for notifying the sub-control means of pre-dynamic display information based on the dynamic display determination information obtained by the dynamic display determination information obtaining means. Signal generation means, and the slave control means, upon receiving the advance dynamic display signal, triggers the advance dynamic display information indicated by the advance dynamic display signal to the advance information. The specific display number determining means determines whether or not the dynamic display mode for starting the dynamic display while the final specific display is being displayed is based on the prior information. Hit or the pre-dynamic Gaming machine A5, wherein the last round of the dynamic display mode to determine from the shown information is what determines the number of specific display mode so that the particular dynamic display mode.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the dynamic display determination information obtaining means obtains the dynamic display determination information for determining the dynamic display information based on the establishment of the starting condition. A preliminary dynamic display signal generation unit generates a preliminary dynamic display signal for notifying the secondary control unit of preliminary dynamic display information based on the dynamic display determination information acquired by the dynamic display determination information acquisition unit. Is done. In the slave control means, upon receiving the advance dynamic display signal, the advance dynamic display information indicated by the advance dynamic display signal is stored in the advance information storage means. The dynamic display is started while the specific display of the last round is displayed. The result of the determination of the dynamic display mode is determined based on the advance information. The number of specific display modes is determined by the specific notice frequency determining means so that the mode becomes the specific dynamic display mode. Thereby, when the specific display mode is displayed, the final dynamic display mode in which the specific display mode is displayed is a jackpot or the specific dynamic display mode, so that the player performs an effect different from the normal time. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that when the specific display mode is displayed, the player can be expected to execute the final dynamic display mode.

  The gaming machine A6 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, wherein the specific display mode is displayed so as to hide the identification information in an area where the identification information is displayed.

  According to any of the gaming machines A6, in addition to the effect of playing any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a specific display mode is displayed in a region where the identification information is displayed so as to hide the identification information. Is difficult for the player to understand that the result is displayed, and it is possible to show the player a continuous lottery game as if it were one lottery game.

  A gaming machine A7 having delay display means for delaying the dynamic display of the identification information after the specific display mode is displayed in any of the gaming machines A1 to A6.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, after the specific display mode is displayed, the dynamic display of the identification information is delayed by the delay display means. There is an effect that the display control with the information does not overlap and the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A6, the display control unit dynamically displays the identification information on the display unit at a low speed for a certain period of time, and then dynamically displays the identification information at a high speed. The gaming machine A8, which is displayed longer than the predetermined period of the subsequent lottery game among the continuous lottery games.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A6. That is, after the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means at a low speed for a certain period, the identification information is dynamically displayed at a high speed by the display control means. Since the consecutive lottery games are displayed longer than a certain period of the subsequent lottery game, the effect that two consecutive lottery games can be shown to the player as if they are one lottery game is obtained. is there.

<Characteristic B group>
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game judgment unit for executing game judgment, a display unit displaying identification information indicating the judgment result of the game judgment unit, and dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit Display control means, storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means, and one dynamic display from the storage means based on the judgment result. A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a mode, wherein the plurality of dynamic display modes include a periodical dynamic display mode in which a display period for displaying a specific display mode relating to a game is set in advance. When the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period. , It was established A display control unit configured to display the specific display mode on the display unit when the display mode is different; and a switching unit configured to switch a dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed to an alternative dynamic display mode. A gaming machine B1 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B1, based on the establishment of the start condition, the game determination is made by the game determination unit. The identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the display unit. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. A plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are stored in the storage means. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the result of the determination from the storage unit. The plurality of dynamic display modes include a periodical dynamic display mode in which a display period for displaying a specific display mode related to a game is set in advance. When the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period, and the display is performed when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. The specific display mode is displayed on the means on the front side of the identification information by the specific display control means. The dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed is switched to the alternative dynamic display mode by the switching unit. Thereby, different effects can be displayed to the player depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied during the notice display period. Therefore, when the specific display mode is displayed, the subsequent dynamic display mode is also switched, so that the player can perform an effect with freshness. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  The gaming machine B2 has operating means operable by a player, and the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operating means has been operated. .

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operating means operable by the player has been operated. Is established, and the player can be more actively involved in the game.

  The gaming machine B3, wherein in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the specific display mode is to notify a player of the number of times displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, in the specific display mode, the number of times the predetermined display condition is satisfied during the display period is notified to the player as the specific display mode. This has the effect that the player can easily identify the number of times of the specific display mode, and can easily play the game.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the storage means stores at least a plurality of the timed dynamic display modes having different numbers or periods of the display periods, and the dynamic display mode determining means stores When the fixed-period dynamic display mode is determined, a display period is set based on the first display period set in the determined fixed-period dynamic display mode, and the predetermined period is set in the display period. A game machine B4 having a display period setting means for setting the next valid period when the condition (1) is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effect is achieved in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3. That is, a plurality of fixed-period dynamic display modes having at least different numbers of display periods or different periods are stored in the storage means. When one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the display period is set based on the first display period set for the determined dynamic display mode. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the display period, the next valid period is set by the display period setting means. Thus, even when a plurality of display periods are set, the first display period may be set at the start of the dynamic display, and the control load at the start of the dynamic display can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be prevented from being concentrated.

<Characteristic C group>
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game judgment unit for executing game judgment, a display unit displaying identification information indicating the judgment result of the game judgment unit, and dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit Display control means, storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means, and one dynamic display from the storage means based on the result of the determination. And a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a mode, wherein the plurality of dynamic display modes include a special dynamic display mode set to be able to display a specific display mode relating to the game. The special dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, and when the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. On the basis of the A display control unit configured to display the specific display mode on the display unit; and a switching unit configured to switch a dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed to an alternative dynamic display mode. Gaming machine C1 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine C1, a determination as to whether or not a game is performed is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the starting condition. The identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit. The identification information is displayed on the display means by the display control means. A plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are stored in the storage means. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the result of the determination from the storage unit. A plurality of dynamic display modes include a special dynamic display mode that is set to be able to display a specific display mode relating to a game. When the special dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the determination that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific display mode is determined. Is displayed on the display means by the specific display control means. The dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed is switched to the alternative dynamic display mode by the switching unit. Thus, even when the same special dynamic display mode is determined, the display timing of the specific display varies depending on the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the timing of switching to the alternative dynamic display mode is also variable, so that the player can be shown as if the dynamic display mode is different each time. Therefore, there is an effect that various game effects can be shown to the player.

  The gaming machine C2 includes operating means operable by a player, and the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operating means has been operated. .

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operating means operable by the player has been operated. Is established, and the player can be more actively involved in the game.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the remaining time determining means for determining the remaining dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode, and the remaining time is shorter than the predetermined time by the remaining time determining means. And a disabling means for setting the satisfaction of the predetermined condition to invalid when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the remaining dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode is determined by the remaining time determination unit. If the remaining time determination unit determines that the remaining time is equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is set to invalid by the invalidation unit. Accordingly, the specific display is displayed during the period in which the result of the determination of the success / failure in the dynamic display mode is confirmed and the problem that the player cannot know the result of the success / failure determination can be suppressed.

<Feature D group>
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game judgment unit for executing game judgment, a display unit displaying identification information indicating the judgment result of the game judgment unit, and dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit Display control means, storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means, and one dynamic display from the storage means based on the result of the determination. And a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a mode, wherein the plurality of dynamic display modes include a special dynamic display mode set to be able to display a specific display mode relating to the game. Are included, an operating means operable by the player, an operation determining means for determining that the operating means has been operated by the player, and a determination that the operating means has been operated by the operation determining means. Counting means for counting the number of times, and when the special dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, it is determined by the operation determining means that the operating means has been operated, and based on the count value of the counting means. A specific display control means for displaying the specific display mode when the display permission condition determined by the determination is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D1, based on the establishment of the starting condition, the determination as to whether or not the game is performed is performed by the determination unit. The identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. A plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are stored in the storage means. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the result of the determination from the storage unit. A plurality of dynamic display modes include a special dynamic display mode set so that a specific display mode relating to a game can be displayed up to a predetermined number of times. The operation determining means determines that the player has operated the operating means operable by the player. The number of times is counted by the counting means based on that the operation determining means determines that the operating means has been operated. When the special dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, it is determined that the operation means has been operated by the operation determination means, and when the count value of the counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the specific display mode is changed to the specific display control means. Is displayed on the display means. As a result, even if the operating means is operated, the specific display mode is not displayed unless the operation is performed a predetermined number of times or more, and the effect can be changed depending on the player's playing style and frequency. Therefore, even if the dynamic display mode is the same, it can be seen as different dynamic display modes depending on the player, and various effects can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early getting tired of the game.

  In the gaming machine D1, the display permission condition is determined based on a count value of the counting means and a set number of the specific display mode set in the special dynamic display mode. Gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the display permission condition is determined based on the count value of the counting means and the set number of the specific display mode set in the special dynamic display mode, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1. There is an effect that the display permission condition of the specific display mode can be changed by the special dynamic display mode.

  The gaming machine D3, wherein in the gaming machine D1 or D2, the display permission condition is set for each number of times the specific display mode set in the special dynamic display mode is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the display permission condition is set for each number of times the specific display mode set in the special dynamic display mode is displayed. There is an effect that the specific display mode can be displayed under different conditions for each number of times that is displayed.

<Feature E group>
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, a first hit that is advantageous to the player and a second hit that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. A display unit that displays identification information indicating a result of the determination, a display control unit that dynamically displays the identification information on the display unit, and a dynamic display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the display control unit. Storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display mode groups, and dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode based on the result of the determination from the storage section. In the gaming machine in which a lottery game is executed based on a lottery result by the determination means, the plurality of dynamic display mode groups include a specific dynamic display mode having a continuous dynamic display mode corresponding to a plurality of lottery games. Flock included A lottery game in which a dynamic display mode of a lottery game that is continuously executed after the lottery game is determined from the specific dynamic display mode group based on the result of the determination of the first hit. The continuous dynamic display mode has a display mode that is continuous with the dynamic display mode of the lottery game before the continuous dynamic display mode is displayed. A gaming machine E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, based on the establishment of the starting condition, at least the hit determination unit determines whether the first hit which is more advantageous to the player and the second hit which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. Is done. The identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the display unit. The display control means displays the identification information on the display means. A plurality of dynamic display mode groups having a dynamic display mode of identification information dynamically displayed by the display control unit are stored by the storage unit. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the result of the determination from the storage unit. Then, the lottery game is executed based on the determination result of the lottery game. The plurality of dynamic display mode groups include a specific dynamic display mode group having a continuous dynamic display mode corresponding to a plurality of lottery games. The number of times of the lottery game that determines the dynamic display mode of the lottery game to be continuously executed after the lottery game from the specific dynamic display mode group based on the determination of the first hit by the hit / fail determination means It is set by the setting means. The continuous dynamic display mode is configured by a display mode that is continuous with the dynamic display mode of the lottery game before the continuous dynamic display mode is displayed. Thereby, by winning the first hit, a plurality of lottery games can be made to appear as if they are one lottery game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine E1, in the continuous dynamic display mode, a display period for displaying a specific display mode related to a game is set in advance, and the dynamic display mode determining means determines the continuous dynamic display mode. When the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in the display period, and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific display control means for displaying the specific display mode on the display means is provided. A gaming machine E2, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, the display period in which the specific display mode relating to the game is displayed is set in advance to the continuous dynamic display mode. The continuous dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit, and when the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period. The specific display mode is displayed by the specific display control means. Therefore, when the continuous dynamic display mode is displayed, the specific display mode is displayed by satisfying the predetermined condition, so that an effect different from that in the normal state can be given to the player.

  In the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, the continuous dynamic display mode group includes a first continuous dynamic display mode configured in a dynamic display mode from the start of the dynamic display mode to during dynamic display; A second interlocked dynamic display mode in which the displayed state is continued, and a third continuous dynamic display mode composed of a dynamic display mode from the dynamically displayed state until the dynamic display is stopped and displayed. At least, the first continuous dynamic display mode, the second continuous dynamic display mode, and the third continuous mode from the continuous dynamic display mode group corresponding to the number of times set by the transition set number setting unit. The gaming machine E3, wherein any one of the dynamic display modes is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, in the continuous dynamic display mode group, the first continuous dynamic display mode includes a dynamic display mode from the start of the dynamic display mode to during the dynamic display. In the second continuous dynamic display mode, the state of dynamic display is continued. The third continuous dynamic display mode includes a dynamic display mode from a state in which the dynamic display is performed until the dynamic display is stopped and displayed. The first continuous dynamic display mode, the second continuous dynamic display mode, and the third continuous dynamic display mode are selected from the continuous dynamic display mode group according to the number of times set by the transition set number setting unit. Either one is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. This makes it possible to easily set a display mode that is continuous with the display mode of the previous lottery game. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a dynamic display mode of a plurality of lottery games as if it were a dynamic display mode of a single lottery game. Therefore, even when the lottery game as the result of the misappropriation determination that the game is missed is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to show the player as if the missed lottery game was performed once, and the player is disappointed with the game. There is an effect that the number of times can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, before the number of lottery games set by the number-of-transitions setting means is executed, based on the determination made by the second hit and the success / failure determination means. A gaming machine E4 comprising reset means for resetting the number of times set by the number-of-transitions setting means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3. That is, before the lottery game of the number set by the number-of-transitions setting means is executed, the number set by the number-of-transitions setting means is used by the resetting means based on the result determined by the second hit and the success / failure determination means. Reset. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a problem that the continuous dynamic display mode is continuously executed even after the jackpot game is started before the lottery game set by the number-of-transitions setting unit is performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the number of times up to the jackpot lottery game, and it is possible to show the player a plurality of changes as if it were a single change which becomes a jackpot.

<Feature F>
Main control means for performing control of the game; and sub-control means for performing control of the game based on a control signal from the main control means. Acquiring means for acquiring the first information, and a first win in which a first privilege game which is advantageous to the player is given based on establishment of a lottery condition from the first information acquired by the acquiring means. A hit / fail judgment means for judging at least a second hit to which a second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is given, and a hit / fail judgment result of the hit / judgment determining means to the slave control means, Applicability judgment information generating means for generating applicability judgment information for notifying the user of the identifiability, judgment information storage means for storing the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and before the lottery condition is satisfied, In the first information A different dynamic display information group composed of prior information generating means for generating the prior information to be generated and notifying the slave control means and dynamic display information for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. A plurality of stored dynamic display information storage means, and one dynamic display information group among the plurality of dynamic display information groups is determined by the dynamic display information storage means based on the satisfaction of the lottery condition. A dynamic display information determining unit that determines one of the dynamic display information from the determined dynamic display information group according to the result of the determination of the validity and the first information; Dynamic display notification information generating means for generating dynamic display notification information for notifying the dynamic control information determined by the sub control means to the sub control means. Pass / fail judgment output from control means Display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination based on the information, display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and display means corresponding to the dynamic display information of the main control means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information is displayed on the basis of the dynamic display notification information output from the main control unit and the dynamic display mode of the identification information. Dynamic display mode selection means selected from the mode storage means, and prior information storage means for storing prior information each time the starting condition is satisfied, based on prior information received from the main control means, In the gaming machine on which the lottery game is executed based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the plurality of dynamic display information groups may include the plurality of dynamic display information groups, the timing being determined by the success / failure judging means to be a winning in the first hit. dynamic The specific dynamic display information group including the specific dynamic display information determined by the display information determining means is included. The dynamic display mode storage means of the slave control means stores the specific dynamic display information Corresponding to the display information, a specific dynamic display mode capable of displaying a specific display mode on the display unit based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition is stored. The number of transitions for setting the number of lottery games that determines the dynamic display mode of the lottery game to be continuously executed after the lottery game from the specific dynamic display information group based on the determination of the first hit. Setting means, wherein the slave control means sets the number of times set by the number-of-transitions setting means of the main control means based on the first hit determined by the hit / fail determination means of the main control means. Transition times to determine Discriminating means, and each of the specific dynamic displays determined from the specific dynamic display information group according to the prior information stored in the prior information storage means corresponding to the number of times determined by the number-of-transitions determining means A pre-specified dynamic display mode that determines information before the lottery condition is satisfied and determines the specific dynamic display mode selected by the dynamic display mode selection unit according to the determined specific dynamic display information. Determining means, and remaining time determining means for determining the remaining time until the specific dynamic display mode selected in the last lottery game is completed in dynamic display among the times determined by the shift number determining means; And determining an upper limit number of times to display the specific display mode through all the specific dynamic display modes selected in accordance with the number of lottery games determined by the transfer number determination unit. Fixed display number determination means, alternative dynamic display mode storage means storing an alternative dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information in place of the specific dynamic display mode, and the specific display number determination section An alternative dynamic display mode that selects the alternative dynamic display mode based on the fact that the remaining time determined by the remaining time determination means is equal to or longer than a predetermined time when the specific display mode is displayed up to the set upper limit number of times A gaming machine F1 comprising: display mode selecting means.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in the main control means for controlling the game, the first information is obtained by the obtaining means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition based on the first information obtained by the obtaining means, a first win in which a first privilege game which is advantageous to the player is provided and a second win which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The second hit to which the bonus game is awarded is determined at least by the hit determination unit. Based on the control signal from the main control unit, the result of the determination by the determination unit is determined based on a control signal from the main control unit. Generated. Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the first information is stored by the determination information storage means. Prior to the lottery condition being established, prior information based on the first information is generated by the prior information generating means and notified to the slave control means. A plurality of different dynamic display information groups each including dynamic display information for dynamically displaying identification information on the display unit are stored by the dynamic display information storage unit. Based on the lottery condition being satisfied, one of the plurality of dynamic display information groups is determined from the dynamic display information group by the dynamic display information storage means. One of the dynamic display information is determined by the dynamic display information determining means according to the determination result and the first information. Dynamic display notification information for notifying the secondary control unit of the dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining unit is generated by the dynamic display notification information generating unit. On the other hand, in the slave control means, the display means displays identification information indicating the result of the judgment based on the judgment information output from the main control means. The display information is displayed and controlled by the display control means on the display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information corresponding to the dynamic display information of the main control unit is stored by the dynamic display mode storage unit. The dynamic display mode of the identification information is selected by the dynamic display mode selection unit from the dynamic display mode storage unit based on the dynamic display notification information output from the main control unit. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means every time the starting condition is satisfied based on the prior information received from the main control means. The specific dynamic display information group composed of the specific dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means triggered by the determination of the first win by the hit / fail determination means is a plurality of dynamic display information. Included in the group. A specific dynamic display mode corresponding to the specific dynamic display information and capable of displaying the specific display mode on the display unit based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition is stored in the dynamic display mode storage unit of the slave control unit. The main control means determines a dynamic display mode of the lottery game to be continuously executed after the lottery game from the specific dynamic display information group based on the determination of the first hit by the hit / fail determination means. The number of games is set by the transition number setting means. In the sub-control means, the number of times set by the number-of-transitions setting means of the main control means is determined by the number-of-transitions determination means based on the first hit determined by the hit / fail determination means of the main control means. Each specific dynamic display information determined from the specific dynamic display information group according to the advance information stored in the advance information storage means corresponding to the number of times determined by the number-of-transitions determination means is determined before the lottery condition is satisfied. Then, the specific dynamic display mode selected by the dynamic display mode selection unit according to the determined specific dynamic display information is determined by the pre-specific dynamic display mode determination unit. The remaining time until the specific dynamic display mode selected in the final lottery game is completed in the dynamic display is determined by the remaining time determining means. The upper limit number of times of displaying the specific display mode through all the specific dynamic display modes selected in accordance with the number of lottery games determined by the number-of-transitions determination section is determined by the specific display number determination section. An alternative dynamic display mode storing means for dynamically displaying the identification information instead of the specific dynamic display mode is stored by the alternative dynamic display mode storage means. When the specific display mode is displayed up to the upper limit number determined by the specific display number determination unit, the alternative dynamic display mode is replaced based on the fact that the remaining time determined by the remaining time determination unit is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. It is selected by the dynamic display mode selection means. Thus, after the specific display mode up to the upper limit number of times is displayed, the dynamic display mode can be changed to a display mode that matches the remaining time. Therefore, it is possible to provide a dynamic display mode that is different depending on the timing at which the specific display is performed up to the upper limit number of times to the player, and it is possible to diversify the dynamic display mode provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine F1, the number-of-transitions setting means is configured to be able to set the number of transitions equal to or more than the number of the first information stored in the determination information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the number of transitions equal to or more than the number of the first information stored in the determination information storage means can be set by the number-of-transitions setting means. It is possible to cause the player to perform a lottery game in a specific dynamic display mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine F1 or the gaming machine F2, the alternative dynamic display mode storage unit stores a plurality of alternative dynamic display modes having different dynamic display times, and the alternative dynamic display mode selection unit stores the plurality of alternative dynamic display mode selection units. The gaming machine F3, wherein the alternative dynamic display mode is selected from among the alternative dynamic display modes, which is configured with the dynamic display time closest to the remaining time.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F1 or the gaming machine F2. That is, a plurality of alternative dynamic display modes having different dynamic display times are stored by the alternative dynamic display mode storage unit. Among the plurality of alternative dynamic display modes, the alternative dynamic display mode configured with the dynamic display time closest to the remaining time is selected by the alternative dynamic display mode selection means. Therefore, since the dynamic display mode is displayed in accordance with the remaining time, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the identification information is composed of a plurality of identification symbols, and the alternative dynamic display mode includes the remaining one of the identification information indicating the second hit. A gaming machine F4 including a device that displays a reach display mode in which only a dynamic display is performed.

  According to the gaming machine F4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3. That is, the identification information is composed of a plurality of identification symbols. Among the identification information indicating the second hit, information indicating a reach display mode in which only the remaining one identification symbol is dynamically displayed is included in the alternative dynamic display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can expect the second hit to be achieved by displaying the alternative dynamic display mode.

  In the gaming machine F4, the alternative dynamic display mode starts the dynamic display of the identification information from the state of the reach display mode.

<Feature G>
A variable winning device that can be changed between a first state in which game media can be won and a second state in which game media are more difficult to win than the first state, and the start of a lottery game based on the game medium winning. A start winning device that satisfies a condition, and a first win in which a first privilege game that is advantageous to a player is given by changing the variable winning device to the first state based on the satisfaction of the start condition. A right / left determination unit that determines at least whether or not a second win in which a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first win is awarded is provided, and a display unit that displays identification information indicating a result of the determination by the right / left determination unit. And performing variable processing for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state based on the display of the identification information indicating the first hit or the second hit. Variable After the variable process is executed by the control unit and the variable control executing unit in the case of the first hit, before the variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state. And a restricting means for restricting the variable winning device from changing to the first state.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the variable winning device changes the first state in which the game medium can be won and the second state in which the game medium is more difficult to win than the first state. The starting condition of the lottery game is established based on the winning of the game medium to the variable winning device. Based on the establishment of the starting condition, the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the first bonus game which is advantageous to the player is given, and the second win which is more advantageous to the player than the first win is given. The second hit to which the bonus game is awarded is determined at least by the hit determination unit. The identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the display unit. Based on the display of the identification information indicating the first hit or the second hit, the variable control executing means executes variable processing for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state. In the case of the first hit, after the variable processing is executed by the variable control executing means, before the variable winning device changes from the second state to the first state, the variable winning device changes to the first state. Is regulated by the regulation means. This restricts the variable winning device from changing to the first state in the case of the first hit, so that it is possible to suppress a disadvantage that the first privilege game is more advantageous than the second privilege game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the second privilege game, and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine G1, the variable winning device includes: a winning opening in which a game medium wins; a regulation position in which the gaming medium wins in the winning opening in the second state; A movable piece movable to a guiding position for guiding a game medium to the winning opening; and a movable means for moving the movable piece after a predetermined time of operation after the variable processing is performed by the variable control performing means. The gaming machine G2, wherein the regulation means executes a regulation process within the predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in the second state, the regulation position for restricting the game medium from winning to the winning opening of the variable winning device in which the game medium wins, and in the first state, the game medium is guided to the winning opening. The movable piece of the movable winning device that is movable at the guidance position to be provided is provided. Further, the movable piece is moved by the movable means after a predetermined time operation from the execution of the variable processing by the variable control executing means. The process of regulating within a predetermined time is executed by the regulating means. Therefore, in the first hit, the movable piece can be restricted from moving before the variable winning device enters the first state, so that the first privilege game is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game. This has the effect of preventing inconvenience.

  In the gaming machine G1, the variable winning device includes: a winning opening in which a game medium wins; a regulation position in which the gaming medium wins in the winning opening in the second state; A movable piece movable to a guiding position for guiding the game medium to the winning opening; a movable means for moving the movable piece based on execution of the variable processing by the variable control executing means; and A gaming machine G3 comprising: a regulating member movable unit that moves the regulating member to a position that regulates the movement of the movable piece based on the execution of the regulating process.

  According to the gaming machine G3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1. That is, in the variable winning device, in the second state, the regulation position for restricting the game medium from winning to the winning opening where the game medium wins, and in the first state, the guiding position for guiding the game medium to the winning opening. The movable piece is moved. The movable piece is moved by the movable means based on the execution of the variable processing by the variable control execution means. Based on the execution of the restricting process from the restricting means, the restricting member is moved to the position for restricting the movement of the movable piece by the restricting member moving means. Thus, before the variable winning device enters the first state, the movement of the movable piece can be regulated by the regulating member. Therefore, there is an effect that the disadvantage that the first privilege game is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game can be prevented more reliably.

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through a winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a pachinko machine has been known in which a lottery is performed in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting opening, and a fluctuating effect or a big hit effect according to the result of the drawing is displayed on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. .
In such a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that performs a continuous notice display over a plurality of fluctuations and notifies in advance that a specific effect such as a reach fluctuation effect is to be performed in a subsequent fluctuation effect. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-279560).
In this type of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further enhances interest in the game.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine that can enhance the interest in a game and suppress the player from getting tired of the game early. The purpose is to.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises a main control unit for executing a game control, a sub-control unit for executing a game control based on a control signal from the main control unit, The main control means includes: an acquiring means for acquiring first information based on establishment of a starting condition; and a player based on establishment of a lottery condition based on the first information acquired by the acquiring means. A right / left determination unit for determining at least a first win at which a first advantageous bonus game is provided and a second win at which a second bonus game which is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game; A hit / fail judgment information generating means for generating hit / fail judgment information for notifying the slave control means of the hit / fail judgment result of the hit / fail judgment means so that the type can be identified, and storing the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied. Judgment information memorizing hand Prior information generation means for generating prior information based on the first information before the lottery condition is satisfied, and informing the slave control means; and dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. Dynamic display information storage means for storing a plurality of different dynamic display information groups formed by the dynamic display information to be made, and the dynamic display information storage means for storing the plurality of dynamic display information groups based on the satisfaction of the lottery condition. One dynamic display information group is determined from the dynamic display information groups, and one dynamic display information is determined from the determined dynamic display information group according to the result of the pass / fail determination and the first information. Dynamic display information determining means, and dynamic display notification information for generating dynamic display notification information for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means. Generating means; Control means, based on the validity information output from the main control means, display means for displaying identification information indicating the validity determination result, display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, A dynamic display mode storage unit that stores a dynamic display mode of the identification information corresponding to the dynamic display information of the main control unit, based on the dynamic display notification information output from the main control unit. A dynamic display mode selection unit for selecting a dynamic display mode of the identification information from the dynamic display mode storage unit; and, based on the prior information received from the main control unit, advance information each time the start condition is satisfied. And a preliminary information storing means for storing a lottery game based on the establishment of the lottery condition, wherein the plurality of dynamic display information groups are won by the hit / fail judgment means in the first win. did The specific dynamic display information group constituted by the specific dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means upon the determination that The display mode storage unit stores a specific dynamic display mode corresponding to the specific dynamic display information and capable of displaying the specific display mode on the display unit based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition. The main control means sets the dynamic display mode of the lottery game to be continuously executed after the lottery game on the basis of the determination of the first hit by the hit / fail judgment means from the specific dynamic display information group. Shift number setting means for setting the number of lottery games to be determined, wherein the slave control means determines whether the first hit has been determined by the hit / fail determination means of the main control means. Means for setting the number of transfers of means Is determined from the specific dynamic display information group according to the advance information stored in the advance information storage means corresponding to the number of times determined by the number of shifts determined by the number of shifts determined by the number of shifts determined by the predetermined number of times. The specific dynamic display information to be determined is determined before the lottery condition is satisfied, and the specific dynamic display mode selected by the dynamic display mode selection unit according to the determined specific dynamic display information. A predetermined dynamic display mode determining unit for determining the number of times the remaining number of times determined by the number-of-transitions determining unit remains until the specific dynamic display mode selected in the final lottery game is completed. The specific display through all the specific dynamic display modes selected corresponding to the number of times of the lottery game determined by the remaining time determination means for determining the time, and the number of lottery games determined by the number-of-transitions determination means Specific dynamic display mode determining means for determining the maximum number of times of displaying the same, alternative dynamic display mode storing means for storing an alternative dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information in place of the specific dynamic display mode, When the specific display mode is displayed up to the upper limit number determined by the specific display number determining means, the alternative operation is performed based on the fact that the remaining time determined by the remaining time determining means is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. Alternative dynamic display mode selection means for selecting a dynamic display mode.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in the main control unit that executes the control of the game, the first information is obtained by the obtaining unit based on the establishment of the starting condition. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition based on the first information obtained by the obtaining means, a first win in which a first privilege game which is advantageous to the player is given and a second win which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The second hit to which the bonus game is awarded is determined at least by the hit determination unit. Based on the control signal from the main control unit, the result of the determination by the determination unit is determined based on the control signal from the main control unit. Generated. Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the first information is stored by the determination information storage means. Prior to the lottery condition being established, prior information based on the first information is generated by the prior information generating means and notified to the slave control means.
A plurality of different dynamic display information groups composed of dynamic display information for dynamically displaying identification information on the display means are stored by the dynamic display information storage means. Based on the lottery condition being satisfied, one of the plurality of dynamic display information groups is determined from the dynamic display information group by the dynamic display information storage means. One of the dynamic display information is determined by the dynamic display information determining means according to the determination result and the first information. Dynamic display notification information for notifying the slave control unit of the dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining unit is generated by the dynamic display notification information generating unit.
On the other hand, in the slave control means, the display means displays the identification information indicating the result of the judgment based on the judgment information output from the main control means. The display information is displayed and controlled by the display control means on the display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information corresponding to the dynamic display information of the main control unit is stored by the dynamic display mode storage unit. Based on the dynamic display notification information output from the main control means, the dynamic display form of the identification information is selected by the dynamic display form selecting means from the dynamic display form storing means. Prior information is stored by the prior information storage means every time the starting condition is satisfied based on the prior information received from the main control means.
The specific dynamic display information group composed of the specific dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means triggered by the determination of the first win by the hit / fail determination means is a plurality of dynamic display information. Included in the group. A specific dynamic display mode corresponding to the specific dynamic display information and capable of displaying the specific display mode on the display unit based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition is stored in the dynamic display mode storage unit of the slave control unit.
The main control means determines a dynamic display mode of the lottery game to be continuously executed after the lottery game from the specific dynamic display information group based on the determination of the first hit by the hit / fail determination means. The number of games is set by the transition number setting means.
In the sub-control means, the number of times set by the number-of-transitions setting means of the main control means is determined by the number-of-transitions determination means based on the first hit determined by the hit / fail determination means of the main control means. Each specific dynamic display information determined from the specific dynamic display information group according to the advance information stored in the advance information storage means corresponding to the number of times determined by the number-of-transitions determination means is determined before the lottery condition is satisfied. Then, the specific dynamic display mode selected by the dynamic display mode selection unit according to the determined specific dynamic display information is determined by the pre-specific dynamic display mode determination unit.
The remaining time until the specific dynamic display mode selected in the final lottery game is completed in the dynamic display is determined by the remaining time determining means. The upper limit number of times of displaying the specific display mode through all the specific dynamic display modes selected in accordance with the number of lottery games determined by the number-of-transitions determination section is determined by the specific display number determination section. An alternative dynamic display mode storing means for dynamically displaying the identification information instead of the specific dynamic display mode is stored by the alternative dynamic display mode storage means. When the specific display mode is displayed up to the maximum number of times determined by the specific display number determination unit, the alternative dynamic display mode is replaced based on the fact that the remaining time determined by the remaining time determination unit is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. It is selected by the dynamic display mode selection means.
Thus, after the specific display mode up to the upper limit number of times is displayed, the dynamic display mode can be changed to a display mode that matches the remaining time. Therefore, different dynamic display modes can be provided to the player depending on the timing of the specific display up to the upper limit number of times, and the dynamic display modes provided to the player can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
65a large opening (opening)
81 3rd symbol display device ( part of display means)
600 solenoid (movable means)
620 rotating door (movable member)

Claims (1)

Main control means for performing control of the game,
Based on a control signal from the main control means, and a sub-control means for performing control of the game,
The main control means includes:
Acquiring means for acquiring first information based on establishment of a start condition;
Based on the establishment of the lottery condition based on the first information acquired by the acquisition means, the first bonus game which is advantageous to the player is given based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the player is more advantageous than the first bonus game. A win / fail determination means for determining at least a second win to which the second privilege game is awarded,
A determination unit for determining whether or not to determine whether or not the determination result of the determination unit by the determination unit to identify the type of hitting the slave control unit;
Determination information storage means for storing the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied;
Prior information generation means for generating prior information based on the first information and notifying the slave control means before the lottery condition is satisfied;
A dynamic display information storage unit that stores a plurality of different dynamic display information groups configured with dynamic display information for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit,
Based on the fact that the lottery condition is satisfied, one dynamic display information group among the plurality of dynamic display information groups is determined by the dynamic display information storage means, and the determined dynamic display information is determined. Dynamic display information determining means for determining one piece of the dynamic display information according to the result of the determination of the group and the first information from a group,
Dynamic display notification information generating means for generating dynamic display notification information for notifying the dynamic control information determined by the dynamic display information determining means to the slave control means,
The slave control means includes:
A display unit that displays identification information indicating the result of the determination based on the determination information output from the main control unit;
Display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means,
A dynamic display mode storage unit that stores a dynamic display mode of the identification information corresponding to the dynamic display information of the main control unit,
A dynamic display mode selection unit that selects a dynamic display mode of the identification information from the dynamic display mode storage unit based on the dynamic display notification information output from the main control unit;
Based on prior information received from the main control means, prior information storage means for storing prior information each time the start condition is satisfied,
In a gaming machine in which a lottery game is executed based on establishment of the lottery condition,
The plurality of dynamic display information groups include specific dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means when the winning / non-permission determining means determines that the first hit has been won. Specific dynamic display information group,
The dynamic display mode storage unit of the slave control unit stores a specific dynamic display mode corresponding to the specific dynamic display information and capable of displaying the specific display mode on the display unit based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition. That is
The main control means includes:
The dynamic display mode of the lottery game that is continuously executed after the lottery game is determined from the specific dynamic display information group based on the fact that the first hit is determined by the hit / fail determination means. Transfer number setting means for setting the number of times,
The slave control means includes:
Based on the fact that the first hit has been determined by the hit / fail determination means of the main control means, determines the number of times of transition set by the number-of-transitions setting means of the main control means,
Each of the specific dynamic display information determined from the specific dynamic display information group according to the advance information stored in the advance information storage means corresponding to the number of times determined by the shift number determination means is selected by lottery. A prior specific dynamic display mode determining unit that determines before the condition is satisfied and determines the specific dynamic display mode selected by the dynamic display mode selecting unit according to the determined specific dynamic display information;
Remaining time determining means for determining the remaining time until the specific dynamic display mode selected in the last lottery game is completed in the dynamic display, among the times determined by the shift number determining means,
A specific display number determination unit that determines an upper limit number of times to display the specific display mode through all the specific dynamic display modes selected in accordance with the number of lottery games determined by the transfer number determination unit;
Alternative dynamic display mode storage means in which an alternative dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information in place of the specific dynamic display mode is stored,
When the specific display mode is displayed up to the upper limit number of times determined by the specific display number determining means, the alternative dynamic mode is determined based on the remaining time determined by the remaining time determining means being equal to or longer than a predetermined time. And a substitute dynamic display mode selecting means for selecting a display mode.

Images